Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 1.
Explain irreversible reaction.
Answer:
Irreversible reaction:
i. Reactions which occur only in one direction, namely, from reactant to products are called irreversible reactions.
ii. They proceed in only a single direction until one of the reactants is exhausted.
iii. The direction in which an irreversible reaction occurs is indicated by an arrow (→) pointing towards the products in the chemical equation.
e.g. a. \(\mathrm{C}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\text { Burn }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
b. \(2 \mathrm{KClO}_{3(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{KCl}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Question 2.
What is a closed system?
Answer:
A system in which there is no exchange of matter with the surroundings is called a closed system.

Question 3.
What is an open system?
Answer:
A system in which exchange of both matter and heat occurs with the surroundings is called an open system.

Question 4.
Why was calcium oxide used in theatre lighting?
Answer:
Calcium oxide (CaO) on strong heating glows with a bright white light. Hence, CaO was used in theatre lighting, which gave rise to the phrase ‘in the limelight’.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 5.
Explain liquid-vapour equilibrium with an example.
Answer:
Liquid-vapour equilibrium:
i. Consider reversible physical process of evaporation of liquid water into water vapour in a closed vessel. Initially, there is practically no water vapour in the vessel.

ii. When the liquid evaporates in the closed container, the liquid molecules escape from the liquid surface into vapour phase building up vapour pressure. They also condense back into liquid state because the container is closed.

iii. In the beginning the rate of evaporation is high and the rate of condensation is low. But with time, as more and more vapour is formed, the rate of evaporation goes down and the rate of condensation increases. Eventually the two rates become equal. This gives rise to a constant vapour pressure. This state is known as an ‘equilibrium state’.
In this state, the rate of evaporation is equal to the rate of condensation.
It may be represented as: H2O(l) ⇌ H2O(Vapour)

iv. At equilibrium, the pressure exerted by the gaseous water molecules at a given temperature remains constant, known as the equilibrium vapour pressure of water (or saturated vapour pressure of water or aqueous tension). The saturated vapour pressure increases with increase of temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 1
[Note: The saturated vapour pressure of water at 100 °C is 1 atm (1.013 bar). Hence, water boils at 100 °C when pressure is 1 atm.]

Question 6.
What is meant by the term ‘normal boiling point’ of a liquid?
Answer:
For any pure liquid at 1 atm pressure, the temperature at which its saturated vapour pressure equals to atmospheric pressure is called the normal boiling point of that liquid.
e.g. The boiling point of ethyl alcohol is 78 °C i.e., the saturated vapour pressure of ethyl alcohol at 78 °C is 1 atm (1.013 bar).

Question 7.
Give an example of solid-liquid equilibrium.
Answer:
A mixture of ice and water in a perfectly insulated thermos flask at 273 K is an example of solid-liquid equilibrium.
H2O(s) ⇌ H2O(l)

Question 8.
Identify the type of equilibrium in the following physical processes:
i. Camphor(s) ⇌ Camphor(g)
ii. Ammonium chloride(s) ⇌ Ammonium chloride(g)
iii. Carbon dioxide gas ⇌ Dry ice
iv. Water ⇌ Ice
Answer:
i. Solid – vapour equilibrium
ii. Solid – vapour equilibrium Solid
iii. Solid – vapour equilibrium
iv. Solid – liquid equilibrium

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 9.
Name two substances that undergoes sublimation.
Answer:
Camphor, ammonium chloride.

Question 10.
Write a short note on chemical equilibrium.
Answer:
Chemical equilibrium:

  • If a reaction takes place in a closed system so that the products and reactants cannot escape, we often find that reaction does not give a 100% yield of products. Instead some reactants remain after the concentrations stop changing.
  • When there is no further change in concentration of reactant and product, the chemical reaction has attained equilibrium, with the rates of forward and reverse reactions being equal.
  • Chemical equilibrium at a given temperature is characterized by constancy of measurable properties such as pressure, concentration, density, etc.
  • Chemical equilibrium can be approached from either side of the chemical reaction.

Question 11.
Explain the law of mass action and give its mathematical representation.
Answer:
Statement: The law of mass action states that the rate of a chemical reaction at each instant is proportional to the product of concentrations of all the reactants.
Explanation: A rate equation can be written for a reaction by applying the law of mass action as follows: Consider a reaction, A + B → C
Here A and B are the reactants and C is the product. The concentrations of chemical species are expressed in mol L-1 and denoted by putting the formula in square brackets. On applying the law of mass action to this
reaction, a proportionality expression can be written as: Rate ∝ [A] [B]
This proportionality expression is transformed into an equation by introducing a proportionality constant, k, as follows:
Rate = k [A] [B]
This equation is called the rate equation and the proportionality constant, k, is called the rate constant of the reaction.

Question 12.
Write the rate equation for the following reactions:
i. C + O2 → CO2
ii. 2KClO3 → 2KCl + 3O2
Answer:
The rate equation is written by applying the law of mass action.
i. The reactants are C and O2
Rate ∝ [C] [O2]
∴ Rate = k [C] [O2]
ii. The reactant is KClO3 and its 2 molecules appear in the balanced equation.
∴ Rate ∝ [KClO3]2
∴ Rate = k [KClO3]2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 13.
Derive the expression of equilibrium constant, KC for the reaction:
A + B ⇌ C + D
Answer:
Consider a hypothetical reversible reaction A + B ⇌ C + D.
Two reactions, namely, forward and reverse reactions occur simultaneously in a reversible chemical reaction. The rate equations for the forward and reverse reactions are:
Rateforward ∝ [A][B]
∴ Rateforward = kf [A] [B] …… (1)
∴ Ratereverse ∝ [C] [D]
∴ Ratereverse = kr [C] [D] …. (2)
At equilibrium, the rates of forward and reverse reactions are equal. Thus,
Rateforward = Ratereverse
∴ kf [A] [B] = kr [C] [D]
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{r}}}=\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{[\mathrm{C}][\mathrm{D}]}{[\mathrm{A}][\mathrm{B}]}\) …….. (3)
KC is called the equilibrium constant.

Question 14.
Show that the equilibrium constant of the reverse chemical reaction (KC) is the reciprocal of the equilibrium constant (KC).
Answer:
Consider a reversible chemical reaction:
aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD
The equilibrium constant, KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
Consider the reverse reaction:
cC + dD ⇌ aA + bB.
The equilibrium constant, KC is:
KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{A}]^{a}[\mathrm{~B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{C}}}\)
Thus, equilibrium constant of the reverse chemical reaction (KC) is the reciprocal of the equilibrium constant KC.

Question 15.
Write equilibrium constant expressions for both forward and reverse reaction for the synthesis of ammonia by the Haber process.
Answer:
Synthesis of ammonia by Haber process:
N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 2

Question 16.
How are the equilibrium constants of the following pair of equilibrium reactions related?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 4
ii. KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CO}_{2}\right]\left[\mathrm{N}_{2}\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]\left[\mathrm{N}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}\)

Question 17.
Write KP expression for the reaction:
aA(g) + bB(g) ⇌ cC(g) + dD(g)
Answer:
For the given reaction,
KP = \(\frac{\left(P_{c}\right)^{c}\left(P_{D}\right)^{d}}{\left(P_{A}\right)^{a}\left(P_{B}\right)^{b}}\)

Question 18.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
Write expressions for KP and substitute expressions for PN2, PH2 and PNH3 using ideal gas equation.
Answer:
For the given reaction, KP = \(\frac{\left(P_{N H_{3}}\right)^{2}}{\left(P_{N_{2}}\right)\left(P_{H_{2}}\right)^{3}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 5
[Note: The above question is modified to apply appropriate textual context, i. e., to indicate that students need to use ideal gas equation to derive expressions for PN2, PH2 and PNH3]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 19.
For a chemical equilibrium reaction
H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g),
write an expression for KP (and relate it to KC).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 6

Question 20.
Write the relationship between KC and KP for the following equilibria:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 7
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 9

Question 21.
Write the expressions for KC and KP and the relationship between them for the equilibrium reaction,
2A(g) + B(g) ⇌ 3C(g) + 2D(g)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 10

Question 22.
Explain in short homogeneous equilibrium and heterogeneous equilibrium.
Answer:
i. In a homogeneous equilibrium, the reactants and products are in the same phase.
e.g. Dissociation of HI:
2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g)
ii. In a heterogeneous equilibrium, the reactants and products exist in different phases, e.g. Formation of NH4Cl:
NH3(g) + HCl(g) ⇌ NH4Cl(s)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 23.
The unit of KC is different for different reactions. Explain this statement with suitable examples.
Answer:
Unit of equilibrium constant:
i. The unit of equilibrium constant depends upon the expression of KC which is different for different equilibria. Therefore, the unit of KC is also different for different reactions.
ii. Consider the following equilibrium reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 11

iii. Consider the following equilibrium reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 12

Question 24.
Write the equilibrium constant expression for the decomposition of baking soda. Deduce the unit of KC from the above expression.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 13

[Note: Considering gaseous reactants and products, in this reaction, Δn = 2 – 0 = 2
∴ Units of KC = (mol dm-3)Δn
= (mol dm-3)2
= mol2 dm-6
Thus, the units of the above reaction is mol2 dm-6.]

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of equilibrium constant?
Answer:
Characteristics of equilibrium constant:

  • The value of equilibrium constant is independent of initial concentrations of either the reactants or products.
  • Equilibrium constant is temperature dependent. Hence, KC and KP change with change in temperature.
  • Equilibrium constant has a characteristic value for a particular reversible reaction represented by a balanced equation at a given temperature.
  • Higher value of KC or KP means more concentration of products is formed and the equilibrium point is more towards right hand side and vice versa.

Question 26.
Explain how equilibrium constant helps in predicting the direction of the reaction.
Answer:
Prediction of the direction of the reaction:
i. For the reaction, aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD,
The equilibrium constant (KC) is given as:
KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
where, all the concentrations are equilibrium concentrations.
ii. When the reaction is not necessarily at equilibrium, the concentration ratio is called QC i.e.,
QC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
iii. By comparing QC with KC for a reaction under given conditions, we can decide whether the forward or the reverse reaction should occur to establish the equilibrium.
a. QC < KC: The reaction will proceed from left to right, in forward direction, generating more product to attain the equilibrium.
b. QC > KC: The reaction will proceed from right to left, removing product to attain the equilibrium.
c. QC = KC: The reaction is at equilibrium and no net reaction occurs.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 14
[Note: The prediction of the direction of the reaction on the basis of QC and KC values makes no comment on the time required for attaining the equilibrium.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 27.
Explain how KC can be used to know the extent of the reaction?
Answer:
Extent of the reaction: The equilibrium constant expression indicates that the magnitude of KC is:
i. directly proportional to the concentrations of the products.
ii. inversely proportional to the concentrations of the reactants.
a. Value of KC is very high (KC > 103):
At equilibrium, there is a high proportion of products compared to reactants.
Forward reaction is favoured.
Reaction is in favour of products and nearly goes to completion.

b. Value of KC is very low (KC < 10-3):
At equilibrium, only a small fraction of the reactants is converted into products.
Reverse reaction is favoured.
Reaction hardly proceeds towards the products.

c. Value of KC is in the range of 10-3 to 103:
Appreciable concentrations of both reactants and products are present at equilibrium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 15

Question 28.
For the following reactions, write KC expressions and predict direction of the reactions based on the magnitude of their equilibrium constants.
i. 2H2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2H2O(g), KC = 2.4 × 1047 at 500 K
ii. 2H2O(g) ⇌ 2H2(g) + O2(g), KC = 4.2 × 10-48 at 500 K
Answer:
i. a. KC expression:
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\right]^{2}}{\left[\left[\mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]\right]^{2}\left[\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]}\)
b. For the reaction, KC = 2.4 × 1047 at 500 K
If the value of KC >>> 103, forward reaction is favoured.
Hence, the given reaction will proceed in the forward direction and will nearly go to completion.

ii. a. KC expression:
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]^{2}\left[\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\right]^{2}}\)
b. For the reaction, KC = 4.2 × 10-48 at 500 K
If the value of KC <<< 10-3, reverse reaction is favoured.
Hence, the given reaction will proceed in the backward direction and will nearly go to completion.

Question 29.
Describe how equilibrium constant can be used to calculate the composition of an equilibrium mixture.
Answer:
An equilibrium constant can be used to calculate the composition of an equilibrium mixture.
Consider an equilibrium reaction, A(aq) + B(aq) ⇌ C(aq) + D(aq)
The equilibrium constant is 4.0 at a certain temperature.
Let the initial amount of A and B be 2.0 mol in ‘V’ litres. Let x mol be the equilibrium amount of C.
Hence, we can construct a table as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 16
The expression for equilibrium constant can be written as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 17
Substituting the value of equilibrium concentration, we get
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 18
Therefore, equilibrium concentrations are 0.67 mol of A, 0.67 mol of B, 1.33 mol of C and 1.33 mol of D in V litres.

Question 30.
Explain the link between chemical equilibrium and chemical kinetics:
Answer:
Equilibrium constant (KC) is related to rate or velocity constants of forward reaction (kf) and reverse reaction (kr) as:
KC = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{r}}}\)
This equation can be used to determine the composition of the reaction mixture
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 19
[Note: The equilibrium refers to the relative amounts of reactants and products and thus a shift in equilibrium in a particular direction will imply the reaction in that direction will be favoured.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 31.
Equal concentrations of hydrogen and iodine are mixed together in a closed container at 700 K and allowed to come to equilibrium. If the concentration of HI at equilibrium is 0.85 mol dm-3, what are the equilibrium concentrations of H2 and I2 if KC = 54 at this temperature?
Solution:
Given: [HI(g)] = 0.85 mol dm-3
KC = 54 at 700 K
Equilibrium concentrations of H2 and I2
Formula: KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{a}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}\)
Balanced chemical reaction: 2HI(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 20
Equilibrium concentration of I2(g) = Equilibrium concentration of H2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 21
Ans: Equilibrium concentrations of H2 and I2 are equal to 0.12 mol dm-3.

Question 32.
Calculate Kc at 500 K for the reaction,
2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g) if the equilibrium concentrations are [HI] = 0.5 M, [H2] = 0.08 M and [I2] = 0.062 M.
Solution:
Given: T = 500 K,
At equilibrium, [HI] = 0.5 M, [H2] = 0.08 M, [I2] = 0.062 M.
To find: Equilibrium constant KC
Formula: KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
Calculation: The above equilibrium reaction is given as 2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g)
The expression of KC is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 22
Ans: KC at 500 K for the given reaction is 0.0198.

Question 33.
Calculate KC and KP for the reaction at 295 K, N2O4 ⇌ 2NO2(g) if the equilibrium concentrations are [N2O4] = 0.75 M and [NO2] = 0.062 M, R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution:
Given: R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1, T = 295 K
At equilibrium , [N2O4] = 0.75 M, [NO2] = 0.062 M
To find: Equilibrium constants, KP and KC
Formulae: i. KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{a}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}\)
ii. KP = KC (RT)Δn
Calculation : The equilibrium reaction is given as N2O4(g) ⇌ 2NO2(g)
The expression of KC is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 23
KP is related to KC by expression: KP = KC (RT)Δn
where, Δn = numbers of moles of gaseous products – number of moles of gaseous reactants
= 2 – 1 = 1
∴ KP = KC(RT)1
∴ KP = 5.13 × 10-3 × 0.08206 × 295
∴ KP= 123.9 × 10-3 = 0.124
Ans: KC and KP for the reaction at 295 K are 5.13 × 10-3 and 0.124 respectively.

Question 34.
The equilibrium constant KC for the reaction of hydrogen with iodine is 54.0 at 700 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 24
KC = 54.0 at 700 K
If kf is the rate constant for the formation of HI and kr is the rate constant for the decomposition of HI, deduce whether kr is larger or smaller than kr.
ii. If the value of kr at 700 K is 1.16 × 10-3, what is the value of kf ?
Solution:
Given: i. KC = 54.0 at 700 K
ii. kr = 1.16 × 10-3 at 700 K
To find: i. Whether kf is larger or smaller than kr.
ii. Value of kf.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 25

Question 35.
Given the equilibrium reaction, H2O(g) + CH4(g) ⇌ CO(g) + 3H2(g)
Using Le Chatelier’s principle, predict how concentration of CO will change when the equilibrium is disturbed by
i. adding CH4
ii. adding H2
iii. removing H2O
iv. removing H2
Answer:
i. Adding CH4: Adding CH4 will favour the forward reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will increase.
ii. Adding H2: Adding H2 will favour the reverse reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will decrease.
iii. Removing H2O: Removing H2O will favour the reverse reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will decrease.
iv. Removing H2: Removing H2 will favour the forward reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will increase.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 36.
By using Le Chatelier’s principle, explain the effect of change in pressure (due to volume change) on the composition of equilibrium mixture.
Answer:
Change in pressure:
i. The change in pressure has no effect on the concentrations of solids and liquids. However, it appreciably affects the concentrations of gases.
From the ideal gas equation, PV = nRT or P = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}\)RT
∴ P ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
where, the ratio n/V is an expression for the concentration of the gas in mol dm-3.
ii. According to Le Chatelier’s principle at constant temperature, when pressure is increased, the equilibrium will shift in a direction in which the number of molecules decreases and when the pressure is decreased the equilibrium will shift in a direction in which the number of molecules increases.

[Note: For a reaction in which decrease in volume takes place, the reaction will be favoured by increasing pressure and for a reaction in which increase in volume takes place, the reaction will be favoured with lowering pressure, temperature being constant.]

Question 37.
An equilibrium mixture of dinitrogen tetroxide (colourless gas) and nitrogen dioxide (brown gas) is set up in a sealed flask at a particular temperature. Observe the effect of change of pressure on the gaseous equilibrium and complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 26
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 27

Question 38.
By using Le Chatelier’s principle, explain the effect of change in pressure for the following equilibrium:
H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)
Answer:
As there is the same number of molecules of gas on both sides, change of pressure has no effect on the equilibrium.

Question 39.
Explain the effect of change in pressure due to volume change of the following equilibria:
i. 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) ⇌ 2NOCl(g)
ii. 2NO(g) ⇌ N2(g) + O2(g)
Answer:
i. 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) ⇌ 2NOCl(g)
In the forward reaction, the number of molecules decreases (3 to 2) and in the reverse reaction the number of molecules increases (2 to 3).
a. Effect of increase in pressure: According to Le Chatelier’s principle, when pressure is increased the forward reaction is favoured as the number of molecules decreases. Thus, when the pressure of the equilibrium system is increased at constant temperature by reducing the volume, the yield of NOCl increases.
b. Effect of decrease in pressure: When the pressure is decreased the equilibrium will shift from right to left. Therefore, the yield of NOCl will decrease.

ii. 2NO(g) ⇌ N2(g) + O2(g)
As both reactants and products have equal numbers of moles (or molecules), there is no effect of change in pressure (due to volume change) on the composition of the equilibrium mixture.

Question 40.
Explain the effect of change in temperature on the value of KC.
Answer:

  • The value of equilibrium constant is unaffected if temperature remains constant.
  • However, a change in temperature alters the value of equilibrium constant.
  • In a reversible reaction, one of the reactions is exothermic (heat is released) and the other is endothermic (heat is absorbed).
  • The value of equilibrium constant for an exothermic reaction decreases with increase in the temperature and that of endothermic reaction increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 41.
Explain the effect of change in temperature on the following equilibria:
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g) ; ΔH = – 90 kJ
Answer:
i. The forward reaction is exothermic and reverse reaction is endothermic. According to Le Chatelier’s principle, when the temperature of the equilibrium mixture increases, the equilibrium shifts from right to left in endothermic direction. Therefore, the yield of CH3OH decreases at high temperature.

ii. When the temperature decreases, the forward exothermic reaction is favoured. Therefore, the yield of CH3OH increases at low temperature.
Thus, the decomposition of CH3OH into CO and H2 is favoured with increase in temperature, whereas formation of CH3OH is favoured with decrease in temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 42.
By using Le Chatelier’s principle, explain the effect of addition of a catalyst on the composition of equilibrium mixture.
Answer:

  • When a catalyst is added to the equilibrium mixture, the rates of forward and reverse reactions increases to the same extent. Hence, the position of equilibrium remains unaffected.
  • A catalyst does not change the composition of equilibrium mixture. The equilibrium concentrations of reactants and products remain same and catalyst does not shift the equilibrium in favour of either reactants or products.
  • The value of equilibrium constant is also not affected by the presence of a catalyst.

[Note: A catalyst does not appear in the balanced chemical equation and in the equilibrium constant expression.]

Question 43.
Consider an esterification reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 28
What will happen if H+ ions are added to the reaction mixture?
Answer:
H+ ions act as catalyst in the esterification reaction. Hence, the addition of H+ ions reduces the time for the completion of reaction.

Question 44.
Complete the following table that shows the shifts in the equilibrium position for the reaction:
N2O4(g) + Heat ⇌ 2NO2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 30

Question 45.
Summarize effects of following four factors on the position of equilibrium and value of KC:
i. Concentration
ii. Pressure
iii. Temperature
iv. Catalyst
Answer:

Effect ofPosition of equilibriumValue of KC
ConcentrationChangesNo change
PressureChanges if reaction involves change in number of gas moleculesNo change
TemperatureChangeChange
CatalystNo changeNo change

Question 46.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. The value of equilibrium constant depends on temperature.
ii. If QC < KCC, the reaction will proceed from right to left consuming more product to attain equilibrium.
iii. Any change in the pressure of a gaseous reaction mixture at equilibrium, changes the value of KC.
iv. In a reversible reaction, the reverse reaction has an energy change that is equal and opposite to that of the forward reaction.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
If QC > KC the reaction will proceed from right to left consuming more product to attain equilibrium.
iii. False
Any change in the pressure of a gaseous reaction mixture at equilibrium, does not change the value of KC.
iv. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 47.
Draw the flowchart showing the manufacture of NH3 by Haber process.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 31

Question 48.
Explain in short: The Haber process.
Answer:
Haber process:

  • The Haber process is the process of synthesis of ammonia gas by reacting together hydrogen gas and nitrogen gas in a particular stoichiometric ratio by volumes and at selected optimum temperature and pressure.
  • The chemical reaction is: \(\mathrm{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+3 \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\text { Catalyst }}{\rightleftharpoons} 2 \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\text { Heat }\)
    The reaction proceeds with a decrease in number of moles (Δn = -2) and the forward reaction is exothermic.
  • Iron (containing a small quantity of molybdenum) is used as catalyst.
  • The optimum temperature is about 773 K and the optimum pressure is about 250 atm.

Question 49.
Consider the reaction P(g) + Q(g) ⇌ PQ(g). Diagram ‘X’ represents the reaction at equilibrium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 32
i. If each molecule (sphere) represents a partial pressure of 1 atm, calculate the value of KP.
ii. Predict the change in equilibrium, when the volume is increased by 50 percentage.
Answer:
i. For the given equilibrium mixture:

Chemical speciesPQPQ
Partial pressure467

KP = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{PQ}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{p}} \times \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{Q}}}=\frac{7}{4 \times 6}\) = 0.29
ii. Increasing the volume will shift the equilibrium position to the side with higher number of gaseous moles. In the given reaction, the equilibrium will shift to the left (toward reactant) resulting in an increase in the concentration of P and Q accompanied by a corresponding decrease in concentration of PQ.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is expression of KC for
2NH3(g) ⇌ N2(g) + 3H2(g)?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 33
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{N}_{2}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]^{3}}{\left[\mathrm{NH}_{3}\right]^{2}}\)

2. For the system 3A + 2B ⇌ C, the expression for equilibrium constant is …………..
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 34
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]}{[\mathrm{A}]^{3}[\mathrm{~B}]^{2}}\)

3. For the reaction C(s) + CO2(g) ⇌ 2CO(g) the partial pressure of CO2 and CO are 4 and 8 atm, respectively, then KP for the reaction is ……………
(A) 16 atm
(B) 2 atm
(C) 5 atm
(D) 4 atm
Answer:
(A) 16 atm

4. The equilibrium constant value for the reaction:
2H2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2H2O(g) is 2.4 × 1047 at 500 K. What is the value of equilibrium constant for the reaction:
2H2O(g) ⇌ 2H2(g) + O2(g) ?
(A) 0.41 × 10-46
(B) 0.41 × 1047
(C) 0.41 × 10-48
(D) 0.41 × 10-47
Answer:
(D) 0.41 × 10-47

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

5. For the reaction CO(g) + Cl2(g) ⇌ COCl2(g), KP/KC is equal to ……………
(A) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
(B) RT
(C) \(\sqrt{\mathrm{RT}}\)
(D) 1.0
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{RT}}\)

6. For which of the following reaction, KP = KC?
(A) PCl5(g) ⇌ PCl3(g) + Cl2(g)
(B) N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
(C) H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)
(D) 2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g)
Answer:
(C) H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)

7. For the equilibrium reaction
2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g) + 60.0 kJ, the increase in temperature ……………..
(A) favours the formation of N2O4
(B) favours the decomposition of N2O4
(C) does not affect the equilibrium
(D) stops the reaction
Answer:
(B) favours the decomposition of N2O4

8. The following reaction occurs in the blast furnace where iron ore is reduced to iron metal:
3Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) ⇌ 2Fe(l) + 3CO2(g)
Using the Le Chatelier’s principle, predict which one of the following will NOT disturb the equilibrium?
(A) Removal of CO
(B) Removal of CO2
(C) Addition of CO2
(D) Addition of Fe2O3
Answer:
(D) Addition of Fe2O3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

9. The reaction A + B ⇌ C + D + heat, has reached equilibrium. The reaction may be made to proceed forward by
(A) adding more C
(B) adding more D
(C) decreasing the temperature
(D) increasing the temperature
Answer:
(C) decreasing the temperature

10. Identify the CORRECT statement.
(A) Catalyst lowers activation energy for the forward and reverse reactions by exactly the same amount.
(B) The value of equilibrium constant decreases in presence of a catalyst.
(C) Catalyst affect the position of the equilibrium.
(D) Catalyst changes the equilibrium composition of a reaction mixture.
Answer:
(A) Catalyst lowers activation energy for the forward and reverse reactions by exactly the same amount.

11. The equilibrium constant for the reaction:
N2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) is 4 × 10-4 at 2000 K. In presence of a catalyst, the equilibrium is attained ten times faster. Therefore, the equilibrium constant in presence of catalyst of 2000 K is …………..
(A) 40 × 10-4
(B) 4 × 10-2
(C) 4 × 10-3
(D) 4 × 10-4
Answer:
(D) 4 × 10-4

12. The rate of formation of NH3 can be increased by using catalyst …………….
(A) Fe + Co
(B) Mo + Fr
(C) Fe + Mo
(D) Fe + Mg
Answer:
(C) Fe + Mo

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 1.
Explain the phenomenon of adsorption with the help of examples.
Answer:
Consider the following two examples:

  • Example 1: When a metal spoon is dipped in milk and taken out, it is observed that a film of milk particles covers the spoon’s surface.
  • Example 2: If a cold water bottle is taken out from the refrigerator and kept on a table for a while, water vapour is seen to condense on the outer surface of the bottle, forming droplets or a film.
  • In the above examples, the milk particles or the water molecules from the air get adsorbed on the surface of the spoon and the bottle, respectively.
  • Similarly, the surfaces of many objects around us are exposed to the atmosphere. Water molecules as well as other gas molecules such as N2, O2, from the air form an invisible multimolecular film on these objects. This is known as the phenomenon of adsorption.

Question 2.
Why does adsorption occur?
Answer:

  • The adsorption phenomenon is caused by dispersion forces (also known as London dispersion forces or van der Waals forces) which are short-range and additive. Adsorption force is the sum of all interactions between all the atoms.
  • The pulling interactions cause the surface of a liquid to tighten like an elastic film.
  • A measure of the elastic force at the surface of a liquid is called surface tension.
  • There is a tendency to have minimum surface tension, i.e., decrease of free energy, which leads to adsorption.

Question 3.
Define surface tension.
Answer:
A measure of the elastic force at the surface of a liquid is called surface tension.
OR
Surface tension is the amount of energy required to stretch or increase the surface of a liquid by a unit area.

Question 4.
Define the following terms.
i. Adsorbent
ii. Adsorbate
Answer:
i. Adsorbent: The material or substance present in the bulk, on the surface of which adsorption takes place is called adsorbent.
ii. Adsorbate: The substance getting adsorbed on the adsorbent is called as adsorbate.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 5.
Give some examples of adsorption.
Answer:
Following are some examples of adsorption:

  • Adsorption of gases like hydrogen and oxygen by finely divided metals, namely, platinum, palladium, copper, nickel, etc.
  • Adsorption of gases like nitrogen and carbon dioxide by activated charcoal.
  • Removal of colouring matter like an organic dye, for example, methylene blue. When charcoal is added to methylene blue solution and shaken, it becomes colourless after some time as dye molecules accumulate on the surface of charcoal.

Question 6.
What is desorption?
Answer:
The process of removal of an adsorbed substance from a surface on which it was adsorbed is called desorption.

Question 7.
Define sorption.
Answer:
When both adsorption and absorption occur simultaneously, it is known as sorption.
e.g. When a chalk is dipped in ink, the ink molecules are adsorbed at the surface of the chalk while the solvent of the ink goes deeper into the chalk due to absorption.

Question 8.
What is physisorption? State its characteristics.
Answer:
When the adsorbent such as gas molecules are accumulated at the surface of a solid on account of weak van der Waals forces, the adsorption is termed as physical adsorption or physisorption.

Characteristics:

  • The van der Waals forces involved in physical adsorption are similar to forces causing condensation of gas into liquid. Thus, heat is released in physisorption.
  • The heat released during physisorption is of the same order of magnitude as heat of condensation.
  • Due to weak nature of van der Waals forces, physisorption is weak in nature.
  • The adsorbed gas forms several layers of molecules at high pressures.
  • The extent of adsorption is large at low temperatures.
  • The equilibrium is attained rapidly.
  • Physisorption is readily reversed by lowering of pressure of gas or by raising temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 9.
Define chemisorption, Write its main features.
Answer:
When the gas molecules accumulate at the surface of a solid or adsorbate by means of chemical bonds (covalent or ionic), the adsorption is termed as chemical adsorption or chemisorption.
Features of chemical adsorption:

  • Chemisorption is specific in nature.
  • Chemisorption involving the gas-solid as the adsorbate and adsorbent is usually exothermic i.e., heat is released during this process (Exception: The adsorption of hydrogen on glass is endothermic).
  • The heat evolved in chemisorption per mole of adsorbate is nearly the same order of magnitude as that accompanying chemical bonding.
  • Chemisorption involves a large energy of activation and hence, it is also referred as activated adsorption.
  • Chemisorption increases with increase in temperature in the beginning, as a greater number of molecules can have activation energy. But after certain temperature chemisorption decreases with increase in temperature as the chemical bonds break.
  • Sometimes at low’ temperature, physisorption occurs which passes into chemisorption as the temperature is raised.
  • Chemisorption is dependent on surface area of the adsorbent.

[Note: Chemisorption was first investigated in 1916 by American Chemist, Irving Langmuir (1881-1957).]

Question 10.
Why is chemisorption also known as activated adsorption?
Answer:
Chemisorption involves a large energy of activation and hence, it is also referred as activated adsorption.

Question 11.
Give reason: Adsorption of hydrogen on glass is an endothermic process.
Answer:
Adsorption of hydrogen on glass is an endothermic process because heat is absorbed during the process due to dissociation of hydrogen.

Question 12.
Explain graphically the effect of the following factors on the adsorption of gases by solids.
i. Temperature of the adsorbent surface
ii. Pressure of the gas (adsorbate)
Answer:
i. Temperature of the adsorbent surface:

  • Adsorption is an exothermic process.
  • According to Te Chatelier’s principle, it is favoured at low temperature.
  • Therefore, the amount of gas adsorbed is inversely proportional to the temperature.
  • The graph given below shows plots of volume of N? adsorbed per unit mass of adsorbent against the pressure of a gas at different temperatures.
  • As temperature increases from 193 K to 273 K at a constant pressure ‘P’, the amount of gas adsorbed decreases.

ii. Pressure of the gas:

  • At any temperature, the extent of gas adsorbed increases with an increase in pressure.
  • The extent of adsorption is directly proportional to pressure of the gas.
  • At high pressures extent of adsorption becomes independent of the pressure. The surface of adsorbent is then almost fully covered by adsorbed gaseous molecules.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 1

Question 13.
What are the applications of adsorption?
Answer:
Following are the various applications of adsorption:
i. Catalysis (Heterogeneous catalysis):

  • The solid catalysts are used in many industrial manufacturing processes.
  • For example, iron is used as a catalyst in manufacturing of ammonia, platinum in manufacturing of sulphuric acid, H2SO4 (by contact process) while finely divided nickel is employed as a catalyst in hydrogenation of oils.

ii. Gas masks:

  • It is a device which consists of activated charcoal or mixture of adsorbents.
  • It is used for breathing in coal mines to avoid inhaling of the poisonous gases.

iii. Control of humidity: Silica and alumina gels are good adsorbents of moisture.

iv. Production of high vacuum:

  • Lowering of temperature at a given pressure, increases the rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder. By using this principle, high vacuum can be attained by adsorption.
  • A vessel evacuated by vacuum pump is connected to another vessel containing coconut charcoal cooled by liquid air. The charcoal adsorbs the remaining traces of air or moisture to create a high vacuum.

v. Adsorption indicators: The adsorption is used to detect the end point of precipitation titrations. Dyes such as eosin, fluorescein are used as indicators.
e.g.
a. A solution of sodium chloride containing a small amount of fluorescein is titrated against silver nitrate solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 2
b. When chloride ions are over, fluorescein is adsorbed on white silver chloride precipitate and hence, red colour is developed.
c. Thus, colour changes from pale yellow to reddish pink at the end point.

vi. Separation of inert gases:

  • In a mixture of noble gases, different gases adsorb to different extent.
  • Due to selective adsorption principle, gases can be separated on coconut charcoal.

vii. Froth floatation process:

  • A low-grade sulphide ore is concentrated by separating it from silica and other earthy matter using pine oil as frothing agent.
  • Hydrophobic pine oil preferentially adsorbs sulphide ore which is taken up in the froth.

viii. Chromatographic analysis:

  • It is based on selective adsorption of ions from solution using powdered adsorbents such as silica or alumina gel.
  • It has several industrial and analytical applications. Other applications include surface area determination, purification of water, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 14.
Explain how high vacuum can be obtained by adsorption.
Answer:

  • Lowering of temperature at a given pressure, increases the rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder. By using this principle, high vacuum can be attained by adsorption.
  • A vessel evacuated by vacuum pump is connected to another vessel containing coconut charcoal cooled by liquid air. The charcoal adsorbs the remaining traces of air or moisture to create a high vacuum.

Question 15.
State whether TRUE or FALSE. Correct if false.
i. The rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder decreases on lowering of temperature at a given pressure.
ii. Noble gases can be separated from their mixture using the principle of selective adsorption as they adsorb to different extent.
iii. Pine oil is used as frothing agent in froth floatation process.
Answer:
i. False
The rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder increases on lowering of temperature at a given pressure.
ii. True
iii. True

Question 16.
Match the following.

Column AColumn B
i.Irona.Hydrogenation of oils
ii.Nickelb.Production of sulphuric acid
iii.Platinumc.Synthesis of ammonia

Answer:
i – c,
ii – a,
iii – b

Question 17.
What is a catalyst?
Answer:
A catalyst is a substance which when added to a reacting system, increases the rate of a reaction without itself undergoing any permanent chemical change.

Question 18.
Explain the importance of catalysts in chemical industries.
Answer:

  • A large number of the chemicals manufactured in industries make use of catalysts to obtain specific products.
  • The use of catalyst lowers the reaction temperature as well as energy costs significantly.
    Due to these advantages, catalysts are of great importance in chemical industry.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 19.
Name two types of catalysis.
Answer:

  1. Homogeneous catalysis
  2. Heterogeneous catalysis

Question 20.
Define homogeneous catalysis and give any two examples.
Answer:
When the reactants and the catalyst are in the same phase, it is said to be homogeneous catalysis.
e.g.
i. Iodide ion (I) is used as homogeneous catalyst in decomposition of aqueous hydrogen peroxide because both I and H2O2 are present in the same aqueous phase.
ii. Hydrolysis of sugar is catalysed by H+ ions furnished by sulphuric acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 3
All reactants and catalyst are in same solution phase.
[Note: Enzyme catalysis is also an important type of homogeneous catalysis.]

Question 21.
Justify: Lead chamber process is an example of homogeneous catalysis.
Answer:
i. In the lead chamber process, sulphur dioxide is oxidized to sulphur trioxide with dioxygen (O2) in the presence of nitric oxide as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 4
ii. Since all the reactants as well as the catalyst is present in gaseous state. i.e., in same phase, it is a homogeneous catalysis reaction.
Hence, lead chamber process is an example of homogeneous catalysis.

Question 22.
Describe heterogeneous catalysis with the help of one example.
Answer:
i. When the reactants and catalyst are in different phase, it is said to be heterogeneous catalysis.
ii. The heterogeneous catalyst is generally a solid and the reactants may either be gases or liquids.
iii. When the solid catalyst is added to the reaction mixture, it does not dissolve in the reacting system and the reaction occurs on the surface of the solid catalyst.
e.g. Dinitrogen (N2) and dihydrogen (H2) combine to form ammonia in Haber process in the presence of finely divided iron along with K2O and Al2O3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 5
b. In the above reaction, Al2O3 and K2O are promoters of the Fe catalyst. Al2O3 is added to prevent the fusion of Fe particles. K2O causes chemisorption of nitrogen atoms. Molybdenum is also used as promoter.
c. Since the reactants are present in gaseous phase while the catalyst used is in solid phase, it represents heterogeneous catalysis.

Question 23.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 6
i. State whether the given reaction is an example of heterogeneous or homogeneous catalysis.
ii. What is the role of Fe, K2O and Al2O3 in this reaction?
Answer:
i. This reaction is an example of heterogeneous catalysis.
ii. Fe is used as a catalyst while K2O and Al2O3 are promoters of the Fe catalyst. Al2O3 is used to prevent the fusion of Fe particles while K2O causes chemisorption of nitrogen atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 24.
Describe hydrogenation reaction of vegetable oils.
Answer:
i. Hydrogenation reaction of vegetable oils used in food industry to produce solid fats. The reaction is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 7
ii. The reaction is catalysed by finely divided metals like Ni, Pd or Pt.
iii. Vegetable oil contains one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (C = C) in its structure.
iv. On hydrogenation, a solid product (which contains only carbon-carbon single bonds) is formed. It is called Vanaspati ghee.
v. The hydrogenation reaction of vegetable oils is an example of heterogeneous catalysis as the reactant and the catalyst are not present in the same phase.

Question 25.
i. Explain the role of catalytic converters in automobile exhaust.
ii. Why do automobiles with catalytic converter require unleaded petrol?
Answer:
i. a. An important application of heterogeneous catalysts is in automobile catalytic converters.
b. In automobile exhaust, large number of air pollutants such as carbon monoxide, nitric oxide, etc. are present.
c. The catalytic converter transforms these air pollutants into carbon dioxide, water, nitrogen and oxygen.
ii. The catalyst used in the catalytic converter gets poisoned by the adsorption of lead (Pb) present in the petrol. Hence, the automobiles with catalytic converter requires unleaded petrol.

Question 26.
What are inhibitors? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Inhibitors are substances that decreases the rate of chemical reactions.
e.g. Chloroform forms poisonous substance, carbonyl chloride, by air oxidation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 8
When 2% ethanol is added to chloroform, the formation of COCl2 is suppressed because ethanol acts as an inhibitor and retards the above reaction.
[Note: Chloroform was earlier used as an anaesthetic.]

Question 27.
Write decomposition reaction of hydrogen peroxide. Suggest how this decomposition can be prevented.
Answer:
i. Hydrogen peroxide decomposes as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 9
ii. The reaction can be inhibited by addition of dilute acid or glycerol as they act as inhibitors.

Question 28.
Explain why 2% ethanol is added to chloroform?
Answer:
Inhibitors are substances that decreases the rate of chemical reactions.
e.g. Chloroform forms poisonous substance, carbonyl chloride, by air oxidation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 10
When 2% ethanol is added to chloroform, the formation of COCl2 is suppressed because ethanol acts as an inhibitor and retards the above reaction.
[Note: Chloroform was earlier used as an anaesthetic.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 29.
Describe the steps involved in heterogeneous catalysis by solid catalyst.
OR
Explain the mechanism involved in catalytic action of a heterogeneous catalyst.
Answer:
The catalytic action of a heterogeneous catalyst occurs on the surface of a catalyst.
The mechanism involves the following five steps.
i. Diffusion of reactants towards the surface of the catalyst.
ii. Adsorption of reactant molecules on the surface of the catalyst.
iii. Occurrence of chemical reaction on the catalyst surface and formation of an intermediate.
iv. Formation of the products.
v. Desorption of reaction products from the catalyst surface. Products leave the catalyst surface in the following steps.
Steps involved in desorption of reaction products:
Diffusion → Adsorption → Intermediate formation → Product formation → Desorption
vi. Fresh reactant molecules can replace the products to start the cycle again as in first step.
vii. This is why catalyst remains unchanged in mass and chemical composition at the end of the reaction.

Question 30.
Write a short note on catalytic activity.
Answer:

  • The catalytic activity of a catalyst depends on the strength of chemisorption.
  • If large number of reactant molecules (gas or liquid) are strongly adsorbed on the surface of solid catalyst, the catalyst is said to be active.
  • However, the adsorption of reactant molecules on the surface, that is, the bond formed between adsorbate and adsorbent surface should not be very strong so that they are not immobilized.
  • d-block metals such as Fe, V and Cr tend to be strongly active towards O2, C2H2, C2H4, CO, H2, CO2, N2, etc.
  • Mn and Cu are unable to adsorb N2 and CO2.
  • The metals Mg and Li adsorb O2 selectively.

Question 31.
Explain catalytic selectivity with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. Some solid catalysts are selective in their action.
ii. The same gaseous reactants produce different products when different catalysts are used.
e.g.
a. The gaseous ethylene and O2 react to produce different products with different catalysts.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 11

b. The gaseous carbon monoxide and H2 produce different products by using different catalysts.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 12

Question 32.
i. What are zeolites?
ii. Zeolites are shape selective catalysts. Explain.
iii. What is the use of a zeolite catalyst ZSM-5 in petroleum industry?
Answer:
i. a. Zeolites are aluminosilicates with three-dimensional network of silicates.
b. Some silicon atoms in this network are replaced by aluminium atoms giving Al – O – Si framework which results in microporous structure.

ii. a. The reactions in zeolites are dependent on the size and shape of reactant or products, b. It also depends on the pores and cavities of zeolites.
b. Therefore, zeolites are shape selective catalysts.

iii. In petroleum industry, zeolite catalyst ZSM-5 converts alcohols directly to gasoline (petrol) by dehydration which gives a mixture of hydrocarbons.

Question 33.
State the importance of colloids in day-to-day life.
Answer:

  • Colloid chemistry is the chemistry of everyday life.
  • A number of substances we use in our day-to-day life are colloids. For example, milk, butter, jelly, whipped cream, mayonnaise.
  • Knowledge of colloid chemistry is essential for understanding about many useful materials like cement, bricks, pottery, porcelain, glass, enamels, oils, lacquers, rubber, celluloid and other plastics, leather, paper, textiles, filaments, crayons, inks, road construction material, etc.
  • In many daily processes like cooking, washing, dyeing, painting, ore floatation, water purification, sewage disposal, smoke prevention, photography, pharmacy, use of colloids is important.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 34.
What are colloids? Explain.
Answer:
i. Colloids are heterogeneous mixtures.
ii. The component of colloid present in the largest proportion is called dispersion medium and the other components are called dispersed phase.
iii. The particles of the dispersed phase are larger than the size of a molecule and smaller than the particles which we can see with naked eye.
e.g.

  • Observe the formation of solution of salt and water. Salt dissolves completely in water and forms homogeneous system.
  • On the other hand, ground coffee or tea leaves with milk form suspension.
  • Between the two extremes of solution and suspension exists a large group of systems called colloidal dispersions or simply colloids.

Question 35.
State the differences between colloids and solutions.
Answer:
Colloids:

  1. Colloids contain particles of dispersed phase with diameters in the range of 2 to 500 nm.
  2. They are translucent to light.
  3. e.g. Milk, fog, etc.

Solutions:

  1. Solutions contain solute particles with diameters in the range of 0.1 to 2 nm.
  2. They are transparent or may be coloured.
  3. e.g. NaCl solution

Question 36.
Explain: Natural phenomena of colloids observed in daily life.
Answer:
Following are some examples of colloids observed in daily life.
i. Blue colour of the sky: The sky appears blue to us because minute dust particles along with minute water droplets dispersed in air scatter blue light which reaches our eyes.
ii. Blood: It is a colloidal dispersion of plasma proteins and antibodies in water arid at the same time blood is also a suspension of blood cells and platelets in water.
iii. Soils: Fertile soils are colloidal in nature where humus acts as a protective colloid. Soil adsorbs moisture and nourishing materials due to its colloidal nature.
iv. Fog, mist and rain:

  • Mist is caused by small droplets of water dispersed in air.
  • Fog is formed whenever there is temperature difference between ground and air.
  • A large portion of air containing dust particles gets cooled below its dew point, the moisture from the air condenses on the surface of these particles which form fine droplets, which are colloidal particles and float in the air as fog or mist.

Question 37.
State different ways to classify colloids.
Answer:
Colloids can be classified in three different ways:

  • Physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium
  • Interaction or affinity of phases
  • Molecular size

Question 38.
Name the types of colloids based on the physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium. Give two examples of each.
Answer:
There are eight types of colloids based on the physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium as given below.

Sr. No.Type of ColloidsExamples
i.Solid sol (solid dispersed in solid)Coloured glasses, gemstones
ii.Sols and gels (solid in liquid)Gelatin, muddy water
iii.Aerosol (solid in gas)Smoke, dust
iv.Gel (liquid in solid)Cheese, jellies
v.Emulsion (liquid in liquid)Milk, hair cream
vi.Aerosol (liquid in gas)Fog, mist
vii.Solid sol (gas in solid)Foam rubber, plaster
viii.Foam (gas in liquid)Froth, soap lather

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 39.
Complete the following chart.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 13
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 14
[Note: Students can write any one example of the given type of colloids.]

Note: Types of colloids based on the physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 15

Question 40.
Describe classification of colloids based on the interaction or affinity of phases.
Answer:
On the basis of interaction or affinity of phases, a colloidal solution is classified as lyophilic and lyophobic.
i. Lyophilic colloids:

  • A colloidal solution in which the particles of dispersed phase have a great affinity for the dispersion medium are lyophilic colloids.
  • If the lyophilic sol is evaporated, the dispersed phase separates. However, if it is remixed with the medium, the sol. can be formed again and hence, such sols are called reversible sols.
  • They are stable and difficult to coagulate.

ii. Lyophobic colloids:

  • Colloidal solution in which the particles of the dispersed phase have no affinity for the dispersion
    medium are called lyophobic colloids.
  • The common examples are Ag, Au, hydroxides like Al(OH)3, Fe(OH)3, metal sulphides.
  • Once precipitated or coagulated they have little tendency or no tendency to revert back to colloidal state.

[Note: Lyo means liquid and philic means loving whereas phobic means fearing and hence liquid hating. If water is the dispersion medium, the terms hydrophilic and hydrophobic are used.]

Question 41.
Give reason: Lyophilic sols are called reversible sols.
Answer:

  • When lyophilic sol is evaporated, the dispersed phase separates.
  • However, if the dispersed phase is remixed with the medium, the sol can be formed again.

Hence, lyophilic sols are called reversible sols.

Question 42.
How are colloids classified based on their molecular size?
Answer:
Colloids are classified into three types based on their molecular size as described below.
i. Multimolecular colloids:

  • In multimolecular colloids, the individual particles consist of an aggregate of atoms or small molecules with size less than 103 pm.
    e.g. Gold sol consists of particles of various sizes having several gold atoms.
  • Colloidal solution in which particles are held together with van der Waals force of attraction is called multimolecular colloid.
    e.g. S8 sulphur molecules

ii. Macromolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, the molecules of the dispersed phase are sufficiently large in size (macro) to be of colloidal dimensions.
e.g. Starch, cellulose, proteins, polythene, nylon, plastics.

iii. Associated colloids or micelles:

  • The substances behave as normal electrolytes at low concentration and associated in higher concentration forming a colloidal solution.
  • The associated particles are called micelles, e.g. Soaps and detergents

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 43.
How can be colloids prepared by chemical methods?
Answer:
i. Colloidal dispersions can be prepared by chemical reactions leading to formation of molecules by double decomposition, oxidation, reduction or hydrolysis.
ii. Molecules formed in these reactions are water-insoluble and thus, they aggregate leading to the formation of colloids.
e.g.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 16

Question 44.
Describe the process involved in peptization?
Answer:

  • During peptization a precipitate is converted into colloidal sol by shaking with dispersion medium in the presence of a small amount of an electrolyte. The electrolyte used is known as peptizing agent.
  • During the process, the precipitate adsorbs one of the ions of the electrolyte on its surface and as a result, positive or negative charge is developed on the precipitate which finally breaks up into small particles of colloidal size.

[Note: This method is generally applied to convert a freshly prepared precipitate into a colloidal sol.]

Question 45.
Why is it necessary to purify colloidal solutions?
Answer:

  • Colloidal solution generally contains excessive amount of electrolytes and some other soluble impurities.
  • A small quantity of an electrolyte is necessary for the stability of colloidal solution, however, a large quantity of electrolyte may result in coagulation.
  • It is also necessary to reduce soluble impurities.

Hence, it is necessary to purify colloidal solutions.

Question 46.
i. What is purification of colloidal solution?
ii. How can a colloidal solution be purified using the method of dialysis?
Answer:
i. The process used for reducing the amount of impurities to a requisite minimum is known as purification of colloidal solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 17

ii. a. Dialysis is a process of removing a dissolved substance from a colloidal solution by diffusion through a suitable membrane.
b. Purification of colloidal solution can be carried out using dialysis by the following method.

  • The apparatus used is dialyser.
  • A bag of suitable membrane containing the colloidal solution is suspended in a vessel through which fresh water is continuously flowing.
  • The molecules and ions diffuse through membrane into the outer water and pure colloidal solution is left behind.

Question 47.
What are the general properties exhibited by colloidal dispersions?
Answer:
General properties exhibited by colloidal dispersions:

  • Colloidal system is heterogeneous and consists of two phases, dispersed phase and dispersion medium.
  • The dispersed phase particles pass slowly through parchment paper or animal membrane, but readily pass through ordinary filter paper.
  • Colloidal particles are usually not detectable by powerful microscope.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 48.
Discuss the factors that influence the colour of colloidal solutions.
Answer:

  • Colour of colloidal solution depends on the wavelength of light scattered by dispersed particles.
  • The colour of colloidal dispersion also changes with the manner in which the observer receives the light.
    e.g. Mixture of a few drops of milk and large amount of water appears blue when viewed by the scattered light and red when viewed by transmitted light.
  • It also depends on size of colloidal particles.
    e.g. Finest gold sol is red in colour whereas with increase in size it appears purple.

Question 49.
Give three examples each:
i. Positively charged sols
ii. Negatively charged sols
Answer:
i. Positively charged sols: Al2O3. xH2O, haemoglobin, TiO2 sol
ii. Negatively charged sols: Au sols, Congo red sol, clay

Note: Some common sols with the nature of charge on the particles are listed in the table below.

Positively charged solsNegatively charged sols
Hydrated metallic oxides: Al2O3.xH2O, CrO3.xH2O, Fe2O3.xH2O.Metals: Cu, Ag. Au sols

Metallic sulphides: As2S3, Sb2S3, CdS

Basic dye stuff, methylene blue solsAcid dye stuff, eosin, Congo red sol
Haemoglobin (blood)Sols of starch, gum
Oxides: TiO2 solGelatin, clay, gum sols

Question 50.
Explain the term electroosmosis.
Answer:

  • Movement of dispersed particles can be prevented by suitable means such as use of membrane.
  • On doing so, it is observed that the dispersion medium begins to move in an electric field. This is known as electroosmosis.

Question 51.
What is coagulation?
Answer:
The precipitation of colloids by removal of charge associated with colloidal particles is called coagulation.

Question 52.
How can we bring about precipitation of lyophobic colloids?
Answer:

  • The charge on the colloidal particles is due to the preferential adsorption of ions on their surface.
  • Hence, lyophobic colloids can be precipitated out by removing the charge on the colloidal particles (dispersed phase).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 53.
Discuss various methods that are used to bring about coagulation of lyophobic sols.
Answer:
Coagulation of the lyophobic sols can be carried out in the following ways.

  • By electrophoresis: The colloidal particles move towards oppositely charged electrodes, get discharged and precipitate.
  • By mixing two oppositely charged sols: Oppositely charged sols when mixed in almost equal proportions neutralize their charges and get precipitated.
    e. g. Mixing of hydrated ferric oxide (positive sol) and arsenious sulphide (negative sol) brings them in the precipitated forms. This type of coagulation is called mutual coagulation.
  • By boiling: When a sol is boiled, the adsorbed layer is disturbed as a result of increased collisions with molecules in the dispersion medium. This reduces charge on the particles and subsequently particles settle down as a precipitate.
  • By persistent dialysis: On prolonged dialysis, traces of the electrolyte present in the sol are removed almost completely. The colloids then become unstable and finally precipitate.
  • By addition of electrolytes: When excess of an electrolyte is added, the colloidal particles are precipitated.

Question 54.
Write Hardy-Schulze rule.
Answer:
Generally, greater the valency of the flocculating ion added, greater is its power to cause precipitation. This is known as Hardy-Schulze rule.

Question 55.
Differentiate between oil in water and water in oil emulsions.
Answer:
Oil in water:

  1. Oil is the dispersed phase and water is the dispersion medium.
  2. If water is added, it will be miscible with the emulsion.
  3. Addition of small amount of an electrolyte makes the emulsion conducting.
  4. Continuous phase is water.
  5. Basic metal sulphates, water soluble alkali metal soaps are used as emulsifiers.

Water in oil:

  1. Water is the dispersed phase and oil is the dispersion medium.
  2. If oil is added, it will be miscible with the emulsion.
  3. Addition of small amount of an electrolyte has no effect on conducting power.
  4. Continuous phase is oil.
  5. Water insoluble soaps such as those of Zn, Al, Fe, alkaline earth metals are used as emulsifiers.

Question 56.
What are the properties of emulsion?
Answer:
Properties of emulsion:

  • Emulsion can be diluted with any amount of the dispersion medium. On the other hand, the dispersed liquid when mixed forms a separate layer.
  • The droplets in emulsions are often negatively charged and can be precipitated by electrolytes.
  • Emulsions show Brownian movement and Tyndall effect.
  • The two liquids in emulsions can be separated by heating, freezing, centrifuging, etc.

Question 57.
Give applications of colloids.
Answer:
Applications of colloids:
i. Electrical precipitation of smoke:

  • Smoke is a colloidal solution of solid particles of carbon, arsenic compound, dust, etc. in the air.
  • When smoke is allowed to pass through chamber containing charged plates, smoke particles lose their charge and get precipitated. The particles then settle down on the floor of the chamber.
  • The precipitator used is called Cottrell precipitator.

ii. Purification of drinking water:

  • Water obtained from natural sources contains colloidal impurities.
  • By addition of alum to such water, colloidal impurities get coagulated and settle down. This makes water potable.

iii. Medicines:

  • Usually medicines are colloidal in nature.
  • Colloidal medicines are more effective owing to large surface area to volume ratio of a colloidal particle and easy assimilation.
    e.g. Argyrol is a silver sol used as an eye lotion. Milk of magnesia, an emulsion is used in stomach disorders.

iv. Rubber industry: Rubber is obtained by coagulation of latex.
v. Cleansing action of soaps and detergents.
vi. Photographic plates, films, and industrial products like paints, inks, synthetic plastics, rubber, graphite lubricants, cement, etc. are colloids.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 58.
Match column A with column B.

Column AColumn B
i.Tyndall effecti.Kinetic property
ii.Electrophoresisii.Argyrol
iii.Silver soliii.Optical property
iv.Brownian motioniv.Coagulation

Answer:
i – c,
ii – d,
iii – b,
iv – a

Question 59.
In drinking water treatment, often alum is added for the complete removal of suspended impurities. On complete dissolution, alum produces positive charge which neutralizes the charge on the suspended particles and thus, impurities are easily removed.
i. Name and define the process involved due to which charge on particles get neutralized.
ii. What is the role of alum in the above mentioned process?
Answer:
i. a. Charge on particles get neutralized due to coagulation.
b. The precipitation of colloids by removal of charge associated with colloidal particles is called coagulation.
ii. Alum acts as a reagent that helps in coagulation of the suspended particles by the removal of the charge associated with these particles.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is responsible for adsorption phenomenon?
(A) Hydrogen bonding
(R) Dipole-dipole forces
(C) Ion-dipole forces
(D) Dispersion forces
Answer:
(D) Dispersion forces

2. A substance which adsorbs another substance on its surface is called ……………..
(A) adsorbate
(B) absorbate
(C) adsorbent
(D) absorbent
Answer:
(C) adsorbent

3. During adsorption, the molecules of the substance which gets adsorbed are termed as
(A) adsorbent
(B) adsorbate
(C) absorbent
(D) absorbate
Answer:
(B) adsorbate

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

4. in adsorption of acetic acid on charcoal, acetic acid is ……………
(A) adsorhate
(B) adsorbent
(C) absorbent
(D) absorbate
Answer:
(A) adsorhate

5. The process of removal of an adsorbed substance from the surface is known as
(A) sorption
(B) oxidation
(C) reduction
(D) desorption
Answer:
(D) desorption

6. ………….. is the process in which adsorbate molecules are held on the surface of the adsorbent by weak van der Waals forces.
(A) Chemisorption
(B) Absorption
(C) Physisorption
(D) Biosorption
Answer:
(C) Physisorption

7. Which of the following is an example of physical adsorption?
(A) Adsorption of acetic acid in solution by charcoal
(B) Adsorption of O2 on tungsten
(C) Adsorption of N2 on Fe
(D) Adsorption of H2 on Ni
Answer:
(A) Adsorption of acetic acid in solution by charcoal

8. Chemisorption is a slow process because …………….
(A) it forms multimolecular layer
(B) it is reversible
(C) it takes place at normal temperature
(D) it requires high activation energy
Answer:
(D) it requires high activation energy

9. The number of layer(s) formed on adsorbent in chemical adsorption is …………….
(A) one
(B) two
(C) three
(D) many
Answer:
(A) one

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

10. Which of the following statements is CORRECT regarding chemical adsorption?
(A) It is highly specific in nature.
(B) It is relatively strong.
(C) It involves the formation of monolayer of adsorbed particles.
(D) All of these.
Answer:
(D) All of these.

11. Which of the following is adsorbed to maximum extent on charcoal?
(A) H2
(B) N2
(C) Cl2
(D) O2
Answer:
(C) Cl2

12. The relation between the amount of substance adsorbed by an adsorbent and the equilibrium pressure or …………. at any constant temperature is called adsorption isotherm.
(A) surface area
(B) volume
(C) circumference
(D) concentration
Answer:
(D) concentration

13. For equilibrium pressure (P), the mass of gas adsorbed (x) and mass of adsorbent (m) may be expressed as Freundlich adsorption isotherm as ……………
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 18
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{m}}=\mathrm{kP}^{\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}}}\)

14. When log x/m is plotted against log P, the intercept obtained …………..
(A) on Y axis is equal to log K
(B) on Y axis is equal to K
(C) on X axis is equal to log K
(D) on X axis is equal to K
Answer:
(A) on Y axis is equal to log K

15. The adsorption isotherm tends to saturate at ………….. pressure.
(A) low
(B) moderate
(C) all of these
(D) high
Answer:
(D) high

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

16. In Haber process for manufacture of NH3, the catalyst used is ……………
(A) iron
(B) copper
(C) vanadium pentoxide
(D) nickel
Answer:
(A) iron

17. A substance that decreases the rate of a chemical reaction is called ……………
(A) inhibitor
(B) prohibitor
(C) promoter
(D) reactor
Answer:
(A) inhibitor

18. Whether a given mixture forms a true solution or a colloidal dispersion depends on the …………….
(A) charge of solute particles
(B) size of solvent particles
(C) size of solute particles
(D) charge of solvent particles
Answer:
(C) size of solute particles

19. An aerosol is a dispersion of a ……………
(A) gas in a solid
(B) liquid in a gas
(C) solid in a gas
(D) both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(D) both (B) and (C)

20. The dispersed phase in Pumice stone is ……………
(A) solid
(B) liquid
(C) gas
(D) none of these
Answer:
(C) gas

21. Colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has little affinity for the dispersion medium is called ………………
(A) lyophobic colloids
(B) lyophilic colloids
(C) hydrophilic colloids
(D) emulsions
Answer:
(A) lyophobic colloids

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

22. Which of the following is NOT an example of macromolecular colloid?
(A) Starch
(B) Proteins
(C) S8 molecules
(D) Nylon
Answer:
(C) S8 molecules

23. Tyndall effect is useful ……………….
(A) to identify colloidal dispersions
(B) to count number of particles in colloidal dispersion.
(C) to determine the size of the colloidal particles
(D) all of these
Answer:
(D) all of these

24. Brownian movement is a ……………… type of property of the colloidal sol.
(A) electrical
(B) optical
(C) kinetic
(D) colligative
Answer:
(C) kinetic

25. The migration of colloidal particles under the influence of an electric field is called …………….
(A) catalysis
(B) Brownian movement
(C) electrophoresis
(D) Tyndall effect
Answer:
(C) electrophoresis

26. The capacity of an ion to coagulate a colloidal solution depends on ……………….
(A) its shape
(B) its valency
(C) the sign of charge
(D) both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(D) both (B) and (C)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

27. ……………… is an example of water in oil type of emulsion.
(A) Milk
(B) Cod liver oil
(C) Vanishing cream
(D) Paint
Answer:
(B) Cod liver oil

28. Which of the following has highest precipitation power to precipitate negative sol?
(A) Al3+
(B) Mg2+
(C) Na+
(D) K+
Answer:
(A) Al3+

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 1.
What are the three distinct physical forms of a substance?
Answer:
The three distinct physical forms of a substance are solid, liquid and gas.

Question 2.
What are the different forms (physical states) in which water exists?
Answer:
Water exists in the three different forms solid ice, liquid water and gaseous vapours.

Question 3.
Give the differences between the three states of matter.
OR
State the properties of three states of matter.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 2

Question 4.
With suitable diagram, explain how three states of matter are interconvertible by exchange of heat.
Answer:

  • On heating, solid changes to liquid, which on further heating changes to gas.
  • On cooling, gas condenses to liquid, which on further cooling change to solid.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 3

Question 5.
What are intermolecular forces? Explain the role of these forces in different states of matter.
Answer:

  • Intermolecular forces are the attractive forces as well as repulsive forces present between the neighbouring molecules.
  • The attractive force decreases with the increase in distance between the molecules.
  • The intermolecular forces are strong in solids, less strong in liquids and very weak in gases. Thus, the three physical states of matter can be determined as per the strength of intermolecular forces.
  • The physical properties of matter such as melting point, boiling point, vapor pressure, viscosity, evaporation, surface tension and solubility can be studied with respect to the strength of attractive intermolecular forces between the molecules.
  • During the melting process, intermolecular forces are partially overcome, whereas they are overcome completely during the vapourization process.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 6.
Name the different types of intermolecular forces.
Answer:
The types of intermolecular forces are as follows:

  1. Dipole-dipole interactions
  2. Ion-dipole interactions
  3. Dipole-induced dipole interactions
  4. Hydrogen bonding
  5. London dispersion forces

Question 7.
Write a short note on dipole moment.
Answer:
Dipole moment:
i. Dipole moment (µ) is the product of the magnitude of the charge (Q) and the distance between the centres of positive and negative charge (r).
ii. It is designated by a Greek letter (µ) (mu) and its unit is Debye (D).
iii. Dipole moment is a vector quantity and is depicted by a small arrow with tail in the positive centre and head pointing towards the negative centre.
iv. For example, HCl is a polar molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 4
The crossed arrow Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 5 above the structure represents an electron density shift. Thus, polar molecules have permanent dipole moments.

Question 8.
Explain dipole-dipole interactions.
Answer:
Dipole-dipole interactions:
i. When a polar molecule encounters another polar molecule, the positive end of one molecule is attracted to the negative end of another polar molecule. Interaction between such molecules is termed as dipole-dipole interaction.
ii. These forces are generally weak, with energies of the order of 3-4 kJ mol-1 and are significant only when molecules are in close contact, i.e., in a solid or a liquid state.
iii. For example, C4H9Cl, (butyl chloride), CH3 – O – CH3 (dimethyl ether), ICl (iodine chloride, B.P. 27 °C), are dipolar liquids.
iv. The molecular orientations due to dipole-dipole interaction in ICl liquid is shown in the following figure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 6
v. More polar the substance, greater the strength of its dipole-dipole interactions.

Question 9.
Explain the effect of dipole moment on boiling point with an example.
Answer:
Higher the dipole moment, stronger are the intermolecular forces. Thus, higher is the boiling point.
e.g. Dipole moment of dimethyl ether (CH3 – O – CH3) is 1.3 D while that of ethane (CH3 – CH2 – CH3) is 0.1 D. Since, dipole moment of dimethyl ether is higher than that of ethane, the boiling point of dimethyl ether is higher than that of ethane.
Note: Dipole moments and boiling points of some compounds:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 7

Question 10.
Explain ion-dipole interactions.
Answer:
Ion-dipole interactions:
i. An ion-dipole force is the result of electrostatic interactions between an ion (cation or anion) and the partial charges on a polar molecule.
ii. The strength of this interaction depends on the charge and size of an ion. It also depends on the magnitude of dipole moment and size of the molecule.
iii. Ion-dipole forces are particularly important in aqueous solutions of ionic substances. When an ionic compound is dissolved in water, the ions get separated and surrounded by water molecules. This process is called hydration of ions.
iv. For example, Na+ ion (cation) – H2O interaction is shown in the following figure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 8
v. The charge density on Na+ is more concentrated than the charge density on Cl because Na+ is smaller in size than Cl. This makes the interaction between (Na+) and negative end of the polar H2O molecule stronger than the corresponding interaction between (Cl) and positive end of the polar H2O molecule.
vi. More the charge on cation, stronger is the ion-dipole interaction. For example, Mg2+ ion has higher charge and smaller ionic radius (78 pm) than Na+ ion (98 pm), hence Mg2+ ion is surrounded (hydrated) more strongly with water molecules and exerts strong ion-dipole interaction.
Thus, the strength of interaction increases with increase in charge on cation and with decrease in ionic size or radius.
Therefore, ion-dipole forces increase in the order: Na+ < Mg2+ < Al3+.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 11.
Write a short note on dipole-induced dipole interactions.
Answer:
Dipole-induced dipole interactions:
i. When polar molecules (like H2O, NH3) and nonpolar molecules (like benzene) approach each other, the polar molecules induce dipole in the nonpolar molecules. Hence, ‘Temporary dipoles’ are formed by shifting of electron clouds in nonpolar molecules.
ii. For example, ammonia (NH3) is polar and has permanent dipole moment while Benzene (C6H6) is nonpolar and has zero dipole moment. The force of attraction developed between the polar and nonpolar molecules is of the type dipole-induced dipole interaction. This is shown in the following figure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 9

Question 12.
Explain briefly London dispersion forces.
Answer:
London dispersion forces:

  • In nonpolar molecules and inert gases, only dispersion forces exist.
  • Dispersion forces are also called as London forces or van der Waals forces.
  • It is the weakest intermolecular force that develops due to interaction between two nonpolar molecules.
  • In general, all atoms and molecules experience London dispersion forces, which result from the motion of electrons.
  • At any given instant of time, the electron distribution in an atom may be asymmetrical, giving the atom a short-lived dipole moment. This momentary dipole on one atom can affect the electron distribution in the neighbouring atoms and induce momentary dipoles in them. As a result, weak attractive force develops.
  • For example, substances composed of molecules such as O2, CO2, N2, halogens, methane gas, helium and other noble gases show van der Waals force of attraction.
  • The strength of London forces increases with increase in molecular size, molecular mass and number of electrons present in an atom or molecule.

Question 13.
Give reason: Benzene has zero dipole moment and has no dipole-dipole forces yet it exists in liquid state.
Answer:

  • Benzene (C6H6) is nonpolar molecule and has zero dipole moment.
  • In benzene, only London forces exist due to momentary dipoles.
  • The strength of London forces increases with increase in molecular size, molecular mass and number of electrons present in an atom or molecule.
  • Hence, due to the presence of London forces, benzene exists in liquid state.

Question 14.
Explain the term polarizability.
Answer:
Polarizability:

  • When two nonpolar molecules approach each other, attractive and repulsive forces between their electrons and the nuclei will lead to distortions in the size of electron cloud, a property referred to as polarizability.
  • Polarizability is a measure of how easily an electron cloud of an atom is distorted by an applied electric field.
  • It is the property of atom.
  • The ability to form momentary dipoles, that means, the ability of the molecule to become polar by redistributing its electrons is known as polarizability of the atom or molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 15.
Describe how London dispersion forces affect the boiling points of isomeric compounds like n-pentane and neopentane.
Answer:

  • More the spread out of shapes, higher the dispersion forces present between the molecules.
  • London dispersion forces are stronger in a long chain of atoms where molecules are not compact.
  • For example, n-Pentane boils at 309.4 K, whereas neopentane boils at 282.7 K.
  • Both the substances have the same molecular formula, C5H12, but n-pentane is longer and somewhat spread out, whereas neopentane is more spherical and compact.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 10

Question 16.
Write a short note on hydrogen bonding.
Answer:
Hydrogen bonding:

  • The electrostatic force of attraction between positively polarised hydrogen atom of one molecule and a highly electronegative atom (which may be negatively charged) of other molecule is called as hydrogen bond.
  • Strong electronegative atoms that form hydrogen bonds are nitrogen, oxygen and fluorine.
  • A hydrogen bond is a special type of dipole-dipole attraction.
  • Hydrogen bonds are generally stronger than usual dipole-dipole and dispersion forces, and weaker than true covalent or ionic bonds.
  • Hydrogen bond is denoted by (….) dotted line.
    e.g. Water (H2O) and ammonia (NH3) show hydrogen bonding.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 11

Question 17.
Explain intramolecular and intermolecular hydrogen bond with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. Hydrogen bond which occurs within one single molecule represents intramolecular hydrogen bond.
e.g. H-bonding in ethylene glycol:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 12

ii. A hydrogen bond present between two like or unlike molecules represents intermolecular hydrogen bond.
e.g. H-bonding in H-F:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 13

Question 18.
How does hydrogen bonding influence boiling points of compounds?
Answer:

  • Due to the presence of hydrogen bonding in the compounds, more energy is required to break the bonds.
  • Therefore, boiling point is more in case of liquid molecules containing hydrogen bond.
  • Hydrogen bonds can be quite strong with energies up to 40 kJ/mol.
  • The boiling point generally increases with increase in molecular mass, but the hydrides of nitrogen (NH3), oxygen (H2O) and fluorine (HF) have abnormally high boiling points due to the presence of hydrogen bonding between the molecules.

[Note: Due to presence of H-bond, viscosity’ of liquid increases. Hydrogen bonds play vital role in determining structure and properties of proteins and nucleic acids present in all living organisms.]

Question 19.
Observe the following figure and answer the questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 14
i. What do the dotted lines represent?
ii. A water molecule can form how many H-bonds?
iii. Is this an example of intramolecular H-bonding?
Answer:
i. The dotted lines represent hydrogen bonds.
ii. A water molecule can form four H-bonds.
iii. No, it is an example of intermolecular H-bonding.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 20.
Explain the relation between intermolecular forces and thermal energy.
Answer:

  • Thermal energy is the measure of kinetic energy of the particles of matter that arises due to movement of particles.
  • It is directly proportional to the temperature; that means, thermal energy increases with increase in temperature and vice versa.
  • Three states of matter are the consequence of a balance between the intermolecular forces of attraction and the thermal energy of the molecules.
  • If the intermolecular forces are very weak, molecules do not come together to make liquid or solid unless thermal energy is decreased by lowering the temperature.
  • When a substance is to be converted from its gaseous state to solid state, its thermal energy (or temperature) has to be reduced. At this stage, the intermolecular forces become more important than thermal energy of the particles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 15

Note: Comparison of intermolecular forces:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 16

Question 21.
State true or false. Correct the false statement.
i. London dispersion force is the weakest intermolecular force that develops due to interaction between two nonpolar molecules.
ii. More the charge on cation, stronger is the ion-dipole interaction.
iii. A hydrogen bond is a special type of dipole-induced dipole attraction.
iv. Thermal energy is directly proportional to the temperature.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False,
A hydrogen bond is a special type of dipole-dipole attraction.
iv. True

Question 22.
Name the major intermolecular forces between:
i. Cl2 and CBr4
ii. SiH4 molecules
iii.He atoms in liquid He
iv. HCl molecules in liquid HCl
v. He and a polar molecule
vi. Water molecules
Answer:
i. London dispersion forces
ii. London dispersion forces
iii. London dispersion forces
iv. Dipole-dipole interactions
v. Dipole-induced dipole
vi. Hydrogen bonding

Question 23.
Why is the chemistry of atmospheric gases an important subject of study?
Answer:
The chemistry of atmospheric gases is an important subject of study as it involves air pollution. O2 in air is essential for survival of aerobic life.

Question 24.
What are the measurable properties of gases?
OR
Explain the following measurable properties of gases in detail: Mass, volume, pressure, temperature and diffusion.
Answer:
Measurable properties of gases are as follows:
i. Mass:

  • The mass (m) of a gas sample is measure of the quantity of matter it contains.
  • It can be measured experimentally.
  • The SI unit of mass is kilogram (kg).
    1 kg = 103 g.
  • The mass of a gas is related to the number of moles (n) by the expression:
    n = \(\frac{\text { mass in grams }}{\text { molar mass in grams }}=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)

ii. Volume:

  • Volume (V) of a sample of gas is the amount of space it occupies.
  • It is expressed in terms of different units like Litres (L), millilitres (mL), cubic centimetre (cm3), cubic metre (m3) or decimetre cube (dm3).
  • The SI Unit of volume is cubic metre (m3).
  • Most commonly used unit to measure the volume of the gas is decimetre cube or litre.

iii. Pressure:

  • Pressure (P) is defined as force per unit area.
    Pressure = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{\mathrm{f}}{\mathrm{a}}\)
  • Pressure of gas is measured with ‘manometer’ and atmospheric pressure is measured by ‘barometer’.
  • The SI unit of pressure is pascal (Pa) or Newton per metre square (N m-2).

iv. Temperature:

  • It is the property of an object that determines direction in which energy will flow when that object is in contact with another object.
  • In scientific measurements, temperature (T) is measured either on the Celsius scale (°C) or the Kelvin scale (K).
  • The SI unit of temperature of a gas is Kelvin (K).
  • The Celsius and Kelvin scales are related by the expression: T(K) = t °C + 273.15

v. Density: Density (d) of a substance is the mass per unit volume.
d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
∴ The SI unit of density is kg m-3.
In the case of gases, relative density is measured with respect to hydrogen gas and is called vapour density.
∴ Vapour density = \(\frac{\text { Molar mass }}{2}\)

vi. Diffusion:
a. Diffusion is the process of mixing two or more gases to form a homogeneous mixture.
b. The volume of gas diffused per unit time is the rate of diffusion of that gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 17
c. SI Unit for rate of diffusion is dm3 s-1 or cm3 s-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 25.
Convert:
i. 3.5 atm to mm Hg
ii. 1520 torr to atm
iii. 5 m3 to dm3
iv. 580 °c to Kelvin
Answer:
I. 3.5 atm to mm Hg:
1 atm = 760 mm Hg
∴ 3.5 atm = 3.5 × 760
= 2660 mm Hg

ii. 1520 torr to aim:
1 atm = 760 torr
∴ 1 torr = \(\frac {1}{760}\) atrn
∴ 1520 torr = \(\frac {1520}{760}\) = atm

iii. 5 m3 to dm3:
1 m3 = 103 dm3
∴ 5m3 = 5 × dm3 = 5000 dm3

iv. 580 °C to Kelvin:
T(K) = t °C + 273.15
∴ T(K)= (580 °C) + 273.15 = 853.15 K

Question 26.
Name four measurable properties that are essential to study behaviour of gases.
Answer:

  • Pressure
  • Volume
  • Temperature
  • Number of moles

Question 27.
Explain Boyle’s law with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
Boyle’s law (Pressure-Volume relationship):
i. Statement: For a fixed mass (number of moles ‘n’) of a gas at constant temperature, the pressure (P) of the gas is inversely proportional to the volume (V) of the gas.
ii. Explanation:
The mathematical expression of Boyle’s law is:
P ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~V}}\) (at constant T and n) k1
∴ P = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}}\) (where, k1 is the proportionality constant)
On rearranging the above equation,
∴ PV = k1 = constant
This implies that at constant temperature, product of pressure and volume of the fixed amount of a gas is constant.
Thus, when a fixed amount of a gas at constant temperature (T) occupying volume V1 initially at pressure (P1) undergoes expansion or compression, volume of the gas changes to V2 and pressure to P2.
According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 = constant

iii. Schematic illustration of Boyle’s law:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 18

Question 28.
Give the different graphical representations of Boyle’s law.
Answer:
i. Graph of pressure (P) versus volume (V) of a gas at constant temperature:
If the pressure (P) is plotted against volume (V) at constant temperature, a curve is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 19
As the pressure increases, the volume decreases exponentially. The product of pressure and volume is always constant (PV = k). For a given mass of a gas, the value of k varies only with temperature.
[Note: Each curve is an isotherm as it is plotted at constant temperature, (iso = constant, therm = temperature).]

ii. Graph of PV versus pressure (P) of a gas constant temperature:
If the product of pressure and volume (PV) is plotted against pressure (P), a straight line is obtained parallel to x-axis (pressure axis).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 20

iii. Graph of pressure (P) of a gas versus reciprocal of volume (1/V) at constant temperature:
If the pressure (P) of the gas is plotted against (1/V), a straight line is obtained passing through the origin.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 21
[Note: At high pressure, deviation from Boyle’s law is observed in the behaviour of gases.]

Question 29.
Derive the relationship between density and pressure.
Answer:
Relationship between density and pressure:
With increase in pressure, gas molecules get closer and the density (d) of the gas increases. Hence, at constant temperature, pressure is directly proportional to the density of a fixed mass of gas.
From Boyle’s law,
PV = k1 …….(1)
∴ V = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{1}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
But, d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
On substituting, V from equation (2),
d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{K}_{1}}\) × P
∴ d = k P …….(3)
where k = New constant
∴ d ∝ P
Above equation shows that at constant temperature, the pressure is directly proportional to the density of a fixed mass of the gas.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 30.
Write a short note on absolute temperature scale.
Answer:
Absolute temperature scale:

  • Absolute temperature scale is related to Celsius temperature scale by the equation:
    T K = t °C + 273.15
  • This also called thermodynamic scale of temperature.
  • The units of this absolute temperature scale is called (K) in the honour of Lord Kelvin who determined the accurate value of absolute zero as -273.15 °C in the year 1854.

Question 31.
Explain Charles’ law with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
Charles’ law (Temperature-Volume relationship):
i. Statement: At constant pressure, the volume of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to its temperature in Kelvin.

ii. Explanation:
For an increase of every degree of temperature, volume of the gas increases by \(\frac{1}{273.15}\) of its original value at 0 °C. This is expressed mathematically as follows:
Vt = V0 + \(\frac{t}{273.15} V_{0}\) ………….(1)
Where Vt and V0 are the volumes of the given mass of gas at the temperatures t °C and 0 °C. Rearranging the Eq. (1) gives
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 22
The equation (3) on rearrangement takes the following form:
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{t}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{t}}}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{0}}{\mathrm{~T}_{0}}\)
From this, a general equation can be written as follows:
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\) …………(4)
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = K2 = constant (at constant P and n)
∴ V = k2T OR V ∝ T ……(5)
The equation (4) is the mathematical expression of Charles’ law.

iii. Schematic illustration of Charles’ law:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 23
This shows that at constant pressure, gases expand on heating and contract on cooling.

Question 32.
Give the different graphical representation of Charles’ law.
Answer:
Graph of volume versus temperature at constant pressure:

  • According to Charles’ law, the graph of volume of a gas (at given constant pressure, say P1) versus its temperature in Celsius, is a straight line with a positive slope.
  • On extending the line to zero volume, the line intercepts the temperature axis at -273.15 °C.
  • At any other value of pressure, say P2, a different straight line for the volume temperature plot is obtained, but we get the same zero-volume temperature intercept at -273.15 °C.
  • The straight line of the volume versus temperature graph at constant pressure is called isobar.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 24
[Note: Zero volume for a gas sample is a hypothetical state. In practice, all the gases get liquified at a temperature higher than -273.15 °C. This temperature is the lowest temperature that can be imagined but practically cannot be attained. It is the absolute zero temperature on the Kelvin scale (0 K).]

Question 33.
Write the statement for Gay-Lussac’s law.
Answer:
Statement for Gay-Lussac’s law:
At constant volume, pressure (P) of a fixed amount of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature (T).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 34.
Give the mathematical expression for Gay-Lussac’s law.
Answer:
Gay-Lussac’s law (Pressure-Temperature relationship):
i. Statement: At constant volume, pressure (P) of a fixed amount of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature (T).
ii. Explanation:
Gay-Lussac’s law can be mathematically expressed as:
P ∝ T
∴ P = k3T
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = Constant (at constant V and n)
Thus, according to Gay-Lussac’s law,
\(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\) = constant

Question 35.
Give the graphical representation of Gay-Lussac’s law.
Answer:
Graph of pressure versus temperature of a gas at constant volume:
When a graph is plotted between pressure (P) in atm and temperature (T) in kelvin, a straight line is obtained It is known as isochore.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 25

Question 36.
Define the following terms:
i. Isotherm
ii. Isobar
iii. Isochore
Answer:
i. A graph of pressure (P) versus volume (V) at a constant temperature is known as isotherm.
ii. A graph of volume (V) versus absolute temperature (T) at a constant pressure is known as isobar.
iii. A graph of pressure (P) versus absolute temperature (T) at a constant volume is known as isochore.

Question 37.
State and explain Avogadro law.
Answer:
Avogadro law (Volume-Amount relationship):
i. Statement: Equal volumes of all gases at the same temperature and pressure contain equal number of molecules.
ii. Explanation:
V is directly proportional to n (number of moles) at constant ‘P’ and ‘T’.
V ∝ n
V = k4 × n (where, k4 is proportionality constant)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{n}}\) = constant (at constant T and P)
Note: Representation of Avogadro law
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 26

Question 38.
What is molar volume?
Answer:
The volume occupied by one mole of an ideal gas at STP is 22.414 L. This volume is known as molar volume.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 39.
Derive the relation between density of a gas and its molar mass.
Answer:
Relation between density of a gas and its molar mass:
According to Avogadro’s law, V ∝ n
Now, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\) (where, m is the mass of the gas and M is the molar mass of the gas)
∴ V ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
M ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
But, \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = d (where, d is the density of the gas)
∴ d ∝ M
Thus, density of a gas is directly proportional to its molar mass.

Question 40.
The volume occupied by a given mass of a gas at 298 K is 25 mL at 1 atmosphere pressure.
Calculate the volume of the gas if pressure is increased to 1.25 atmosphere at constant temperature.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 1 atm, V1 = Initial volume = 25 mL
P2 = Final pressure = 1.25 atm
To find: V2 = Final volume of the gas
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law, P1V1 = P2V2
Substituting the values of P1, V1 and P2 in the above expression, we get
V2 = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{P_{2}}=\frac{1 \times 25}{1.25}\) = 20 mL
Ans: The volume occupied by the gas is 20 mL.

Question 41.
The volume of a given mass of a gas is 0.6 dm3 at a pressure of 2 atm. Calculate the volume of the gas if its pressure is increased to 2.4 at the same temperature.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 2 atm
V1 = Initial volume of given mass of the gas = 0.6 dm3
P2 = Final pressure = 2.4 atm
To find: V2 = Final volume of the gas
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
V2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{P}_{2}}=\frac{2 \times 0.6}{2.4}=0.5 \mathrm{dm}^{3}\)
Ans: The volume of the given gas is 0.5 dm3.

Question 42.
What will be the minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at 5 bar to 200 dm3 at 25 °C.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 5 bar
V1 = Initial volume = 500 dm3; V2 = Final volume = 200 dm3
To find: P2 = Final pressure
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
∴ P2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}_{2}}=\frac{5 \times 500}{200}\) = 12.5 bar
Ans: The minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at 5 bar to 200 dm3 at 25 °C is 12.5 bar.

Question 43.
A balloon has certain volume at sea level. At what pressure (in kPa) will its volume be increased by 40% if the temperature is kept constant?
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 101.325 kPa (∵ The pressure at sea level = 101.325 kPa)
V1 = Initial volume at sea level = 100 dm3 (assumption)
V2 = Final volume = (100 + 40) = 140 dm3
To find: P2 = Final pressure
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
P2 = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{V_{2}}\)
∴ P2 = \(\frac{101.325 \times 100}{140}\) = 72.375 kPa
Ans: The pressure at which volume of the given balloon will be increased by 40% at a given temperature is 72.375 kPa.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 44.
At 300 K, a certain mass of a gas occupies 1 × 10-4 dm3 volume. Calculate its volume at 450 K and at the same pressure.
Solution:
Given: T1 = Initial temperature = 300 K, V1 = Initial volume = 1 × 10-4 dm3,
T2 = Final temperature = 450 K
To find: V2 = Final volume
Formula: \(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) (at constant n and P)
Calculation: According to Charles’ law, at constant pressure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 27
Ans: The volume of given gas becomes 1.5 × 10-4 dm3 at the temperature of 450 K and same pressure.

Question 45.
A certain mass of a gas occupies a volume of 0.2 dm3 at the temperature, x K. Calculate the volume of the gas if its absolute temperature is doubled at same pressure.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 0.2 dm3, T1 = Initial temperature = x K
T2 = Final temperature = 2 × x = 2x K
To find: V2 = Final volume of the gas
\(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) (at constant n and P)
Calculation: According to Charles’ law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 28
Ans: The volume of given gas becomes 0.4 dm3 when the temperature is doubled.

Question 46.
The volume of a given mass of a gas at 0 °C is 0.2 dm3. Calculate its volume at 100 °C, if the pressure remains the same.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 0.2 dm3, T1 = Initial temperature = 0 °C = 273.15 K,
T2 = Final temperature = 100 °C = 100 + 273.15 K = 373.15 K
To find: V2 = Volume at 100 °C
Formula: \(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) (at constant n and P)
Calculation: According to Charles’ law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 29
Ans: The volume of gas at 100 °C is 0.273 dm3.

Question 47.
A glass container is sealed with a gas at 0.8 atm pressure and at 25 °C. The glass container sustains a pressure of 2 atm. Calculate the temperature to which the gas can be heated before bursting the container.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 0.8 atm, P2 = Final pressure = 2 atm
T1 = Initial temperature = 25 °C = 25 + 273.15 K = 298.15 K
To find: T2= Final temperature
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 30
Ans: The temperature to which the gas can be heated before bursting the container is 472 °C.

Question 48.
An 8.0 L of sample at 0 °C and 5.6 atm of pressure contains 2.0 moles of a gas. If more 1.0 mole of gas at the same temperature and pressure is added, calculate the final volume.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 8.0 L
n1 = Initial mol = 2.0 mol
n2 = Final mol = (2.0 + 1.0) = 0.3 mol
To find: V2 = Final volume
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 31
Ans: The final volume is 12 L.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 49.
What is an ideal gas equation?
Answer:
Ideal gas equation is obtained by combining three gas laws, namely, Boyle’s law, Charles’ law and Avogadro law. Mathematically, it is given as:
PV = nRT
where,
P = Pressure of gas, V = Volume of gas, n = number of moles of gas,
R = Gas constant, T = Absolute temperature of gas

Question 50.
Derive the ideal gas equation.
Answer:
According to Boyle’s law,
V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{P}}\) (at constant T and n) ………..(1)
According to Charles’ law,
V ∝ T (at constant P and n) …….(2)
According to Avogadro’s law,
V ∝ n (at constant P and T) …….(3)
Combining relations (1), (2) and (3), we get
V ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{nT}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
Converting this proportionality into an equation by introducing a constant of proportionality (‘R’ known as gas constant), we get
∴ V = \(\frac{\mathrm{nRT}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
On rearranging the above equation, we get
PV = nRT
where,
P = Pressure of gas,
V = Volume of gas,
n = number of moles of gas,
R = Gas constant,
T = Absolute temperature of gas.
This is the ideal gas equation or equation of state.
[Note: In the ideal gas equation, R is called gas constant or universal gas constant, whose value is same for all the gases. In this equation, if three variables are known, fourth can be calculated. The equation describes the state of an ideal gas. Hence, it is also called as equation of state.]

Question 51.
Deduce values of gas constant ‘R’ in different units.
Answer:
i. R in SI Unit (in Joules): Value of R can be calculated by using the SI units of P, V and T. Pressure P is measured in N m-2 or Pa, volume V in meter cube (m3) and temperature T in Kelvin (K).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 32

ii. R in litre atmosphere: If pressure (P) is expressed in atmosphere (atm) and volume in litre (L) or decimeter cube (dm3) and Temperature in kelvin (K), (that is, old STP conditions), then value of R is,
R = \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~atm} \times 22.414 \mathrm{~L}}{1 \mathrm{~mol} \times 273.15 \mathrm{~K}}\)
∴ R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1
OR
R = 0.0821 dm3 atm K-1 mol-1

iii. R in calories: We know, 1 calorie = 4.184 Joules
∴ R= \(\frac{8.314}{4.184}\) = 1.987 ≅ 2 cal K-1 mol-1

Question 52.
Derive the following expression:
M = \(\frac{\text { mRT }}{\text { PV }}\)
Answer:
According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT
n = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
Now, for a known mass ‘m’ of gas having molar mass ‘M’, number of moles ‘n’ is given as:
n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
Therefore, \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{P V}{R T}\)
On rearranging the equation, we get
M = \(\frac{\text { mRT }}{\text { PV }}\)

Question 53.
Derive the expression for combined gas law.
Answer:
The ideal gas equation is written as
PV = nRT …….(1)
On rearranging equation (1), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 33
The ideal gas equation used in this form is called combined gas law.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 54.
Derive the relation between density, molar mass and pressure.
Answer:
Relation between density, molar mass and pressure:
According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT …..(1)
On rearranging equation (1), we get
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) ……….(2)
Now, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
On substituting the value of n, equation (2) becomes
\(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{MV}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{M}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) ……….(3)
where d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = density of the gas
On rearranging the equation, we get
M = \(\frac{\mathrm{dRT}}{\mathrm{P}}\) ……(4)
This equation can be used to calculate molar mass of a gas in terms of its density.

Question 55.
State Boyle’s law in terms of density.
Answer:
Boyle’s law in terms of density is stated as ‘At constant temperature, pressure of a given mass of gas is directly proportional to its density’.

Question 56.
Derive the expression that relates partial pressure with mole fraction of a gas.
Answer:
The partial pressures of individual gases can be written in terms of ideal gas equation as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 34
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 35
Thus, partial pressure of a gas is obtained by multiplying the total pressure of mixture by mole fraction of that gas.

Question 57.
What is water vapour?
Answer:
The ‘gas’ above the surface of liquid water is described as water vapour.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 58.
Write a short note on aqueous tension.
Answer:
Aqueous tension:
i. When the liquid water is placed into a container and air above is pumped away and the container is sealed, then the liquid water evaporates and only water vapour remains in the above space. After sealing, the vapour pressure increases initially, then slows down as some water molecules condense back to form liquid water. After a few minutes, the vapour pressure reaches a maximum value, which is called the saturated vapour pressure. The pressure exerted by saturated water vapour is called aqueous tension (Paq).
ii. Aqueous tension increases with increase in temperature.

Question 59.
Explain how pressure of a dry gas can be calculated using aqueous tension.
Answer:
i. When a gas is collected over water in a closed container, it gets mixed with the saturated water vapour in that space. Therefore, the measured pressure corresponds to the pressure of the mixture of that gas and the saturated water vapour in that space.
ii. Pressure of pure and dry gas can be calculated by using the aqueous tension. It is obtained by subtracting the aqueous tension from the total pressure of the moist gas.
∴ PDry gas = PTotal – Paq
i.e., PDry gas = PTotal – Aqueous Tension
Note: Aqueous tension of water (vapour pressure) as a function of temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 36

Question 60.
A sample of N2 gas was placed in a flexible 9.0 L container at 300 K at a pressure of 1.5 atm. The gas was compressed to a volume of 3.0 L and heat was added until the temperature reached 600 K. What is the new pressure inside the container?
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 9.0 L, V2 = Final volume = 3.0 L,
P1 = Initial pressure = 1.5 atm
T1 = Initial temperature = 300 K, T2 = Final temperature = 600 K
To find: P2 = Final pressure
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: According to combined gas law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 37
Ans: The new pressure inside the container is 9 atm.

Question 61.
A gas at 772 mm Hg and at 35 °C occupies a volume of 6.851 L. Calculate its volume at STP.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 6.851 L
P1 = Initial pressure = 772 mm Hg, P2 = Final pressure = 760 mm Hg
T1 = Initial temperature = 35 °C = 35 + 273.15 K = 308.15 K
T2 = Final temperature = 273.15 K
To find: V2 = Final volume
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: According to combined gas law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 38
Ans: The volume of gas at STP is 6.169 L.

Question 62.
Find the temperature in °C at which volume and pressure of 1 mol of nitrogen gas becomes 10 dm3 and 2.46 atmosphere respectively.
Solution.
P = 2.46 atm, V = 10 dm3, n = 1 mol, R = 0.0821 dm3-atm K-1 mol-1
To find: Temperature (T)
Formula: PV = nRT
According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{nR}}=\frac{2.46 \times 10}{1 \times 0.0821}\)
T = 299.63 K
Temp, in °C = 299.63 – 273.15 = 26.48 °C
Ans: The temperature of the nitrogen gas under the given conditions is 26.48 °C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 63.
Calculate the temperature of 5.0 mol of a gas occupying 5 dm3 at 3.32 bar.
(R = 0.083 bar dm3 K-1 mol-1)
Solution:
Given: n = number of moles = 5.0 mol, V = volume = 5 dm3
P = pressure = 3.32 bar, R = 0.083 bar dm3 K-1 mol-1
To find: Temperature (T)
Formula: PV = nRT
Calculation: According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{nR}}=\frac{3.32 \times 5}{5.0 \times 0.083}\) = 40 K
Ans: The temperature of the gas is 40 K.

Question 64.
Calculate the number of moles of hydrogen gas present in a 0.5 dm3 sample of hydrogen gas at a pressure of 101.325 kPa at 27 °C.
Solution:
Given: V = 0.5 dm3 = 0.5 × 10-3 m3, P = 101.325 kPa = 101.325 × 103 Pa = 101.325 × 103 Nm-2
T = 27 °C = 27 + 273.15 K = 300.15 K, R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1
To find: n = number of moles of gas
Formula: PV = nRT
Calculation: According to ideal gas equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 39
Ans: The number of moles of hydrogen gas present in the given volume is 0.020 moles.

Question 65.
A mixture of 28 g N2, 8 g He and 40 g Ne has 20 bar pressure. What is the partial pressure of each of these gases?
Solution:
Given: mN2 = 28 g, mHe = 8 g, mNe = 40 g,
PTotal = 20 bar
To find: Partial pressure of each gas
Formula: P1 = x1 × PTotal
Calculation: Determine the number of moles (n) of each gas using the formula: n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
Determine the mole fraction of each gas using the formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 40
Ans: The partial pressure of nitrogen, helium and neon are 4 bar, 8 bar and 8 bar respectively.

Question 66.
What is an ideal gas?
Answer:
Ideal gas:

  • The gases which obey’ ideal gas equation over a complete range of temperature and pressure are called ideal gases.
  • For an ideal gas, the ratio of PV/RT = 1.
  • In an ideal gas, there are no interactive forces between the molecules and the molecular volume is negligibly small compared to the volume occupied by the gas. The gas particles are considered as point particles.

Question 67.
What are real gases?
Answer:
Real gases:

  • Gases, which do not obey ideal gas equation under all the conditions of temperature and pressure are called real gases.
  • For real gases, the ratio of PV/RT will be either greater than 1 or less than 1.
  • Real gases show deviation from ideal gas behaviour at higher pressures and lower temperatures.
  • The intermolecular attractive forces are not negligible in real gases.
  • In real gases, the actual volume of the molecules cannot be neglected as compared to the total volume of the container.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 68.
Explain the reason for deviations of gases from ideal behaviour.
Answer:
A deviation from the ideal behaviour is observed at high pressure and low temperature. It is due to two reasons.

  • The intermolecular attractive forces are not negligible in real gases. These do not allow the molecules to collide the container wall with full impact. This results in decrease in the pressure.
  • At high pressure, the molecules are very close to each other. The short range repulsive forces start operating and the molecules behave as small but hard spherical particles. The volume of the molecule is not negligible.
    Therefore, very less volume is available for molecular motion.
  • At very low temperature, the molecular motion becomes slow and the molecules are attracted to each other due to the attractive force. Hence, the behaviour of the real gas deviates from the ideal gas behaviour.
  • Deviation with respect to pressure can be studied by plotting pressure (P) vs volume (V) curve at a given temperature.
  • From the graph, it is clear that at very high pressure, the measured volume is more than theoretically calculated volume assuming ideal behaviour. However, at low pressure, measured and theoretically calculated volumes approach each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 41

Question 69.
What is compressibility factor (Z)?
Answer:
Compressibility factor (Z):
i. It is defined as the ratio of product PV and nRT.
Z = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{nRT}}\)
ii. Deviation from ideal behaviour is measured in terms of compressibility factor.
iii. For ideal gases, Z = 1 under all conditions of temperature and pressure. Therefore, the graph of Z versus P will be a straight line parallel to pressure axis.
iv. For gases that deviate from ideal behaviour, value of Z deviates from unity.
Note: Variation of compressibility factor for some gases
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 42

Question 70.
Show that the compressibility factor can be represented as Z = \(\frac{V_{\text {real }}}{V_{\text {ideal }}}\)
Answer:
For real gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 43
Thus, the compressibility factor (Z) is the ratio of actual molar volume of a gas to its molar volume if it behaved ideally, at that temperature and pressure.

Question 71.
Explain: Liquefaction of CO2 with the help of pressure vs volume isotherm.
Answer:
Most gases behave like ideal gases at high temperature. For example, the PV curve of CO2 gas at 50 °C is like the ideal Boyle’s law curve. As the temperature is lowered, the PV curve shows a deviation from the ideal Boyle’s law curve. At a particular value of low temperature, the gas gets liquified at certain increased value of pressure. For example, CO2 gas liquifies at 38.98 °C and 73 atmosphere pressure. This is the highest temperature at which liquid CO2 can exist. Above this temperature, liquid CO2 cannot form even if very high pressure is applied. Other gases also show similar behaviour.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 44

Question 72.
Define: Critical temperature, critical volume and critical pressure.
Answer:
i. The temperature above which a substance cannot be liquified by increasing pressure is called its critical temperature (Tc).
ii. The molar volume at critical temperature is called the critical volume (Vc).
iii. The pressure at the critical temperature is called the critical pressure (Pc).

Note: Critical constants for common gases
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 45
i. N2 and O2, have Tc values much below 0 °C and their Pc values are high. Consequently, liquefaction of O2 and N2 (and air) requires compression and cooling.
ii. The Tc value of CO2 nearly equals the room temperature; however, its Pc value is very high. Therefore, CO2 exists as gas under ordinary condition.

Question 73.
Water has Tc = 647.1 K and Pc = 220.6 bar. What do these values imply about the state of water under ordinary conditions?
Answer:
The Tc and Pc values of water are very high compared to the room temperature and common atmospheric pressure. As a result, water exists in liquid state under ordinary condition of temperature and pressure.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 74.
Gases possess characteristic critical temperature which depends upon the magnitude of intermolecular forces between the gas particles. Critical temperatures of ammonia and carbon dioxide are 405.5 K and 304.10 K respectively. Which of these gases will liquefy first when you start cooling from 500 K to their critical temperature?
Answer:
When cooling of ammonia and carbon dioxide gas is started from 500 K, then ammonia reaches its critical temperature first (i.e., 405.5 K.) and hence, it is also the first to get liquefied.
When the cooling is continued further, carbon dioxide gas is liquefied as it reaches its critical temperature (i.e., 304.10 K).

Question 75.
CO2 has Tc = 38.98 °C and Pc = 73 atm. How many phases of CO2 coexist at
i. 50 °C and 73 atm
ii. 20 °C and 50 atm.
Answer:
i. 50 °C and 73 atm represent a condition for CO2 above its Tc. Therefore, under this condition CO2 exists only as single phase.
ii. 20° C and 50 atm represent a condition for CO2 below its Tc. Therefore, under this condition two phases of CO2, namely, liquid and gas can coexist.

Question 76.
In which of the following cases, water will have the highest and the lowest boiling point?
i. Water is boiled in an open vessel.
ii. Water is boiled in a pressure cooker.
iii. Water is boiled in an evacuated vessel.
Answer:
Higher the pressure to which a liquid is exposed, higher will be its boiling point. The pressure to which water is exposed is maximum in the pressure cooker and minimum in the evacuated vessel. Therefore, boiling point of water is highest in a pressure cooker and lowest in an evacuated vessel.

Question 77.
Define: Liquid state
Answer:
Liquid state is the intermediate state between solid state and gaseous state.

Question 78.
Give reason: Liquid possesses properties such as fluidity, definite volume and ability to take shape of the bottom of the container in which it is placed.
Answer:
Molecules of liquid are held together by moderately strong intermolecular forces and can move about within the boundary of the liquid. As a result, liquid possesses properties such as fluidity, definite volume and ability to take shape of the bottom of the container in which it is placed.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 79.
Name some measurable properties of liquid.
Answer:

  • Density
  • Boiling point
  • Freezing point
  • Vapour pressure
  • Surface tension
  • Viscosity.

Question 80.
What are the factors affecting vapour pressure?
Answer:
Factors affecting vapour pressure:

  • Nature of liquid: Liquids having relatively weak intermolecular forces possess high vapour pressure. Such liquids are called volatile liquids.
    e. g. Petrol evaporates quickly than motor oil. Hence, petrol has higher vapour pressure than motor oil.
  • Temperature: When the liquid is gradually heated, its temperature rises and its vapour pressure increases.

Question 81.
Explain how temperature affects surface tension.
Answer:
Surface tension is a temperature dependent property. When attractive forces are large, surface tension is large. Surface tension decreases as the temperature increases. With increase in temperature, kinetic energy of molecules increases. So, intermolecular forces of attraction decrease, and thereby surface tension decreases.

Question 82.
Mention some applications of surface tension.
Answer:
Applications of surface tension:

  • Cleaning action of soap and detergent is due to the lowering of interfacial tension between water and oily substances. Due to lower surface tension, the soap solution penetrates into the fibre, surrounds the oily substance and washes it away.
  • Efficacy of toothpastes, mouthwashes and nasal drops is partly due to presence of substances having lower surface tension. This increases the efficiency of their penetrating action.

Question 83.
Give reason: Liquid droplets acquire spherical shape.
Answer:
For a given volume of a liquid, spherical shape always imparts minimum surface area thereby reducing the surface tension. Hence, liquid droplets acquire spherical shape.

Question 84.
Define: Coefficient of viscosity
Answer:
Coefficient of viscosity is defined as the degree to which a fluid resists flow under an applied force, measured by the tangential frictional force per unit area per unit velocity gradient when the flow is laminar.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 85.
Describe various factors affecting viscosity of a liquid.
Answer:
Factors affecting viscosity of a liquid:
i. Temperature: Viscosity is a temperature dependent property.
Viscosity ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { Temperature }}\)
ii. Nature of liquid: Viscosity also depends on molecular size and shape. Larger molecules have more viscosity and spherical molecules offer the least resistance to flow and therefore are less viscous. Greater the viscosity, slower is the liquid flow.

Question 86.
Describe three daily life instances where viscosity plays an important role.
Answer:

  • Lubricating oils are viscous liquids. Gradation of lubricating oils is done on the basis of viscosity. A good quality lubricating oil does not change its viscosity with increase or decrease in temperature.
  • Increase blood viscosity than the normal value is taken as an indication of cardiovascular disease.
  • Glass panes of old buildings are found to become thicker with time near the bottom. This indicates that glass is not a solid but a supercooled viscous liquid.

Question 87.
For an experiment, a scientist fills different gases in four flasks as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 46
i. What is the ratio of the number of molecules of the gases in flask A to flask B?
ii. Calculate the pressure exerted by nitrogen gas in flask B if the temperature is doubled.
iii. If the scientist transfers the gas in flask D to another flask of 2.5 L at 1 atm pressure, what will be the temperature of the gas in the new flask?
Answer:
i. 1:1
ii. P ∝ T (when V and n are constants)
∴ If temperature is doubled, pressure also doubles.
∴ P = 2 atm
iii. \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\) (when P and n are constants)
∴ \(\frac{1}{298}=\frac{2.5}{T_{2}}\)
∴ T2 = 745 K

Question 88.
A balloon containing 0.6 mol of helium gas has a volume of 1.5 L.
i. Assuming that the temperature and pressure remains constant, what happens to the volume of the balloon if an additional 0.6 mol of helium is added?
ii. Assuming that the temperature and pressure remains constant, what happens to the volume of the balloon if 0.3 mol of helium is removed?
Answer:
i. The volume of the balloon increases.
ii. The volume of the balloon decreases.

Question 89.
In an experiment conducted to study the diffusion of gases using same experimental conditions, following data were recorded.
Gas A: 50 cm3 of gas A takes 7 minutes to diffuse from one container to the adjacent container.
Gas B: 50 cm3 of gas B takes 10 minutes to diffuse from one container to the adjacent container.
i. What is the rate of diffusion of gas A?
ii. What is the rate of diffusion of gas B?
iii. Which gas has higher molecular mass?
Answer:
i. Volume of gas A diffused = 50 cm3
Time required for diffusion = 7 minutes = 7 × 60 seconds
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 47
∴ The rate of diffusion of gas A is 0.12 cm3 s-1.
ii. The rate of diffusion of gas B is 0.083 cm3 s-1.
iii. Gas B has higher molecular mass.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is CORRECT for both gases and liquids?
(A) Indefinite volume
(B) Definite shape
(C) Indefinite shape
(D) Definite volume
Answer:
(D) Definite volume

2. The composition of …………. in air is about 78% by volume.
(A) CO2
(B) O2
(C) N2
(D) Ar
Answer:
(C) N2

3. Which of the following expression at constant pressure represents Charles’s law?
(A) V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
(B) V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}^{2}}\)
(C) V ∝ T
(D) V ∝ d
Answer:
(C) V ∝ T

4. The pressure of 2 mole of ideal gas at 546 K having volume 44.8 L is …………….
(A) 2 atm
(B) 3 atm
(C) 7 atm
(D) 1 atm 1023
Answer:
(A) 2 atm

5. At 300 K, the density of a certain gaseous molecule at 2 bar is double to that of dinitrogen at 4 bar. The molar mass of gaseous molecule is …………….
(A) 28 g mol-1
(B) 56 g mol-1
(C) 112 g mol-1
(D) 224 g mol-1
Answer:
(C) 112 g mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

6. As the temperature increases, average kinetic energy of molecules increases. What would be the effect of increase of temperature on pressure provided the volume is constant?
(A) Increases
(B) Decreases
(C) Remains same
(D) Becomes half
Answer:
(A) Increases

7. Assuming ideal gas behaviour, the ratio of density of ammonia to that of hydrogen chloride at same temperature and pressure is ………….. (Atomic wt. of Cl = 35.5 u)
(A) 1.46
(B) 0.46
(C) 1.64
(D) 0.64
Answer:
(B) 0.46

8. The number of moles of H2 in 0.224 L of hydrogen gas at STP (273 K, 1 atm) assuming ideal gas behaviour is …………..
(A) 1
(B) 0.1
(C) 0.01
(D) 0.001
Answer:
(C) 0.01

9. The volume occupied by 11.5 g of carbon dioxide at STP is approximately equal to:
(A) 5.9 L
(B) 22.5 L
(C) 86 L
(D) 259 L
Answer:
(A) 5.9 L

10. Which of the following is CORRECT regarding a fixed amount of ideal gas?
(A) Doubling the temperature, doubles the volume, provided the pressure remains the same.
(B) Doubling the temperature, halves the volume, provided the pressure remains the same.
(C) Doubling the pressure, doubles the volume, provided the temperature remains the same.
(D) Doubling the volume, doubles the pressure, provided the temperature remains the same.
Answer:
(A) Doubling the temperature, doubles the volume, provided the pressure remains the same.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

11. When one mole of an ideal gas is heated from 300 K to 360 K at constant pressure of 1 atm, its volume …………….
(A) increases from V to 6.0V
(B) increases from V to 3.6V
(C) increases from V to 1.2V
(D) increases from V to 1.6V
Answer:
(C) increases from V to 1.2V

12. The partial pressure of a gas is obtained by multiplying the total pressure of mixture by …………… of that gas.
(A) molar mass
(B) moles
(C) mass
(D) mole fraction
Answer:
(D) mole fraction

13. The highest temperature at which liquid CO2 can exist is ……………..
(A) 18.98 °C
(B) 38.98 °C
(C) 50.0 °C
(D) 73.9 °C
Answer:
(B) 38.98 °C

14. The SI unit of surface tension is ……………..
(A) Pascal
(B) N s m-2
(C) km-2 s
(D) N m-1
Answer:
(D) N m-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 1.
What are p-block elements?
Answer:

  • Elements in which the differentiating electron (the last filling electron) enters the outermost p orbital are p-block elements.
  • Since a maximum of six electrons can be accommodated in p-subshell i.e., three p-orbitals, the p-block contains six groups numbered from 13 to 18 in the modem periodic table.
  • The p-block elements show greater variation in the properties than s-block elements.

Question 2.
Write the names of the elements present in groups 13, 14, and 15.
Answer:

GroupName of familyName of the elements
13Boron familyBoron (5B), aluminium (13Al), gallium (31Ga), indium (49In), thallium (81Tl)
14Carbon familyCarbon (6C), silicon (14Si), germanium (32Ge), tin (50Sn), lead (82Pb)
15Nitrogen familyNitrogen (7N), phosphorus (15P), arsenic (33AS), antimony (51Sb), bismuth (83Bi)

Question 3.
i. Write the general outer electronic configuration of the elements of group 13, group 14 and group 15.
ii. By how many electrons do their outer electronic configurations differ from their nearest inert gas?
Answer:
i.

GroupGeneral outer electronic configuration
13ns2 np1
14ns2 np2
15ns2 np3

ii. The outer electronic configurations of the elements group 13, group 14 and group 15 differ from their nearest inert gas by 5, 4 and 3 electrons, respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 4.
In which form do the elements of groups 13,14 and 15 occur in nature?
Answer:

  • The elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 do not occur in free monoatomic state and are found as compounds with other elements.
  • They also occur in the form of polyatomic molecules (such as N2, P4, C60) or polyatomic covalent arrays (such as graphite, diamond).

Question 5.
Write condensed electronic configurations of the following elements.
13Al, 49In, 14Si, 50Sn, 15P, 33As
Answer:
Condensed electronic configurations of
i. 13Al: [Ne]3s2 3p1
ii. 49In: [Kr]4d105s25p1
iii. 14Si: [Ne]3s23p2
iv. 50Sn: [Kr]4d105s25p2
v. 15P: [Ne]3s23p3
vi. 33As: [Ar]3d104s24p3

Note: Condensed electronic configurations of elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 are given in the table below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 1

Question 6.
Name the following.
i. A metalloid present in group 13.
ii. A group 13 element which is the third most abundant element in the earth’s crust.
Answer:
i. Boron
ii. Aluminium

Question 7.
Why boron is classified as a metalloid?
Answer:
Boron is glossy and hard solid like metals but a poor conductor of electricity like nonmetals. Since it exhibits properties of both metals and nonmetals, boron is classified as a metalloid.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 8.
Describe the variation in the electronegativity of group 13 elements.
Answer:

  • In group 13, on moving down the group, the electronegativity decreases from B to Al.
  • However, there is a marginal increase in the electronegativity from Al to Tl.
  • This trend is a result of the irregularities observed in atomic size of elements.

Question 9.
Atomic numbers of the group 13 elements are in the order B < Al < Ga < In < Tl. Arrange these elements in increasing order of ionic radii of M3+.
Answer:

  • The given elements are in an increasing order of their atomic number.
  • The general outer electronic configuration of group 13 elements is ns2np1.
  • M3+ ion is formed by the removal of three electrons from the outermost shell ‘n’.
  • In the M3+ ions, the ‘n-1’ shell becomes the outermost shell. Size of the ‘n-1’ shell increases down the group.

Therefore, the ionic radii of M3+ ion increases down the group in the following order:
B3+ < Al3+ < Ga3+ < In3+ < Tl3+

Question 10.
Why the atomic radius of Gallium is less than that of aluminium?
Answer:

  • Atomic radius of the elements increases down the group due to addition of new shells.
  • Electronic configuration of Al is [Ne]3s23p1 while that of Ga is [Ar]3d104s24p1.
  • As Al does not have d-electrons, it offers an exception to this trend.
  • As we go from Al down to Ga the nuclear charge increases by 18 units. Out of the 18 electrons added, 10 electrons are in the inner 3d subshell of Ga. These d-electrons offer poor shielding effect.
  • Therefore, the effect of attraction due to increased nuclear charge is experienced prominently by the outer electrons of Ga and thus, its atomic radius becomes smaller than that of Al.

Hence, the atomic radius of gallium is less than that of aluminium.

Question 11.
The values of the first ionization enthalpy of Al, Si and P are 577, 786 and 1012 kJ mol-1 respectively. Explain the observed trend.
Answer:

  • The trend shows increasing first ionization enthalpy from Al to Si to P.
  • Al, Si and P belong to the third period in the periodic table and hence, they have same valence shell.
  • As we move across a period from left to right, the nuclear charge increases. Due to this, electrons in the valence shell are held more tightly by the nucleus as we go from Al to Si to P.
  • Therefore, more energy is required to remove an electron from its outermost shell.

Hence, the value of first ionization enthalpy increases from Al to Si to P.

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 13 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 12.
Name metal(s), nonmetal(s) and metalloid(s) of group 14.
Answer:
i. Metal: Tin, lead
ii. Nonmetal: Carbon
iii. Metalloid: Silicon, germanium

Question 13.
Explain the variation in the following properties of the group 14 elements,
i. Atomic radii
ii. Ionization enthalpy
iii. Electronegativity
Answer:
i. Atomic radii (Covalent radii):

  • In the periodic table as we move down the group 14 from C to Pb, the atomic radii increases due to the addition of new shell at each succeeding element.
  • However, the increase is comparatively less after silicon due to poor shielding by inner d- and f-electrons in the atoms.

ii. Ionization enthalpy:

  • Due to increased effective nuclear charge, group 14 elements have higher value of ionization enthalpy than corresponding group 13 elements.
  • In the periodic table, as we move down the group 14 from C to Sn, the ionization enthalpy decreases.
  • From Si to Sn, the ionization enthalpy decreases slightly.
  • However, from Sn to Pb, the ionization enthalpy increases slightly. It is due to the poor shielding effect of intervening d and f orbitals and increase in the size of the atoms.

iii. Electronegativity:

  • Due to small atomic size, group 14 elements are slightly more electronegative than the corresponding group 13 elements.
  • As we move down the group 14 from C to Si in the periodic table, the electronegativity decreases.
  • The electronegativity values for elements from Si to Pb are almost the same.
  • Among group 14 elements, carbon is the most electronegative with electronegativity of 2.5.

Question 14.
Explain why there is a phenomenal decrease in ionization enthalpy from carbon to silicon.
Answer:

  • Carbon is the first element of group 14 and thus, it has the smallest atomic size.
  • The ionization enthalpy of carbon (1086 kJ mol-1) is very high due to its small atomic size (77 pm) and high electronegativity (2.5).
  • However, the ionization enthalpy of silicon (786 kJ mol-1) decreases phenomenally due to the increase in its atomic size (118 pm) and low electronegativity (1.8).

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 14 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 3

Question 15.
Which type of elements are present in group 15? Mention their physical state.
Answer:

  • Group 15 includes all the three traditional types of elements i.e., metals, nonmetals and metalloids.
  • Nitrogen is a gas whereas the remaining group 15 elements are solids.
  • The gaseous nitrogen and brittle phosphorus are nonmetals.
  • Arsenic and antimony are metalloids while bismuth is moderately reactive metal.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 16.
Explain the trends in physical properties of group 15 elements.
i. Atomic and ionic radii
ii. Ionization enthalpy
iii. Electronegativity
Answer:
i. Atomic and ionic radii:

  • Atomic size increases down the group with increasing atomic number.
  • The effective nuclear charge in case of group 15 elements is larger than that of group 14 elements. Due to the increased effective nuclear charge, electrons are strongly attracted by the nucleus. Thus, the atomic and ionic radii of group 15 elements are smaller than the atomic and ionic radii of the corresponding group 14 elements.
  • On moving down the group, number of shells increases which leads to increased shielding effect and as a result atomic radii and ionic radii increases.

ii. Ionization enthalpy:

  • Due to extra stability of half-filled p-orbitals and relatively smaller size of group 15 elements, ionization enthalpy of group 15 elements is much greater than that of the group 14 elements in the corresponding periods.
  • On moving down the group, increase in atomic size and screening effect overcome the effective nuclear charge and thus, ionization enthalpy decreases.

iii. Electronegativity:

  • Due to smaller size and greater effective nuclear charge of atoms, group 15 elements have higher electronegativity values than group 14 elements.
  • On moving down the group, electronegativity values decreases due to increase in the size of the atoms and shielding effect.
  • Nitrogen is the most electronegative element among group 15 elements. However, there is not much of a difference between the electronegativity values of other elements of group 15.

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 15 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 4

Question 17.
Write a note on the oxidation state of p-block elements with respect to groups 13, 14 and 15 elements.
Answer:

  • Oxidation state is the primary chemical property of all elements.
  • The highest oxidation state exhibited by the p-block elements is equal to the total number of valence electrons i.e., the sum of s- and p-electrons present in the valence shell. This is sometimes called the group oxidation state.
  • In boron, carbon and nitrogen families, the group oxidation state is the most stable oxidation state for the lighter elements.
  • Besides, the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 exhibit other oxidation states which are lower than the group oxidation state by two units.
  • The lower oxidation states become increasingly stable as we move down to heavier elements in the groups.

Note: Group oxidation states and common oxidation states with examples for groups 13, 14 and 15.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 5

Question 18.
What are general oxidation states of group 13 elements? Explain.
Answer:

  • The general oxidation states of group 13 are +1 and +3.
  • The group 13 elements have the outermost electronic configuration ns2 np1.
  • If only np1 electron takes part in bonding, the oxidation state is +1 and if all the three electrons i.e., ns2 np1 take part in bonding, the oxidation state is +3. Hence, the expected oxidation states are +1 and +3.

Question 19.
Give reason: The increased stability of the oxidation state is lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements.
Answer:

  • The increased stability of the oxidation state lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements is due to inert pair effect.
  • In these elements, the two s-electrons are involved less readily in chemical reactions.
  • This is because, in heavier p-block elements, the s-electrons of valence shell experience poor shielding than valence p-electrons due to ten inner d-electrons.

Hence, the increased stability of the oxidation state is lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 20.
Why Tl1+ ion is more stable than Tl3+?
Answer:

  • Tl is a heavy element which belongs to group 13 of the p-block.
  • The common oxidation state for this group is +3.
  • In p-block, the lower oxidation state is more stable for heavier elements due to inert pair effect.

Hence, Tl1+ ion is more stable than Tl3+ ion.

Question 21.
How can you explain the higher stability of BCl3 as compared to TlCl3?
Answer:

  • Boron is a light element in group 13 and has outermost electronic configuration 2s2 2p1 whereas thallium is a heavy element in group 13 and has outermost electronic configuration 6s2 6p1.
  • Because of its small ionic radius, boron forms stable compounds in +3 oxidation state.
  • Thallium has a large atomic size and due to the inert pair effect forms more stable compounds with lower oxidation state +1 than compounds with +3 oxidation state.

Therefore, BCl3 has higher stability than TlCl3.

Question 22.
State the oxidation state for the following:
i. The group oxidation state of group 14 elements.
ii. The stable oxidation state for lead.
iii. Oxidation state of carbon in CH4.
Answer:
i. +4
ii. +2
iii. -4

Question 23.
GeCl4 is more stable than GeCl2 while PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4. Explain.
Answer:

  • Elements Ge and Pb belong to 4th and 6th period in the group 14.
  • The group oxidation state of group 14 elements is +4.
  • However, the stability of other oxidation state which is lower by 2 units i.e., +2, increases down the group due to inert pair effect.
  • Therefore, the stability of the oxidation state +4 is more in Ge than in Pb while the stability of the oxidation state +2 is more in Pb than in Ge.

Hence, GeCl4 is more stable than GeCl2 while PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4.

Question 24.
Name the elements of group 14 which are generally occur in +2 oxidation state.
Answer:
The elements of group 14 that are generally occur in +2 oxidation state are tin (Sn) and lead (Pb).

Question 25.
Discuss the nature of bonding in compounds of group 13, 14 and 15 elements.
Answer:

  • The lighter elements in groups 13, 14 and 15 have small atomic radii and high ionization enthalpy values. They form covalent bonds with other atoms by overlapping of valence shell orbitals.
  • As we move down the group, the value of ionization enthalpy decreases. The atomic radius increases since the valence shell orbitals are more diffused.
  • The heavier elements in these groups tend to form ionic bonds. The first member of these groups belongs to second period and do not have d orbitals and hence, B, C and N cannot expand their octet.
  • The subsequent elements in the group possess vacant d orbital in their valence shell, which can expand their octet forming a variety of compounds.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 26.
Explain the reactivity of groups 13, 14 and 15 elements towards air.
Answer:
i. Group 13 elements:
a. On heating with air or oxygen, group 13 elements form oxide of the type E2O3.
\(4 \mathrm{E}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{E}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{3(\mathrm{~s})}\) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl)

b. At high temperature, group 13 elements also react with nitrogen present in the air to form corresponding nitrides.
\(2 \mathrm{E}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{EN}_{(\mathrm{s})}\) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl)

ii. Group 14 elements: The elements of group 14 on heating in air or oxygen form oxide of the type EO and EO2 in accordance with the stable oxidation state and availability of oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 6

iii. Group 15 elements: The elements of group 15 on heating in air or oxygen forms two types of oxide i.e., E2O3 and E2O5.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 7
Due to increase in metallic character down the groups 13, 14 and 15, the nature of their oxides gradually varies from acidic through amphoteric to basic.
[Note: The temperature required for the reaction of nitrogen with oxygen is very high. This is produced by striking an electric arc.]

Question 27.
Classify the following oxides into acidic, basic or amphoteric.
B2O3, Ga2O3, Tl2O3, In2O3, Al2O3
Answer:

Acidic oxideB2O3
Basic oxidesIn2O3, Tl2O3
Amphoteric oxidesAl2O3, Ga2O3

Question 28.
Match the following.

Column AColumn B
i.N2O5a.Amphoteric
ii.Bi2O3b.Acidic
iii.Sb2O3c.Basic

Answer:
i – b,
ii – c,
iii – a

Note: Nature of stable oxides of groups 13, 14 and 15 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 8

Question 29.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. Sb is more stable in +3 oxidation state.
ii. Oxides of the type E2O5 are formed by group 15 elements.
iii. As4O6 is an acidic oxide.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False
As4O6 is an amphoteric oxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 30.
What happens when the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 react with water?
Answer:
i. Most of the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 are unaffected by water.
ii. Aluminium reacts with water on heating and forms hydroxide while tin reacts with steam to form oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 9
iii. Lead is unaffected by water due to the formation of a protective film of oxide.

Question 31.
Why is phosphorus stored under water?
Answer:
Phosphorus is highly reactive and hence, it is stored under water to prevent its reaction with air as it catches fire on being exposed to air.

Question 32.
Explain the reactivity of group 13 elements towards halogens.
Answer:
i. All the elements of group 13 react directly with halogens to form trihalides (EX3).
2E(S) + 3X2(g) → 2EX3(s) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In and X = F, Cl, Br, I)
ii. Thallium is an exception as it forms monohalides (TlX).

Question 33.
Describe the reactivity of group 14 elements with halogens.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 14 (except carbon) react directly with halogens to form tetrahalides (EX4).
  • The heavy elements Ge and Pb form dihalides as well.
  • Stability of dihalides increases down the group due to inert pair effect.
  • The ionic character of halides also increases steadily down the group.

Question 34.
Discuss the reactivity of group 15 elements with halogens.
Answer:

  • Elements of the group 15 reacts with halogens to form two series of halides i.e., trihalides (EX3) and pentahalides (EX5).
  • The pentahalides possess more covalent character due to availability of vacant d orbitals of the valence shell for bonding.
  • Nitrogen being second period element, does not have d orbitals in its valence shell, and therefore, does not form pentahalides.
  • Trihalides of the group 15 elements are predominantly covalent except BiF3. The only stable trihalide of nitrogen is NF3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 35.
Nitrogen does not form pentahalides. Give reason.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 7N is 1s2 2s2 2p3. It has 3 unpaired electrons which can form 3 covalent bonds, thus forming NX3 molecule.
  • Valence shell of nitrogen (n = 2) contains only s and p orbitals.
  • Thus, due to the absence of d orbitals in the valence shell, nitrogen cannot expand its octet, therefore, it cannot form compounds like NCl5 and NF5.

Hence, nitrogen does not form pentahalides.

Question 36.
Nitrogen does not form NCl5 or NF5 but phosphorus can. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 7N is 1s2 2s2 2p3 while that of 15P is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p3.
  • As phosphorus contains d orbitals, it can expand its octet to form MX3 as well MX5 compounds.
  • However, due to absence of d orbitals, nitrogen cannot form MX3 or MX5.

Hence, Nitrogen does not form NCl5 or NF5 but phosphoms can form compounds like PCl5 or PF5.

Question 37.
Define catenation.
Answer:
The property of self-linking of atoms of an element by covalent bonds to form chains and rings is called catenation.

Question 38.
Explain catenation of group 14 elements.
Answer:
i. The property of self-linking of atoms of an element by covalent bonds to form chains and rings is called catenation.
ii. The strength of the element-element bond determines the tendency of an element to form a chain.
iii. Among the elements of group 14, the bond strength is maximum for C-C bond (348 kJ mol-1). Hence, carbon has maximum tendency for catenation.

BondBond strength (Bond enthalpy kJ mol-1)
C-C348
Si-Si297
Ge-Ge260
Sn-Sn240

iv. From the values of bond enthalpy, it can be concluded that the tendency to form chains is maximum for carbon and much lesser for silicon. Germanium has still lesser tendency and tin has hardly any tendency for catenation. Lead does not show catenation.
Therefore, the order of catenation of group 14 elements is C >> Si > Ge = Sn.

Question 39.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. Among the group 14 elements, Ge does not show the property of catenation.
Answer:
i. False
Among the group 14 elements, Pb (lead) does not shows the property of catenation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 40.
Define allotropy.
Answer:
When a solid element exists in different crystalline forms with different physical properties such as colour, density, melting point, etc. the phenomenon is called allotropy.

Question 41.
i. What are allotropes?
ii. Name various allotropes of carbon.
Answer:
i. When a solid element exists in different crystalline forms with different physical properties such as colour, density, melting point, etc. the phenomenon is called allotropy and the individual crystalline forms are called allotropes.
ii. Diamond, graphite, fiillerenes, graphene and carbon nanotubes are various allotropes of carbon.

Question 42.
Explain the structure of diamond.
Answer:
Structure of diamond:

  • In diamond, each carbon atom undergoes sp3 hybridization and is linked to four other carbon atoms in tetrahedral manner.
  • The C – C bond length is 154 pm.
  • The tetrahedra are linked together forming a three-dimensional network structure involving strong C-C single bonds which makes diamond the hardest natural substance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 10

Question 43.
Write physical properties of diamond. Also, state its uses.
Answer:
i. Physical properties

  • Diamond is the hardest natural substance.
  • It has abnormally high melting point (3930 °C).
  • It is a bad conductor of electricity.

ii. Uses: Diamond is used

  • for cutting glass and in drilling tools.
  • for making dies for drawing thin wire from metal.
  • for making jewellery.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 44.
Describe the structure of graphite.
Answer:

  • Graphite is composed of layers of two-dimensional sheets of carbon atoms.
  • Each sheet is made up of hexagonal net of sp2 carbons bonded to three neighbours forming three bonds.
  • The fourth electron in the unhybrid p-orbital of each carbon is shared by all carbon atoms resulting in a π bond. These it electrons are delocalized over the whole layer.
  • The C – C bond length in graphite is 141.5 pm.
  • The individual layers are held by weak van der Waals forces and separated by 335 pm.
  • Graphite is soft and slippery and is thermodynamically most stable allotrope of carbon.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 11

Question 45.
Diamond is very hard whereas graphite is soft. Explain.
Answer:

  • Diamond has three-dimensional network of sp3 hybridized carbon atoms joined by extended covalent bonds which are difficult to break. Therefore, diamond is hard.
  • Graphite has two-dimensional sheet like structure, like layers of hexagonal rings formed from sp2 hybridized carbon atoms. These layers are held by weak van der Waals forces, which can be broken easily. Therefore, graphite is soft and slippery.

Hence, diamond is very hard whereas graphite is soft.

Question 46.
i. What are fullerenes?
ii. How are they prepared?
Answer:
i. Fullerenes are allotropes of carbon in which carbon molecules are linked by a definite numbers of carbon atoms, for example as in C60.
ii. Fullerenes are produced when an electric arc is struck between the graphite electrodes in an inert atmosphere of argon or helium. The soot formed contains significant amount of C60 fullerene and smaller amounts of other fullerenes C32, C50, C70 and C84.

Question 47.
Discuss the structure and properties of fullerene (C6o).
Answer:

  • C60 has a shape like soccer ball and called Buckminsterfullerene or bucky ball.
  • It contains 20 hexagonal and 12 pentagonal fused rings of carbon.
  • The C60 fullerene structure exhibit separations between the neighbouring carbons as 143.5 pm and 138.3 pm.
  • Fullerenes are covalent and soluble in organic solvents.
  • Fullerene C60 reacts with group 1 metals forming solids such as K3C60.
  • The compound K3C60 behaves as a superconductor below 18 K, which means that its carries electric current with zero resistance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 12

Question 48.
Explain the structure of carbon nanotubes.
Answer:

  • Carbon nanotubes are cylindrical in shape consisting of rolled-up graphite sheet.
  • Nanotubes can be single-walled (SWNTs) with a diameter of less than 1 nm or multi-walled (MWNTs) with diameter reaching more than 100 nm.
  • Their lengths range from several micrometres to millimetres.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 49.
Describe the properties of carbon nanotubes.
Answer:

  • Carbon nanotubes are robust. They can be bent, and when released, they will spring back to the original shape.
  • Carbon nanotubes have high electrical or heat conductivities and highest strength-to-weight ratio for any known material to date.
  • The researchers of NASA are combining carbon nanotubes with other materials into composites that can be used to build lightweight spacecraft.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 13

Question 50.
What is graphene?
Answer:

  • Isolated layer of graphite is called graphene.
  • Graphene sheet is a two dimensional solid.
  • It has unique electronic properties.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 14

Question 51.
Explain the structure of various allotropes of phosphorus.
Answer:
Phosphorus is found in different allotropic forms. White and red phosphorus are important allotropes of phosphorus.
i. White (yellow) phosphorus:

  1. White (yellow) phosphorus consists of discrete tetrahedral P4 molecules.
  2. The P – P – P bond angle is 60°.
  3. White phosphorus is less stable and hence more reactive, because of angular strain in the P4 molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 15

ii. Red phosphorus:

  • Red phosphorus consists of chains of P4 linked together by covalent bonds.
  • Thus, it is polymeric in nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 16

Question 52.
Enlist properties of
i. white phosphorus.
ii. red phosphorus.
Answer:
i. Properties of white phosphorus:

  • It is translucent white waxy solid.
  • It glows in the dark (chemiluminescence).
  • It is insoluble in water but dissolves in boiling NaOH solution.
  • It is poisonous.

ii. Properties of red phosphorus:

  • It is stable and less reactive.
  • It is odourless and possess iron grey lustre.
  • It does not glow in the dark.
  • It is insoluble in water.
  • It is nonpoisonous.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 53.
How is red phosphorus prepared?
Answer:
Red phosphorus is prepared by heating white phosphorus at 573 K in an inert atmosphere.

Question 54.
State whether the following statement is TRUE or FALSE. Correct if false.
i. Covalent molecules have irregular shape described with the help of bond lengths and bond angles.
ii. It is difficult to understand the reactivity of covalent inorganic compounds from their structures.
iii. Inorganic molecules are often represented by molecular formulae indicating their elemental composition.
Answer:
i. False
Covalent molecules have definite shape described with the help of bond lengths and bond angles.
ii. False
The reactivity of covalent inorganic compounds is better understood from their structures.
iii. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 55.
Describe structure of the following molecules.
i. Boron trichloride
ii. Aluminium chloride
iii. Orthoboric acid
Answer:
i. Structure of boron trichloride (BCl3) molecule:

  • Boron trichloride (BCl3) is a covalent compound.
  • In BCl3 molecule, boron atom is sp2 hybridized having one vacant unhybridized p orbital.
  • B in BCl3 has incomplete octet.
  • BCl3 is a nonpolar trigonal planar molecule.
  • Each Cl – B – Cl bond angle is 120°.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 17

ii. Structure of aluminium chloride (AlCl3) molecule:

  • Aluminium atom in aluminium chloride is sp2 hybridized, with one vacant unhybrid p-orbital.
  • Aluminium chloride exists as the dimer (Al2Cl6) formed by overlap of vacant 3d orbital of Al with a lone pair of electrons of Cl.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 18

iii. Structure of orthoboric or boric acid (H3BO3) molecule:

  • Orthoboric acid has central boron atom bound to three -OH groups.
  • The solid orthoboric acid has layered crystal structure in which trigonal planar B(OH)3 units are joined together by hydrogen bonds.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 19

Question 56.
Which are the different crystalline forms of silica?
Answer:
Quartz, cristobalite and tridymite are the different crystalline forms of silica.
[Note: These crystalline forms are inter-convertible at a suitable temperature.]

Question 57.
Explain the structure of silicon dioxide.
Answer:

  • Silicon dioxide (SiO2), is also known as silica.
  • It is a covalent three-dimensional network solid.
  • In SiO2, each silicon atom is covalently bound in tetrahedral manner to four oxygen atoms.
  • The crystal contains eight membered rings having alternate silicon and oxygen atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 20

Question 58.
Discuss the nature and structure of the following compounds.
i. Nitric acid
ii. Phosphoric acid
Answer:
i. Nitric acid:

  • Nitric acid (HNO3) is a strong, oxidizing mineral acid.
  • The central nitrogen atom is sp2 hybridized.
  • HNO3 exhibits resonance phenomenon.
  • Figure (a) represents resonating structures of HNO3 while figure (b) represents resonance hybrid of HNO3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 21

ii. Phosphoric acid (Orthophosphoric acid):

  • Phosphorus forms number of oxyacids. Orthophosphoric acid (H3PO4) is a strong nontoxic mineral acid.
  • It contains three ionizable acidic hydrogens.
  • The central phosphorus atom is tetrahedral.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 22

Question 59.
Give the molecular formula of crystalline borax.
Answer:
The crystalline borax has formula Na2B4O7.10H2O or Na2[B4O5(OH)4].8H2O.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 60.
How is borax obtained from its mineral colemanite?
Answer:
Borax is obtained from its mineral colemanite by boiling it with a solution of sodium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 23

Question 61.
Why is the aqueous solution of borax alkaline?
Answer:
On hydrolysis, borax forms a strong base (NaOH) and a weak acid (H3BO3). The presence of the strong base makes borax solution alkaline.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 24

Question 62.
What happens when borax is heated strongly?
Answer:
Borax is a white crystalline solid. On heating, borax loses water molecules and swells up. On further heating, it melts and forms a transparent liquid, which solidifies into a glass like material known as borax bead.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 25

Question 63.
Explain borax bead test.
Answer:
i. Borax bead test is used to detect coloured transition metal ions.
ii. On heating, borax loses water molecules and swells up. On further heating, it melts and forms a transparent liquid, which solidifies into a glass like material known as borax bead.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 26
iii. The borax bead consists of sodium metaborate and boric anhydride, which reacts with metals salts to form coloured bead.
e.g. When borax is heated in a Bunsen burner flame with CoO on a loop of platinum wire, a blue coloured Co(BO2)2 bead is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 27

Question 64.
Write the uses of borax.
Answer:
Borax is used

  • to manufacture optical and hard borosilicate glasses.
  • as a flux for soldering and welding.
  • as a mild antiseptic in the preparation of medical soaps.
  • in qualitative analysis for borax bead test.
  • as a brightener in washing powder.

Question 65.
How are silicones prepared? Write their properties.
Answer:
i. Preparation of silicones:
a. Alkyl or aryl substituted silicon chlorides having general formula RnSiCl(4-n) (R = alkyl or aryl group) are used as the starting materials for manufacture of silicones.
b. When methyl chloride reacts with silicon in the presence of copper catalyst at a temperature 573 K, various types of methyl substituted chlorosilane of formula MeSiCl3, Me2SiCl2, Me3SiCl with small amounts of Me4Si are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 28
c. Hydrolysis of dimethyldichlorosilane, (CH3)2SiCl2 followed by condensation polymerisation yields straight chain silicone polymers.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 29

d. The chain length of polymer can be controlled by adding (CH3)3SiCl at the end.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 30

ii. Properties:

  • Silicones are water repellent.
  • They have high thermal stability.
  • They are good electrical insulators.
  • They are resistant to oxidation and chemicals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 66.
Explain the preparation of ammonia from nitrogeneous organic matter.
Answer:
Ammonia is formed by the decomposition of nitrogeneous organic matter such as urea. It is therefore, present naturally in small quantities in air and soil.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 31

Question 67.
Describe laboratory method for preparation of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is prepared on laboratory scale by decomposition of the ammonium salts with calcium hydroxide or caustic soda.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 32

Question 68.
How is ammonia manufactured by Haber process?
Answer:

  • On the large scale, ammonia is prepared by direct combination of dinitrogen and dihydrogen by Haber process.
  • In this process, dinitrogen reacts with dihydrogen under high pressure of 200 × 105 Pa (200 atm) and temperature around 700 K to produce ammonia.
    N2(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g); ΔfH° = -46.1 kJ mol-1
  • Iron oxide with trace amounts of K2O and Al2O3 is used as catalyst in Haber process.
  • High pressure favours the formation of ammonia as equilibrium is attained rapidly under these conditions.

Question 69.
State the physical properties of ammonia.
Answer:

  • Ammonia is a colourless gas with pungent odour.
  • It has freezing point of 198.4 K and boiling point of 239.7 K.
  • It is highly soluble in water.

Question 70.
What is liquor ammonia?
Answer:
The concentrated aqueous solution of ammonia (NH3) is called liquor ammonia.

Question 71.
Give reason: Ammonia has higher melting and boiling points.
Answer:

  • In solid and liquid state, NH3 molecules get associated together through hydrogen bonding.
  • As a result, extra amount of energy is required to break such intermolecular hydrogen bonds. Hence, ammonia has higher melting and boiling points.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 72.
Why is ammonia basic in aqueous solution?
Answer:
i. As ammonia is highly soluble in water, it readily forms OH ions in its aqueous solution.
\(\mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(a q)}^{-}\)
ii. Thus, due to the formation of OH ions, aqueous solution of ammonia is basic in nature.

Question 73.
How does the aqueous solution of ammonia react with the following salt solutions?
i. ZnSO4
ii. FeCl3
Answer:
Aqueous solution of ammonia precipitates out as hydroxides (or hydrated oxides) of metals solutions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 33

Question 74.
Write applications of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is used in

  • manufacture of fertilizers such as urea, diammonium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, ammonium sulphate etc.
  • manufacture of some inorganic compounds like nitric acid.
  • refrigerant (liq. ammonia).
  • laboratory reagent in qualitative and quantitative analysis (aq. solution of ammonia).

Question 75.
Give reactions involved in the formation of Nessler’s reagent.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 34

Question 76.
How does ammonia react with Nessler’s reagent?
Answer:
Ammonia react with Nessler’s reagent (an alkaline solution of K2HgI4) to form a brown precipitate (Millon’s base).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 35

Question 77.
Complete and write the balanced chemical equations for:
i. Ca2B6O11 + Na2CO3
ii. CoO + B2O3
iii. AgCl + NH3
iv. ZnSO4 + 2NH4OH →
v. a. 2KI + HgCl2
b. 2KI + HgI2
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 36

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 78.
Naina was preparing a compound in the laboratory. She added compound ‘A’ to (CaOH)2 solution. As a result of this, a compound ‘B’ was obtained which had a pungent smell. On adding Nessler’s reagent to the compound ‘B’, a brown precipitate of compound ‘C’ was obtained.
Write the chemical reactions involved and identify ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.
Answer:
i. When ammonium chloride is mixed with (CaOH)2 solution, ammonia is formed which has a pungent odour.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 37
ii. Ammonia react with Nessler’ s reagent (an alkaline solution of K2Hgl4) to form a brown precipitate (Millon’ s base).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 38

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The electronic configuration of boron family is ……………
(A) ns2 np2
(B) ns2 np5
(C) ns2 np6
(D) ns2 np1
Answer:
(D) ns2 np1

2. ………… has noble gas core plus 14 f-electrons and 10 d-electrons.
(A) Gallium
(B) Indium
(C) Thallium
(D) Boron
Answer:
(C) Thallium

3. The group 15 element having inner electronic configuration as of argon is …………..
(A) Phosphorus (Z = 15)
(B) Antimony (Z = 51)
(C) Arsenic (Z = 33)
(D) Nitrogen (Z = 7)
Answer:
(C) Arsenic (Z = 33)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

4. Which of the following is NOT a metalloid?
(A) B
(B) Sn
(C) Ge
(D) Sb
Answer:
(B) Sn

5. Among the group 13 elements, melting point is highest for …………..
(A) B
(B) Al
(C) Ga
(D) In
Answer:
(A) B

6. On moving down the group 14, the ionization enthalpy
(A) increases slightly from Si to Sn and decreases slightly from Sn to Pb
(B) increases throughout uniformly from Si to Pb
(C) decreases throughout uniformly from Si to Pb
(D) decreases slightly from Si to Sn and increases slightly from Sn to Pb
Answer:
(D) decreases slightly from Si to Sn and increases slightly from Sn to Pb

7. ………… is the most electronegative element of group 14.
(A) Carbon
(B) Silicon
(C) Germanium
(D) Tin
Answer:
(A) Carbon

8. The stability of +3 oxidation state in aqueous solution is in order ……………
(A) Al > Ga > In > Tl
(B) Tl > In > Ga > Al
(C) Al > Tl > Ga > In
(D) Tl > Al > Ga > In
Answer:
(A) Al > Ga > In > Tl

9. Group oxidation state of group 15 elements is ……………
(A) +4
(B) +1
(C) +3
(D) +5
Answer:
(D) +5

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

10. …………. cannot expand its octet due to absence of d orbital in its valence shell.
(A) Ga
(B) C
(C) As
(D) Ge
Answer:
(B) C

11. Which one of the following statements about boron and aluminium is INCORRECT?
(A) Both exhibit oxidation state of +3.
(B) Both form oxides of the formula M2O3.
(C) Both form trihalides, MX3.
(D) Both form amphoteric oxides.
Answer:
(D) Both form amphoteric oxides.

12. Which of the following is basic oxide?
(A) Bi2O3
(B) CO2
(C) B2O3
(D) SiO2
Answer:
(A) Bi2O3

13. The reaction of Al with H2O produces ……………
(A) Al2O3
(B) AlH3
(C) Al(OH)3
(D) Al2H6
Answer:
(C) Al(OH)3

14. Which of the following is a stable halide of nitrogen?
(A) NF3
(B) NCl5
(C) NF5
(D) NBr5
Answer:
(A) NF3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

15. Catenation is the ability of …………..
(A) atoms to form strong bonds with similar atoms
(B) elements to form giant molecules
(C) an element to form multiple bonds
(D) an element to form long chains of identical atoms
Answer:
(D) an element to form long chains of identical atoms

16. Among the group 13 elements, the property of allotropy is shown by ………………
(A) indium
(B) aluminium
(C) thallium
(D) boron
Answer:
(D) boron

17. Thermodynamically stable allotrope of carbon is …………..
(A) diamond
(B) graphite
(C) buckyball
(D) all of these
Answer:
(B) graphite

18. White phosphorus contains discrete …………… molecules.
(A) P5
(B) P4
(C) P6
(D) P52
Answer:
(B) P4

19. In white phosphorus, the P-P-P bond angle is ……………
(A) 60°
(B) 90°
(C) 109.5
(D) 120°
Answer:
(A) 60°

20. 3c-2e bonds are present in ………………
(A) NH3
(B) B2H6
(C) H3BO3
(D) SiCl4
Answer:
(B) B2H6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

21. Which of the following is borax?
(A) Na2B4O7.4H2O
(B) Na2B4O7.10H2O
(C) H3BO3
(D) NaBO2
Answer:
(B) Na2B4O7.10H2O

22. In Borax bead test, the coloured ions give characteristic coloured beads due to formation of …………….
(A) metal borates
(B) metal metaborates
(C) metal phosphates
(D) metal tetraborates
Answer:
(B) metal metaborates

23. The catalyst used in Haber process contains …………..
(A) nickel
(B) palladium
(C) iron
(D) platinum
Answer:
(C) iron

24. Which of the following is used as refrigerant?
(A) Nessler’s reagent
(B) Liq. ammonia
(C) Borax
(D) Diborane
Answer:
(B) Liq. ammonia

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 1.
Why is hydrogen studied separately even though it appears at the top of group 1?
Answer:
Even though hydrogen appears at the top of group 1 containing alkali metals, it is studied separately because many of its properties differ from that of the alkali metals.

Question 2.
Give reason: Hydrogen (H2) molecule is also referred to as dihydrogen.
Answer:

  • The nucleus of a hydrogen atom consists of one positively charged proton i.e., a nuclear charge of +1, and one extranuclear electron.
  • As this electron is indirect influence of nuclear attraction, hydrogen has a little tendency to lose this electron.
  • However, it can easily pair with the other electron forming a covalent bond.
  • Therefore, it exists in diatomic form as H2 molecule and hence, it is also referred to as dihydrogen.

Question 3.
Why does hydrogen occur in a diatomic form rather than in monoatomic form under normal
conditions?
Answer:

  • Hydrogen atom has only one electron in its valence shell having electronic configuration 1s1.
  • It can acquire stable configuration of helium by sharing this electron with another hydrogen atom.
  • Therefore, it shares its single electron with electron of the other H-atom to achieve stable inert gas configuration of He.
  • Thus, hydrogen readily forms diatomic molecule and exists as H2 rather than in monoatomic form.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 4.
Write a note on occurrence of hydrogen.
Answer:

  • In the free state hydrogen exists as dihydrogen gas.
  • Hydrogen is most abundant element in the universe and constitutes 70% of the total mass of the universe.
  • Hydrogen is also the principal element in the solar system.
  • On the earth, hydrogen is the tenth most abundant element on mass basis and the third most abundant element on atom basis.

Question 5.
State whether the following statements are TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
1. Electronic configuration of hydrogen is 1s1.
ii. H+ ion formed by loss of the electron from hydrogen atom exists freely.
iii. H+ is nothing but a proton.
iv. Metastable metallic hydrogen was discovered at Harvard university, USA, in January 2017.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Hydrogen atom does not exist freely and is always associated with other molecules i.e., H3O+.
iii. True
iv. True

Question 6.
Explain the laboratory methods for preparation of dihydrogen.
Answer:
Laboratory methods for preparation of dihydrogen:
i. By action of dilute HCl on zinc granules: Zinc granules on reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid (HCl) liberates hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 1

ii. By action of aqueous NaOH on zinc: Zinc on reaction with aqueous sodium hydroxide (NaOH) forms soluble sodium zincate and liberates hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 2

Question 7.
Describe the industrial method of preparation of dihydrogen by electrolysis of pure water.
Answer:
i. Pure water is a poor conductor of electricity. Therefore, a dilute aqueous solution of acid or alkali is used to prepare dihydrogen by electrolysis.
ii. For example, electrolysis of dilute aqueous solution of sulphuric acid yields two volumes of hydrogen at cathode and one volume of oxygen at anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 3

Question 8.
How is pure dihydrogen (> 99.5% purity) gas obtained from barium hydroxide?
Answer:
Electrolysis of warm aqueous solution of barium hydroxide using nickel electrodes yields pure dihydrogen (> 99.5% purity).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 9.
Explain the terms:
i. Syngas
ii. Water-gas shift reaction.
Answer:
i. Syngas:

  • Syngas is the mixture of CO and H2. It is also called ‘water-gas’.
  • It is used for the synthesis of CH3OH and many hydrocarbons, hence, the name syngas or ‘synthesis gas’.
  • Production of syngas is also the first stage of gasification of coal.

ii. Water-gas shift reaction:
The carbon monoxide in the water-gas is transformed into carbon dioxide by reacting with steam in presence of iron chromate as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 4
This reaction is called water-gas shift reaction.

Question 10.
Complete the following chemical reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 6

Question 11.
Enlist physical properties of dihydrogen.
Answer:
Physical properties of dihydrogen:

  • Dihydrogen is a colourless, tasteless and odourless gas.
  • It bums with a pale blue flame.
  • It is a nonpolar and water-insoluble gas.
  • It is lighter than air.

Question 12.
What is the action of dihydrogen on the following?
i. Metals
ii. Dioxygen
Answer:
i. Action of dihydrogen on metals:
a. Dihydrogen combines with all the reactive metals including alkali metals, calcium, strontium and barium at high temperature to form metal hydrides.
b. For example: Dihydrogen combines with metallic sodium at high temperature to yield sodium hydride.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 7

ii. Action of dihydrogen on dioxygen: Dihydrogen reacts with dioxygen in the presence of catalyst or by heating to form water. This reaction is highly exothermic.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 8

Question 13.
Explain the effect of high bond dissociation energy of H-H bond on chemical reactivity of dihydrogen?
Answer:

  • The bond dissociation energy of H-H bond is very high i.e, 436 kJ mol-1. and thus, it does not react easily under normal conditions.
  • However, at high temperature or in the presence of catalysts, hydrogen combines with many metals and non-metals to form corresponding hydrides and halides respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 14.
What happens when dihydrogen reacts with halogens?
Answer:
i. Dihydrogen reacts with halogens (X2) to give the corresponding hydrogen halides (HX).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 9
ii. Dihydrogen reacts with fluorine to form hydrogen fluoride even at very low temperature (-250°C) in dark.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 10
iii. However, the reaction with iodine requires a catalyst as the vigour of reaction of dihydrogen decreases with increasing atomic number of halogen.

Question 15.
Explain the reducing nature of hydrogen with chemical reactions.
Answer:
Dihydrogen reduces oxides and ions of some metals that are less reactive than iron, to the corresponding number of halogen metals at moderate temperature.
e.g.
i. CuO(s) + H2(g) → Cu(s) + H2O(l)
ii. Fe3O4(s) + 4H2(g) → 3Fe(s) + 4H2O(s)
iii. Pd2+(aq) + H2(g) → Pd(s) + 2H+(aq)

Question 16.
What is hydrogenation?
Answer:
Hydrogenation is the reaction in which hydrogen gas reacts with unsaturated organic compounds in the presence of a catalyst to form hydrogenated (saturated) compounds.

Question 17.
How does dihydrogen react with various organic compounds to give useful, commercially important products?
Answer:
i. Hydrogenation of unsaturated organic compounds:
e.g. Hydrogenation of unsaturated organic compounds such as vegetable oil using nickel catalyst gives saturated organic compounds such as solid edible fats like vanaspati ghee.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 11
ii. Hydroformylation of olefins and subsequent reduction of aldehyde to form alcohol:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 12

Question 18.
Explain hydroformylation reaction of olefins using a suitable example.
Answer:
Hydroformylation of olefins gives aldehydes which on further reduction gives alcohols.
e.g. i. Hydroformylation of propene gives butyraldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 13

ii. Butyraldehyde further undergoes reduction to give n-butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 14

Question 19.
What are the uses of dihydrogen?
Answer:
Dihydrogen is used in

  • the production of ammonia.
  • the formation of vanaspati ghee by catalytic hydrogenation of oils.
  • rocket fuel (mixture of liquid hydrogen and liquid oxygen).
  • the preparation of important organic compounds like methanol in bulk quantity.
    \(2 \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{CO}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{\text { Cobaltcatalyst }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{OH}_{(l)}\)
  • the preparation of hydrogen chloride (HCl) and metal hydrides.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 20.
Justify the placement of hydrogen in the group of alkali metals with the help of reaction with halogens.
Answer:
i. Hydrogen on reaction with halogens (X2) give compounds with general formula HX.
e.g. H2 + Cl2 → 2HCl
ii. Similarly, alkali metals (M) on reaction with halogens (X2) give compounds with general formula MX.
e.g. 2Na + Cl2 → 2NaCl
iii. Thus, H2 and alkali metals are monovalent elements and more electropositive than halogens. This similarity justifies the position of hydrogen in the group 1.

Question 21.
What do you mean by s-block elements? Where are they placed in the modern periodic table?
Answer:

  • Elements of group 1 and group 2 in which the last electron enters into ‘ns’ subshell are s-block elements.
  • The s-block elements are placed on the extreme left in the modem periodic table.

Question 22.
Name elements of group 1 and group 2.
Answer:

  • Group 1 of the periodic table consists of the elements: hydrogen, lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium and francium.
  • Group 2 of the periodic table consists of elements: beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium and radium.

Question 23.
What are alkali metals?
Answer:
The elements of group 1 except hydrogen are collectively called alkali metals.

Question 24.
What are alkaline earth metals?
Answer:
The elements of group 2 are collectively called alkaline earth metals because they occur as minerals in rocks.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 25.
Write a note on occurrence of group 1 and group 2 elements:
Answer:
i. Group 1 (alkali metals):

  • Two elements of group 1 i.e., sodium and potassium are the sixth and seventh most abundant elements present in the earth’s crust.
  • However, francium does not occur appreciably in nature because it is radioactive and has short half-life period.

ii. Group 2 (alkaline earth metals):

  • The elements magnesium and calcium are found abundantly in earth’s crust.
  • Radium is radioactive and is not easy to find.

Question 26.
Give reasons: s-block elements are never found in free state in nature.
Answer:

  • s-Block elements contain group 1 and group 2 elements.
  • The general outer electronic configuration of the group 1 elements is ns1 and that of the group 2 elements is ns2.
  • The loosely held s-electrons in the valence shell of these elements can be easily removed to form metal ions.
  • As a result, they are highly reactive in nature and always found in combined state.

Hence, s-block elements are never found in free state in nature.

Note: Electronic configurations of group 1 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 15

Note: Electronic configurations of group 2 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 16

Question 27.
Describe the physical properties of alkali and alkaline earth metals.
Answer:

  • All the alkali and alkaline earth metals are silvery white in appearance.
  • Due to their large atomic size they have low density.
  • Both alkali and alkaline earth metals are soft, however, alkaline earth metals are harder than the alkali metals.
  • Alkali metals are the most electropositive elements while alkaline earth metals are comparatively less electropositive than alkali metals.

Question 28.
Explain why do the group 1 and group 2 elements form diamagnetic and colourless compounds.
Answer:

  • Unipositive ions of all the elements of group 1 have inert gas configuration and hence, they have no unpaired electron.
  • Similarly, group 2 elements can lose their two valence shell electrons and form divalent ions that have inert gas configuration with no unpaired electrons.

Hence, due to the absence of unpaired electrons, compounds formed by group 1 and group 2 elements are diamagnetic and colourless.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 29.
Why do the properties of lithium and beryllium differ from the rest of the group 1 and group 2 elements?
Answer:
The properties of lithium and beryllium differ from the rest of the group 1 and group 2 elements due to their extremely small size and comparatively high electronegativity.

Question 30.
Complete the following table.

Group 1 elementsGroup 2 elements
……………….Alkaline earth metals
Outer electronic configuration: ……………….Outer electronic configuration: ns2
Monovalent positive ions……………….

Answer:

Group 1 elementsGroup 2 elements
Alkali metalsAlkaline earth metals
Outer electronic configuration: ns1Outer electronic configuration: ns2
Monovalent positive ionsDivalent positive ions

Question 31.
State the trends in the following properties of group 1 and group 2 elements down a group.
i. Atomic radii
ii. Ionic radii
iii. Ionization enthalpy
iv. Electronegativity
v. Standard reduction potential
Answer:

Sr. no.PropertyDown a group
i.Atomic radiiIncreases
ii.Ionic radiiIncreases
iii.Ionization enthalpyDecreases
iv.ElectronegativityDecreases
V.Standard reduction potentialDecreases

Question 32.
Give reasons: Potassium superoxide is used in breathing equipment used for mountaineers and in submarines and space.
Answer:
i. Potassium superoxide has ability to absorb carbon dioxide and give out oxygen at the same time.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 17
ii. Due to this property of KO2, it is used in breathing equipment used for mountaineers and in submarines and space.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 33.
What is the oxidation state of:
i. Na in Na2O2?
ii. K in KO2?
Answer:
i. Oxidation state of Na in sodium peroxide (Na2O2):
Let x be the oxidation state of Na in Na2O2.
The net charge on peroxide ion \(\left(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\right)\) is -2.
Since any compound is electrically neutral, it has an overall charge as zero.
∴ 2x + (-2) = 0
∴ x = + 1
∴ Oxidation state of Na in Na2O2 is +1.

ii. Oxidation state of K in potassium dioxide/potassium superoxide (KO2):
Let x be the oxidation state of K in KO2
The net charge on superoxide ion \(\left(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\right)\) is -1.
Since any compound is electrically neutral, it has an overall charge as zero.
∴ x + (-1) = 0
x = + 1
∴ Oxidation state of K in KO2 is + 1.
[Note: Oxidation state of alkali metal is always +1.]

Question 34.
Magnesium strip slowly tarnishes on keeping in air but metallic calcium is readily attacked by air. Explain.
Answer:

  • The reactivity of group 2 metals increases with increasing atomic radius and lowering of ionization enthalpy
    down the groups.
  • Thus, calcium has lower ionization enthalpy. Therefore, calcium is more reactive than magnesium.
  • Hence, Mg reacts slowly with air forming a thin film of oxide resulting into tarnishing, whereas Ca reacts readily at room temperature with oxygen and nitrogen in the air.

Question 35.
What happens when alkali metals react with hydrogen and halogens?
Answer:
i. Reaction with hydrogen: Alkali metals react with hydrogen at high temperature to form the Corresponding metal hydrides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 18

ii. Reaction with halogens: All the alkali metals react vigorously with halogens to produce their ionic halide salts.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 19
[Note: As we move down the group, the reactivity of alkali metals towards hydrogen and halogens decreases in the following order: Li > Na > K > Rb > Cs.]

Question 36.
NaCl is an ionic compound but LiCl has some covalent character, explain.
Answer:

  • Li+ ion has very small size and therefore, the charge density on Li+ is high.
  • Due to this, it has high tendency to distort the electron cloud around the negatively charged chloride ion (Cl) which is larger in size.
  • This results in partial covalent character of the LiCl bond.
  • Na+ ion cannot distort the electron cloud of Cl due to the bigger size of Na+ compared to Li+.

Hence, NaCl is an ionic compound but LiCl has some covalent character.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 37.
Why is lithium iodide most covalent in nature among alkali halides?
Answer:

  • Among the alkali metal ions, Li+ ion is the smallest cation while among halides, anion I has the largest size.
  • Thus, electron cloud around I ion is easily distorted by Li+ ion leading to polarisation of anion and covalency.
  • Also, the difference in electronegativities of Li and I is small.

Hence, lithium iodide is most covalent in nature among alkali halides.

Question 38.
Explain the reactivity of alkaline earth metals towards:
i. Water
ii. Hydrogen
iii. Halogens
Answer:
i. Reaction with water:
a. The elements of group 2 (alkaline earth metals) react with water to form metal hydroxide and evolve hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 20
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 21

b. Be does not react with water at all, Mg reacts with boiling water while Ca, Sr, Ba react vigorously even with cold water.

ii. Reaction with hydrogen: All alkaline earth metals except beryllium (Be), when heated with hydrogen form MH2 type hydrides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 22

iii. Reaction with halogens: All the alkaline earth metals combine with halogens at high temperature to form their corresponding halides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 23
[Note: As we move down the group, the chemical reactivity of alkaline earth metals increases in the order Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba.]

Question 39.
Complete the following chemical equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 24
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 25

Question 40.
Describe the reducing nature of group 1 and group 2 elements.
Answer:
The reducing power of an element is measured in terms of standard electrode potential (E0) corresponding to the following transformation i.e, tendency to lose electron.
\(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{s})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-}\)
i. Reducing nature of group 1 elements:

  • All the alkali metals have high negative values of E0 which indicates that they have strong reducing nature and hence, they can be used as strong reducing agents.
  • Lithium is the most powerful and sodium is the least powerful reducing agent in the group.

ii. Reducing nature of group 2 elements:

  • All the alkaline earth metals have high negative values of stanard reduction potential (E0) and are strong reducing agents.
  • However, reducing power of alkaline earth metals is less than that of alkali metals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 41.
Explain the nature of the solution formed by group 1 and group 2 metals in liquid ammonia.
Answer:
i. The alkali metals are soluble in liquid ammonia and thus, they dissolve in it giving deep blue solutions which are conducting in nature.
M + (x + y)NH3 → [M(NH3)x]+ + [e(NH3)y]
ii. The blue colour of the solution is due to the ammoniated electron.
iii. These solutions are paramagnetic and on standing slowly liberate hydrogen resulting in the formation of amide.
\(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{am})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-}+\mathrm{NH}_{3(l)} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MNH}_{2(\mathrm{am})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
(where ‘am’ denotes solution in ammonia.)
iv. As a result, the blue colour of the solution changes to bronze and the solution becomes diamagnetic.
v. Similarly, the alkaline earth metals are also soluble in liquid ammonia which give deep blue-black coloured solutions.
M + (x + 2y) NH3 → [M(NH3)x]2+ + 2[e(NH3)y]

Question 42.
Explain: Diagonal relationship in group 1 and group 2.
Answer:

  • Elements belonging to the same group are expected to exhibit similarity and gradation in their properties.
  • However, first alkali metal, lithium, and the first alkaline earth metal, beryllium, do not fulfil this expectation.
  • Thus, lithium shows many differences when compared with the remaining alkali metals and shows similarity with magnesium, the second alkaline earth metal.
  • Similarly, beryllium shows many differences with remaining alkaline earth metals and shows similarity with aluminium, the second element of the next main group i.e., group 13.
  • The relative placement of these elements with similar properties in the periodic table is across a diagonal and thus, it is called diagonal relationship.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 26

Question 43.
Explain diagonal relationship between lithium and magnesium with respect to:
i. Property of chlorides
ii. Thermal decomposition of their carbonates
Answer:
Both lithium and magnesium show similarities in various physical and chemical properties as follows:
i. Property of chlorides: Chlorides of lithium (LiCl) and magnesium (MgCl2) are deliquescent as group 2 elements form deliquescent chlorides. These chlorides form corresponding hydrates (LiCl.2H2O and MgCl2.8H2O) on crystallization from their aqueous solutions.

ii. Thermal decomposition of carbonates: Heating of lithium carbonate and magnesium carbonate results in their easy decomposition to form corresponding oxides and carbon dioxide (CO2).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 27

Question 44.
Mention the properties of lithium that differ from rest of the alkali group metals.
Answer:

  • Reaction with nitrogen: Only lithium from alkali group metals reacts with nitrogen present in the air on heating, while rest of the members do not react with nitrogen.
  • Thermal decomposition of carbonates: Alkali metal carbonates show no reaction on heating, while lithium carbonate decomposes on heating to form the corresponding oxide and liberate carbon dioxide gas.
  • Property of chlorides: Lithium (LiCl) is deliquescent and forms corresponding hydrate (LiCl.2H2O). Other alkali chlorides are not deliquescent and do not form hydrates.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 45.
Write a note on the diagonal relationship between Be and Al.
OR
What are the similarities between beryllium and aluminium?
Answer:
i. Beryllium is placed in the group 2 and period 2 of the modem periodic table. It resembles aluminium which is placed in group 13 and period 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 28
ii. Due to nearly same charge to radius ratio of their ions, beryllium (\(\frac {2}{31}\) = 0.065) and aluminium (\(\frac {3}{53.55}\) = 0.056) exhibit diagonal relationship.
iii. Due to diagonal relationship, Be and Al show following similarities in their properties:
a. Nature of bonding: Both Be and Al have tendency to form covalent chlorides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 29
b. Lewis acids: BeCl2 and AlCl3 act as Lewis acids.
c. Solubility in organic solvents: BeCl2 and AlCl3 are soluble in organic solvents.
d. Nature of oxide: Both Be and Al form amphoteric oxides.

Question 46.
Explain the amphoteric nature of aluminium oxide with the help of reactions.
Answer:
Al2O3 (magnesium oxide) reacts with both acid (HCl) as well as base (NaOH) to form the corresponding products and therefore, it is amphoteric in nature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 30

Question 47.
Beryllium shows many differences with other alkaline earth metals. Discuss these differences with respect to chlorides and oxides.
Answer:
1. Properties of chlorides: Beryllium chloride is covalent whereas chlorides formed by other alkaline earth metals are ionic in nature. Beryllium chloride is a strong Lewis acid whereas chlorides formed by other alkaline earth metals are not Lewis acids. Beryllium chloride is soluble in organic solvents whereas chlorides formed by other alkaline earth metals are insoluble in organic solvents.

2. Properties of oxide: Beryllium oxide is amphoteric whereas oxides formed by other alkaline earth metals are basic in nature.

Question 48.
Complete the following chemical equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 31
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 32

Question 49.
Write the uses of
i. alkali metals
ii. alkaline earth metals
Answer:
i. Uses of alkali metals:

  • Lithium metal is used in long-life batteries used in digital watches, calculators and computers.
  • Liquid sodium is used for heat transfer in nuclear power stations.
  • Potassium chloride is used as a fertilizer.
  • Potassium is used in manufacturing potassium superoxide (KO2) for oxygen generation. It is good absorbent of carbon dioxide.
  • Caesium is used in photoelectric cells.

ii. Uses of alkaline earth metals:

  • Beryllium is used as a moderator in nuclear reactors.
  • Alloy of magnesium and aluminium is widely used as structural material and in aircrafts.
  • Calcium ions are important ingredient in biological system, essential for healthy growth of bones and teeth.
  • Barium sulphate is used in medicine as barium meal for intestinal X-ray.
  • Radium is used in radiotherapy for cancer treatment.

Question 50.
State the importance of sodium and potassium in biological system.
Answer:

  • Sodium ion is present as the largest supply in all extracellular fluids. These fluids provide medium for transporting nutrients to the cells.
  • The concentration of sodium ion in extracellular fluid regulates the flow of water across the membrane.
  • Sodium ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals.
  • Potassium ions are the most abundant ions within the cells. They are required for maximum efficiency in the synthesis of proteins and also in oxidation of glucose.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 51.
How are the following ions of group 2 elements biologically important?
i. Mg2+
ii. Ca2+
Answer:
i. Magnesium ion (Mg2+)

  • Mg2+ ions are important part of chlorophyll in green plants.
  • They play an important role in the breakage of glucose and fat molecules, synthesis of proteins with enzymes and regulation of cholesterol level.

ii. Calcium ion (Ca2+)

  • Ca2+ ions are important for bones and teeth in the form of apatite [Ca3(PO4)2].
  • They play an important role in blood clotting.
  • Ca2+ ions are required for contraction and stretching of muscles.
  • They are also required to maintain the regular beating of heart.

Question 52.
Explain Solvay process for manufacture of sodium carbonate.
Answer:
Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) is commercially prepared by Solvay process. Preparation of sodium carbonate by Solvay process involves two stages.
i. In the first stage of Solvay process, carbon dioxide gas is bubbled through a concentrated solution of NaCl which is saturated with NH3. This results in the formation of ammonium bicarbonate. Crystals of sodium bicarbonate separate as a result of the following reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 34
ii. Ammonium bicarbonate and sodium chloride undergoes double decomposition reaction to form sodium bicarbonate. As sodium bicarbonate has low solubility, it precipitates out in the form of crystals.
iii. In the second stage, the separated crystals of sodium bicarbonate are heated to obtain sodium carbonate (Na2CO3).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 35
iv. NH4Cl obtained in this process is treated with slaked lime, Ca(OH)2, to recover NH3 while CaCl2 is obtained as a byproduct.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 36

Question 53.
How is ammonia recovered in Solvay process? Name the important by-product obtained in the step?
Answer:
i. Ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) is obtained during the Solvay process which is used for the preparation of Na2CO3. When NH4Cl is treated with slaked lime, Ca(OH)2, ammonia is recovered.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 37
ii. Calcium chloride is obtained as an important by-product in this reaction.

Question 54.
Why potassium carbonate cannot be obtained by Solvay process?
Answer:
Potassium hydrogen carbonate (KHCO3) is highly water soluble and cannot be precipitated out by reacting with potassium choride (KCl) and hence, potassium carbonate (K2CO3) cannot be obtained by Solvay process.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 55.
What is the action of heat on crystalline sodium carbonate (washing soda)?
Answer:
i. On heating washing soda (decahydrate of sodium carbonate) up to 373 K, it loses water molecules to form corresponding monohydrate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 38
ii. On heating above 373 K, monohydrate further loses water and changes into white anhydrous powder called soda ash.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 39

Question 56.
Give reason: Aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is alkaline in nature.
Answer:
i. Sodium carbonate is hydrolysed by water as shown in the reaction given below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 40
ii. One of the products formed as a result of hydrolysis is NaOH which is a strong base.
Hence, aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is alkaline in nature due to formation of strong base (NaOH).

Question 57.
What are the uses of sodium carbonate?
Answer:
Uses of sodium carbonate:

  • Due to its alkaline properties, sodium carbonate has an emulsifying effect on grease and dirt and hence, it is used as a cleaning material.
  • It is used to make hard water soft as it precipitates out the soluble calcium and magnesium salts in hard water as carbonates.
    For example: Ca(HCO3)2(aq) + Na2CO3(aq) → CaCO3(s) + 2NaHCO3(aq)
  • It is used for commercial production of soap and caustic soda.
  • Sodium carbonate is used as an important laboratory reagent.

Question 58.
Describe the preparation of sodium hydroxide by Castner-Kellner process.
OR
Explain the electrolysis method for preparation of sodium hydroxide.
Answer:
i. Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda) is commercially obtained by the electrolysis of aqueous sodium chloride solution (brine) in Castner-Kellner cell (mercury cathode cell).
ii. In Castner-Kellner cell, mercury is used as cathode, carbon rod as anode and brine solution is used as electrolyte which is subjected to electrolysis.

iii. During electrolysis, the following reactions take place:
a. At cathode: Sodium ions get reduced to metallic sodium, which combines with mercury to form sodium amalgam (Na-Hg).
\(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \stackrel{\mathrm{Hg}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Na} \text {-amalgam }\)
b. At anode: Chloride ions are oxidized and thus, chlorine gas is evolved.
\(\mathrm{Cl}^{-} \longrightarrow \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2}+\mathrm{e}^{-}\)

iv. Sodium amalgam is then treated with water to obtain sodium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 41

Question 59.
Enlist the physical properties of sodium hydroxide.
Answer:
Physical properties of sodium hydroxide:

  • Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) is a white deliquescent solid.
  • It has a melting point of 591 K.
  • It is highly water soluble and gives a strongly alkaline solution.
  • The surface of sodium hydroxide solution absorbs atmospheric CO2 to form Na2CO3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 60.
Explain how sodium hydroxide is commercially important.
Answer:
Commercial uses of sodium hydroxide:

  • Sodium hydroxide is used in purification of bauxite (the aluminium ore).
  • It is used in commercial production of soap, paper, artificial silk and many chemicals.
  • It is used for mercerising cotton fabrics.
  • It is used in petroleum refining.
  • It is also used as an important laboratory reagent.

Question 61.
Calcium carbonate occurs naturally in which forms?
Answer:
Calcium carbonate (CaCO3) occur naturally in the form of chalk, limestone and marble.

Question 62.
Describe the various methods used for preparation of calcium carbonate.
Answer:
i. a. Calcium carbonate is prepared by passing carbon dioxide through solution of calcium hydroxide (slaked lime). This results in the formation of water insoluble solid calcium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 42
b. However, excess carbon dioxide transforms the precipitate of CaCO3 into water-soluble calcium bicarbonate and therefore, it has to be avoided.

ii. Calcium carbonate can also be prepared by adding solution of calcium chloride to a solution of sodium carbonate. This results in the formation of calcium carbonate as precipitate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 43

Question 63.
Why controlled addition of CO2 is essential during preparation of calcium carbonate from slaked lime?
Answer:
When excess of CO2 is present, it leads to the formation of water-soluble calcium bicarbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 44
Hence, while preparing calcium carbonate from slaked lime, controlled addition of CO2 is essential.

Question 64.
Mention some physical properties of calcium carbonate.
Answer:

  • Calcium carbonate is soft, light, white powder.
  • It is practically insoluble in water.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 65.
What happens when:
i. calcium carbonate is thermally decomposed?
ii. calcium carbonate reacts with dilute mineral acids?
Answer:
i. When calcium carbonate is heated to 1200 K, it decomposes into calcium oxide along with evolution of carbon dioxide gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 45

ii. Calcium carbonate reacts with dilute mineral acids such as HCl and H2SO4 to give the corresponding calcium salt and liberate carbon dioxide gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 46

Question 66.
Give the important uses of calcium carbonate.
Answer:

  • Calcium carbonate in the form of marble is used as building material.
  • It is used in the manufacture of quicklime (CaO) which is the major ingredient of cement.
  • A mixture of CaCO3 and MgCO3 is used as flux in the extraction of metals from their ores.
  • It is required for the manufacture of high-quality paper.
  • It is an important ingredient in toothpaste, chewing gum, dietary supplements of calcium and filler in cosmetics.

Question 67.
Match the pairs.

Column AColumn B
i.Castner-Kellner cella.Na2CO
ii.Slaked limeb.CaCO3
iii.Solvay processc.NaOH
iv.Limestoned.Ca(OH)2

Ans:
i – c,
ii – d,
iii – a,
iv – b

Question 68.
How is hydrogen peroxide prepared by the action of cold dilute H2SO4 on
i. Hydrated barium peroxide?
ii. sodium peroxide (Merck process)?
Answer:
Preparation of hydrogen peroxide by the action of cold dilute H2SO4 on
i. hydrated barium peroxide: When hydrated barium peroxide is treated with ice-cold dilute sulphuric acid, the precipitate of barium sulphate is obtained. This precipitate is then filtered off to get hydrogen peroxide solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 47

ii. Sodium peroxide (Merck process): When small quantity of sodium peroxide is added to ice-cold solution of dilute sulphuric acid with stirring, it gives hydrogen peroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 48

Question 69.
Explain how hydrogen peroxide can be obtained by electrolysis method.
Answer:
i. H2O2 can be manufactured by electrolysis of 50% H2SO4. In this method, 50% solution of H2SO4 is subjected to an electrolytic oxidation to form peroxydisuiphuric acid at anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 49
ii. On hydrolysis, peroxy sulphuric yields hydrogen peroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 50
iii. This method can be used for the laboratory preparation of D2O2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 70.
Describe the industrial method for preparation of hydrogen peroxide.
OR
How is hydrogen peroxide obtained from 2-ethylanthraquinol?
Answer:
i. Industrially hydrogen peroxide is prepared by air-oxidation of 2-ethylanthraquinol.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 51
ii. 2-Ethylanthraquinone is reduced back to 2-ethylanthraquinol by catalytic hydrogenation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 52

Question 71.
What are the physical properties of hydrogen peroxide?
Answer:

  • Pure H2O2 is a very pale blue coloured liquid.
  • Its boiling point is 272.4 K.
  • H2O2 is miscible in water and forms a hydrate (H2O2. H2O).

Question 72.
How is strength of H2O2 solution expressed?
Answer:

  • Strength of aqueous solution of H2O2 is expressed in ‘volume’ units i.e., volume strength.
  • The commercially marketed 30% (by mass) solution of H2O2 has volume strength of 100 volume.
  • It means that 1 mL of 30% solution of H2O2 will give 100 mL oxygen at STP.

Thus, Volume strength refers to the volume of oxygen (O2) in litres at STP obtained by decomposition of 1 litre of the sample.

Question 73.
Write reactions depicting oxidising and reducing action of hydrogen peroxide in acidic medium.
Answer:
H2O2 acts as a mild oxidising as well as reducing agent.
i. Oxidising action of H2O2 in acidic medium.
\(2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

ii. Reducing action of H2O2 in acidic medium.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}+6 \mathrm{H}^{+}+5 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}+8 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}+5 \mathrm{O}_{2}\)

Question 74.
Enlist uses of hydrogen peroxide.
Answer:

  • Hydrogen peroxide is used as mouthwash, germicide and mild antiseptic.
  • It is used as a preservative for milk and wine.
  • It is used as a bleaching agent for soft materials, due to its mild oxidising property.
  • Due to its reducing property, is used as an antichlor to remove excess chlorine from fabrics which have been bleached by chlorine.
  • Nowadays it is used in environmental chemistry for pollution control and restoration of aerobic condition of sewage water.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 75.
Describe preparation and properties of lithium aluminium hydride (LAH).
Answer:
i. Preparation: Lithium hydride when treated with aluminium chloride, gives lithium aluminium hydride, (LiAlH4).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 53

ii. Properties:

  • Lithium aluminium hydride is a colourless solid.
  • It reacts violently with water and even with atmospheric moisture.

Question 76.
How is lithium aluminium hydride (LAH) useful in organic synthesis?
Answer:
i. LAH is a source of hydride (H) and therefore, it is used as a reducing agent in organic synthesis.
For example:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 54

ii. It is useful in the preparation of PH3 (phosphine).
4PCl3 + 3LiAlH4 → 4PH2 + AlCl3 + LiCl

Question 77.
Complete the following reactions by mentioning the reagent/reaction conditions under which these reactions are carried out.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 55
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 56

Question 78.
Calculate % (by mass) of a H2O2 solution which is 45.4 volume.
Answer:
Given: 45.4 volume H2O2 solution
To find: % (by mass) of H2O2
Formula: Percentage (%) by mass = \(\frac{\text { Mass of solute }}{\text { Mass of solution }} \times 100\)
calculation: 45.4 volume H2O2 solution means 1 L of this solution will liberate 45.4 L of O2 at STP.
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) decomposes as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 57
Ans: % (by mass) of H2O2 in 45.4 volume H2O2 solution is 13.6%.

Question 79.
Calculate the strength (g/L) of 20 volume solution of hydrogen peroxide.
Solution:
Given: 20 volume H2O2 solution
To find: Strength of H2O2 (g/L)
Formula: 20 volume H2O2 solution means that 1 L of this solution will liberate 20 L of oxygen at S.T.P. Let us calculate the amount of H2O2 (in grams) which gives 20 L of oxygen at S.T.P. This amount will be present in 1 L of 20 volume solution of H2O2.
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) decomposes as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 58
22.7 L of O2 at S.T.P. is produced from H2O2 = 68 g
20 L of O2 at S.T.P. is produced from H2O2 = \(\frac {68}{22.7}\) × 20 = 59.912g = 59.912 g/litre
Ans: Strength of H2O2 in 20 volume H2O2 solution is 59.912 g/L.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 80.
Calculate the volume strength of a 5% solution of hydrogen peroxide.
Solution:
Given: 5% solution of H2O2
To find: Volume strength of H2O2 solution
Calculation: 100 mL of solution contains 5 g of H2O2
1000 mL of solution will contain \(\frac {5}{100}\) × 1000 = 50 g of H2O2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 59
68 g of H2O2 will give O2 at S.T.P. = 22.7 L
50 g of H2O2 is present in 1000 mL of H2O2 or 1 L of H2O2
50 g of H2O2 will give O2 at S.T.P. = \(\frac {22.7}{68}\) × 50 = 16.691 L
∴ 1 L of H2O2 gives O2 at S.T.P. = 16.691 L
∴ Strength of H2O2 = 16.691 volume
Ans: The given 5% H2O2 solution is equivalent to 16.691 volume solution of hydrogen peroxide.

Question 81.
Naina is a school going kid. Every morning her mother makes her drink a glass of milk. When she asked her mother that why she has to drink a glass of milk daily, her mother told her that it is beneficial in maintaining healthy bones and teeth. Regular consumption of milk is recommended because it is a rich source of calcium.
i. In which form is calcium important for bones and teeth?
ii. Calcium belongs to which family in the modern periodic table?
iii. Write its electronic configuration.
iv. Calcium contain how many valence electrons?
v. Give any two-biological importance of calcium.
Answer:
i. Calcium is important for bones and teeth in the form of apatite [Ca(PO4)2].
ii. It belongs to the family of alkaline earth metals in the modem periodic table.
iii. Electronic configuration of 20Ca is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2.
iv. Calcium contains two valence electrons as it has two electrons in its outermost shell (4s).

v. Calcium ion (Ca2+)

  • Ca2+ ions are important for bones and teeth in the fonn of apatite [Ca3(PO4)2].
  • They play an important role in blood clotting.
  • Ca2+ ions are required for contraction and stretching of muscles.
  • They are also required to maintain the regular beating of heart.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Of all the elements present in the periodic table, ………… has the simplest atomic structure.
(A) lithium
(B) beryllium
(C) hydrogen
(D) helium
Answer:
(C) hydrogen

2. Electronic configuration of hydrogen is similar to that of ……………
(A) transition elements
(B) inert gases
(C) alkaline earth metals
(D) alkali metals
Answer:
(D) alkali metals

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

3. Isotopes are atoms of the same element having different ………….. number.
(A) neutron
(B) proton
(C) electron
(D) Both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(A) neutron

4. Tritium, \(\left({ }_{1}^{3} \mathrm{H}\right)\) ……………
(A) is an isotope of hydrogen
(B) contains one electron, one proton and two neutrons
(C) is a beta particle emitter
(D) all of these
Answer:
(D) all of these

5. In the electrolysis of acidified water using, ………….. is liberated at the anode.
(A) dihydrogen
(B) sulphate ions
(C) oxygen
(D) chloride ions
Answer:
(C) oxygen

6. Water gas is a mixture of ………….
(A) CO + H2
(B) CO2 + H2
(C) O2 + H2
(D) CO + O2
Answer:
(A) CO + H2

7. During production of dihydrogen by water-gas shift reaction, which of the following is present as an impurity?
(A) Carbon monoxide
(B) Carbon dioxide
(C) Calcium carbonate
(D) Calcium oxide
Answer:
(B) Carbon dioxide

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

8. Solution is used to remove carbon dioxide present in the mixture along with dihydrogen.
(A) Sodium hydroxide
(B) Hydrochloric acid
(C) Magnesium chloride
(D) Sodium arsenite
Answer:
(D) Sodium arsenite

9. The reaction between dihydrogen and …………… is highly exothermic.
(A) halogens
(B) dioxygen
(C) dinitrogen
(D) metals
Answer:
(B) dioxygen

10. The elements of group 1 and group 2 belong to which block of the modem periodic table?
(A) d-block
(B) s-block
(C) p-block
(D) f-block
Answer:
(B) s-block

11. Which of the following is NOT an alkaline earth metal?
(A) Beryllium
(B) Barium
(C) Calcium
(D) Caesium
Answer:
(D) Caesium

12. The common oxidation state for alkali metals is …………….
(A) +2
(B) +1
(C) +3
(D) +4
Answer:
(B) +1

13. All alkaline earth metals have ………….. valence electrons in the outermost orbit.
(A) one
(B) two
(C) three
(D) four
Answer:
(B) two

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

14. Electronic configuration of potassium with respect to nearest noble gases is …………..
(A) [He]2s1
(B) [Ne]3s1
(C) [Ar]4s1
(D) [Kr]5s1
Answer:
(C) [Ar]4s1

15. Which of the following is radioactive alkali metal?
(A) Rubidium
(B) Caesium
(C) Francium
(D) Beryllium
Answer:
(C) Francium

16. Which of the following element is rarest amongst s-block elements?
(A) Strontium
(B) Barium
(C) Radium
(D) Calcium
Answer:
(C) Radium

17. Which of the following is FALSE?
(A) Alkali metals readily loose electron to form monovalent M+ ions.
(B) In a group, from Li to Cs, atomic and ionic radii increase with atomic number.
(C) The monovalent ions of alkali metals are larger in size than the parent atoms.
(D) Ionization enthalpies decrease down the group from Li to Cs.
Answer:
(C) The monovalent ions of alkali metals are larger in size than the parent atoms.

18. The first ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are …………. than those of the corresponding alkali metals.
(A) higher
(B) lower
(C) same
(D) none of these
Answer:
(A) higher

19. Which of the following alkaline earth metal does NOT react with water?
(A) Sr
(B) Mg
(C) Ca
(D) Be
Answer:
(D) Be

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

20. Oxides and hydroxides of alkaline earth metals except beryllium are ………….. in nature.
(A) acidic
(B) basic
(C) amphoteric
(D) neutral
Answer:
(B) basic

21. ………… is an excellent absorbent of carbon dioxide.
(A) KO2
(B) KCl
(C) KOH
(D) KHCO3
Answer:
(A) KO2

22. Lithium shows diagonal relationship with ……………
(A) beryllium
(B) magnesium
(C) calcium
(D) boron
Answer:
(B) magnesium

23. The diagonal relationship between Li and Mg is due to the similarity in ……………
(A) ionic sizes
(B) electronegativity value
(C) polarizing power
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(D) all of the above

24. The alkali metal that reacts with nitrogen directly to form nitride is ……………
(A) Li
(B) Na
(C) K
(D) Rb
Answer:
(A) Li

25. In the Solvay process, the chief products are ……………
(A) CaCO3 and Ca(HCO3)2
(B) Na2CO3 and NaHCO3
(C) Na2SO4 and NaHSO4
(D) CaCl2 and Ca(NO3)2
Answer:
(B) Na2CO3 and NaHCO3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

26. In Castner-Kellner process for preparation of sodium hydroxide, ………….. is subjected to electrolysis.
(A) NaCl
(B) NaOH
(C) Na2O
(D) Na2CO3
Answer:
(A) NaCl

27. Which of the following method of preparation of H2O2 is known as Merck’s method?
(A) BaO2.8H2O(s) + H2SO4(aq) → BaSO4(s) + H2O2(aq) + 8H2O(l)
(B) Na2O2 + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + H2O2
(C) BaO2 + H2O + CO2 → BaCO3↓ + H2O2
(D) 3BaO2 + 2H3PO4 → Ba3(PO4)2↓ + 3H2O2
Answer:
(B) Na2O2 + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + H2O2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 1.
Mention features of Mendeleev’s periodic table.
Answer:
Features of Mendeleev’s periodic table:

  • In Mendeleev’s periodic table, all 63 elements were arranged in increasing order of their atomic masses. The serial or ordinal number of an element in the increasing order of atomic mass was referred to as its atomic number.
  • Mendeleev’s periodic table consisted of vertical groups and horizontal series (now called periods).
  • Elements belonging to the same group showed similar properties.
  • Properties of elements in a series/period showed gradual variation from left to right.

Question 2.
Why was Mendeleev’s periodic table readily accepted by the scientific community?
Answer:
Mendeleev’s periodic table was readily accepted by the scientific community due to the following advantages:
i. Mendeleev had left some gaps corresponding to certain atomic numbers in the periodic table so as to maintain the periodicity of the properties. When the elements corresponding to these atomic numbers were discovered, they fitted well into the gaps with their properties as predicted by Mendeleev’s periodic law.

ii. Mendeleev did not predict the presence of inert gases, however, they were discovered in later years. It was possible to accommodate inert gases in Mendeleev’s periodic table by creating an additional group without disturbing the position of other elements in his periodic table.

Question 3.
Give reason: Mendeleev’s periodic law was modified into modern periodic law.
Answer:

  • Henry Moseley in 1913, studied X-ray spectra of large number of elements.
  • He observed that the frequency of X-ray emitted from an element is related to atomic number (Z) of an element and not its atomic mass.
  • Therefore, the atomic number, Z, was considered a more fundamental property of the atom than the atomic mass.
  • As a result, Mendeleev’s periodic law was modified.

Question 4.
Define atomic number.
Answer:
Atomic number (Z) is the total number protons present in the atom of an element.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 5.
State the modern periodic law.
Answer:
Modern periodic law: “The physical and chemical properties of elements are a periodic function of their atomic numbers”.

Question 6.
Periods and groups present in the modern periodic table are numbered based on whose recommendation ?
Answer:
Numbering of the periods and groups in the modem periodic table is based on the recommendation provided by the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC).

Question 7.
Write a note on: Structure of the modern periodic table.
Answer:
Structure of the modern periodic table:
i. The modem periodic table also known as the Tong form of periodic table’ has number of boxes formed by the intersection of horizontal rows and vertical columns.
ii. The horizontal rows are called periods and the vertical columns are called groups.
iii. There are seven periods numbered from 1 to 7 and eighteen groups numbered from 1 to 18.
iv. There are total 118 boxes in the modem periodic table which are filled with 118 elements discovered till now including manmade elements.
v. The modem periodic table is divided into four blocks i.e., s-block, p-block, d-block and f-block.

  • Two groups on the extreme left of the modem periodic table form the s-block.
  • Six groups on the extreme right constitute the p-block.
  • Ten groups in the centre form the d-block
  • Two series at the bottom of the modem periodic table constitute the f-block. It contains fourteen elements in each series.

Question 8.
State the relationship between the modern periodic table and electronic configuration in periods.
Answer:

  • The modem periodic table is based on the atomic numbers of the elements. When elements are arranged in an increasing order of atomic number (Z), periodicity is observed in their electronic configurations which reflects in the characteristic structure of the modem periodic table.
  • The location of elements in the modem periodic table is correlated to quantum numbers of the last filled orbital.
  • Along a period, the atomic number increases by one and one electron is added to the outermost shell which forms neutral atom of the next element.
  • The period number is same as the principal quantum number ‘n’ of the valence shell of the elements.
  • A period begins with filling of a particular shell and ends when the valence shell attains complete octet configuration (or duplet, in case of the first period).
  • The next period begins with addition of electron to the next shell of higher energy compared to the previous period. e. g. First shell of the elements gets filled along the first period while second shell starts filling in the second period and addition of electrons continues till second shell (valence shell) attains stable electronic configuration.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 9.
Give reason: First period in the modern periodic table contains only two elements.
Answer:

  • Elements present in the first period i.e., H and He contain only one shell which is also their valence shell and can accommodate maximum two electrons.
  • As first shell can accommodate only two electrons, first period ends at He which has a complete duplet. Hence, first period in the modem periodic table contains only two elements.

Question 10.
Write names and electronic configurations of elements of first period in the modern periodic table. Identify which of them has the stable complete electronic configuration.
Answer:

  • Hydrogen (H) : 1s2, Helium (He) : 2s2
  • Since helium has a complete duplet i.e., two electrons in its valence shell, it has the stable complete electronic configuration.

Question 11.
Explain how does the filling of electrons takes place in the modern periodic table across:
i. Second period
ii. Third period
Answer:
i. Filling of electrons in the second period:

  • In the second period, electrons are filled in the second shell i.e., n = 2.
  • This shell can accommodate a maximum of eight electrons and gets filled as the atomic number increases along the second period.
  • The second period begins with Li (Z = 3): 1s2 2s1 and ends up with Ne (Z = 10): 1s2 2s2 2p6.
  • Neon has complete octet with 8 electrons in its valence shell. Therefore, the second period contains eight elements.

ii. Filling of electrons in the third period:

  • The third period corresponds to the filling of the third shell i.e. n = 3.
  • The third period also contains eight elements.
  • It begins with the filling of electrons in the first element Na (Z = 11) : [Ne] 3s1 and ends with the last element Ar (Z = 18) = [Ne] 3s2 3p6.
  • The condensed electronic configurations for the elements of third period is [Ne] 3s1-2 3p1-6.

Question 12.
There are 18 elements in the fourth period of the modern periodic table. Explain.
Answer:

  • The fourth period corresponds to the filling of fourth shell, n = 4.
  • Therefore, it begins with filling of 4s subshell. The first two elements of the fourth period are K (Z = 19) : [Ar] 4s1 and Ca (Z = 20) : [Ar] 4s2.
  • According to the aufbau principle, the next higher energy subshell is 3d, which can accommodate up to 10 electrons. Thus, filling of the 3d subshell results in the next 10 elements of the fourth period i.e., from Sc (Z = 21) : [Ar] 4s23d1 to Zn (Z = 30): [Ar] 4s23d10.
  • After filling of 3d subshell, the electrons enter the 4p subshell which can accommodate maximum 6 electrons. Hence, filling of 4p subshell results in the next 6 elements i.e., from Ga (Z = 31): [Ar] 4s23d10 4p1 to Kr (Z = 36): [Ar] 4s2 3d10 4p6.
  • Thus, the elements in fourth period are: 2 elements (with 4s subshell), 10 elements (with 3d subshell) and 6 elements (with 4p subshell).
  • Hence, there are 18 elements in the fourth period of the modem periodic table.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 13.
Why does the fifth period of the modern periodic table contain 18 electrons?
Answer:
The fifth period accommodates 18 elements as a result of successive filling of electrons in the 5s, 4d and 5p subshells.

Question 14.
What is the general trend followed while filling of electrons across a period in the modern periodic table.
Answer:

  • A period begins by filling of one electron to the ‘s’ subshell of a new shell and ends when an element corresponding to the same shell attains complete octet (or duplet).
  • Between these two ‘s’ and ‘p’ subshell of the valence shell, the inner subshells ‘d’ and ‘f’ are filled successively following the aufbau principle.

Question 15.
What is the subshell in which the last electron of the first element in the 6th period enters?
Answer:
The 6th period begins by filling the last electron in the shell with n = 6. The lowest energy subshell of any shell is ‘s’. Therefore, the last electron of the first element in the 6th period enters the subshell ‘6s’.

Question 16.
How many elements are present in the 6th period? Explain.
Answer:

  • The 6th period begins by filling the last electron in the subshell ‘6s’ and ends by completing the subshell ‘6p’. Therefore, the sixth period has the subshells filled in increasing order of energy as 6s < 4f < 5d < 6p.
  • The electron capacities of these subshells are 2, 14, 10 and 6, respectively. Therefore, the total number of elements in the 6th period is 2 + 14 + 10 + 6 = 32.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 17.
How does electronic configuration vary down a group in the modern periodic table?
Answer:

  • As we move from top to bottom in a group, a new shell gets added successively in the atom of an element. Therefore, the last electron enters in a new shell down the group.
  • Hence, the general outer electronic configuration of the elements in a group remains the same. This holds true for groups 1, 2 and 3 elements.
  • In the groups 13 to 18 the appropriate inner ‘d’ and ‘f’ subshells are completely filled and the general outer electronic configuration is the same down the groups 13 to 18.
  • However, in the groups 4 to 12, the ‘d’ and ‘f subshells are introduced at a later stage (4th period for ‘d’ and 6th period for ‘f’) down the group. As a result, variation in the general outer configuration is introduced only at the

Note: General outer electronic configuration in groups 1 to 3 and 13 to 18.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 1

Question 18.
On what basis is the modern periodic table divided into four blocks?
Answer:
The modem periodic table is divided into four blocks based on the subshell in which the last electron enters.

Question 19.
Why elements of group 1 and group 2 are known as s-block elements?
Answer:

  • The subshell in which the last electron enters decides the block to which an element belongs.
  • In group 1 and group 2 elements, the last electron is filled in the s subshell.

Therefore, the elements of group 1 and group 2 are known as s-block elements.

Question 20.
Elements belonging to which groups constitute the p-block and why?
Answer:

  • Elements belonging to groups 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 constitute the p-block.
  • The last electron in the p-block elements is filled in p subshell.
  • As p subshell contains three degenerate p orbitals, it can accommodate up to 6 electrons.
  • Therefore, the p-block elements belonging to six groups i.e., groups 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 in which last electron enters in p subshell constitute the p-block.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 21.
Give reason: Helium which is the first element of group 18 is placed in the p-block even though its last electron enters in s subshell.
Answer:

  • Electronic configuration of helium is 1s2 which indicates that it has a stable electronic configuration i.e., a complete duplet.
  • The p-block ends with group 18 which is a family of inert gases having stable electronic configuration (complete octet except helium).
  • Therefore, helium is placed with group 18 elements in p-block due to its stable electronic configuration even though its last electron enters in s subshell.

Question 22.
State the general outer electronic configuration of s-block and p-block elements.
Answer:
The general outer electronic configuration of s-block elements is ns1-2.
The general electronic configuration for the p-block elements is ns2np1-6.

Question 23.
There are total 10 groups in the d-block of the modern periodic table. Explain.
Answer:

  • The d-block in the modem periodic table is formed as a result of filling the last electron in d orbital.
  • As there are five orbitals in a d subshell, 10 electrons can successively be accommodated.

Hence, there are total 10 groups in the d-block of the modem periodic table i.e., group 3 to 12.

Question 24.
The last electron enters a (n-1)d orbital only after the ns subshell is completely filled. Explain.
Answer:
A d subshell is present in the shells with n ≥ 3 and according to the (n+1) rule, the energy of ns orbital is less than that of the (n-1)d orbital. As a result, the last electron enters a (n-1)d orbital only after the ns subshell is completely filled.

Question 25.
Chromium exhibit 4s1 3d5 electronic configuration instead of 4s2 3d4. Explain.
Answer:

  • Completely filled or half-filled subshells are highly stable.
  • In 4s1 3d5 configuration, both s and d subshells are half-filled.
  • Thus, due to the extra stability associated with half-filled subshells, chromium exhibits 4s1 3d5 electronic configuration instead of 4s2 3d4.

Question 26.
What is the general outer electronic configuration of d-block and f-block elements?
Answer:
The general outer electronic configuration of the d-block elements is ns0-2 (n-1)d1-10 while the general outer electronic configuration of the f-block elements is ns2 (n-1)d0-1 (n-2)f1-14.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 27.
Expected outer electronic configuration of europium (Eu) is 6s2 4f6 5d1. However, it exhibits different than expected outer electronic configuration.
i. Write the observed outer electronic configuration of Eu.
ii. What is the reason for this variation in electronic configuration?
Answer:
i. Observed outer electronic configuration of europium (Eu) is 6s2 4f7 5d0.
ii. In the observed electronic configuration of Eu, 4f subshell is half-filled which is a highly stable configuration. Therefore, observed electronic configuration of Eu varies than expected.

Question 28.
Name the two series that constitute f-block.
Answer:
The f-block constitutes two series of 14 elements called the lanthanide and the actinide series which are placed one below the other.

Question 29.
State whether the following statements are true or false. Correct if false.
i. Position of the elements in the modern periodic table is related to the quantum number of their last filled orbital.
ii. Group number is same as the principal quantum number ‘n’ of the valence shell of the elements.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Period number is same as the principal quantum number ‘n’ of the valence shell of the elements.

Question 30.
Name the following.
i. Shortest period in the modern periodic table.
ii. Block which is placed separately at the bottom of the modern periodic table.
Answer:
i. First period
ii. f-Block

Question 31.
How can a period, group and block of the element be determined?
Answer:
The group, period and the block of the element can be determined on the basis of its electronic configuration.
i. Period: The principal quantum number of the valence shell corresponds to the period of the element.
e. g. The principal quantum number (n) of the valence shell (3s1) of Na (1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1) is 3. This corresponds to third period.

ii. Block: The subshell in which the last electron enters, corresponds to the block of the elements (with exception being He).
e. g. The subshell 3d (in which the last electron enters) for Sc (1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d1 4s2) corresponds to d block.

iii. Group: The group of the element is determined on the basis of number of electrons present in the outermost or penultimate [next to outermost, i.e. (n-1)] shell:

  • For s-block elements, group number = number of valence electrons.
  • For p-block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet.
  • For d-block elements, group number = 2 + number of (n-1)d electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 32.
Outer electronic configurations of a few elements are given below. Explain them and identify the period, group and block in the periodic table to which they belong.
2He: 1s2, 54Xe: 5s25p6, 16S: 3s23p4, 79Au: 6s15d10
Answer:
i. 2He: 1s2
Here, n = 1. Therefore, 2He belongs to the 1st period.
The shell n = 1 has only one subshell, namely 1s. The outer electronic configuration 1s2 of ‘He’ corresponds to the maximum capacity of 1s, the complete duplet. Therefore, He is placed at the end of the 1st period in the group 18 of inert gases. So, ‘He’ belongs to p-block.

ii. 54Xe: 5s25p6
Here, n = 5. Therefore, 54Xe belongs to the 5th period.
The outer electronic configuration. 5s25p6 corresponds to complete octet. Therefore, 54Xe is placed in group 18 and belongs to p-block.

iii. 16S: 3s23p4
Here, n = 3. Therefore, 16S belongs to the 3rd period. The 3p subshell in ‘S’ is partially filled and short of completion of octet by two electrons. Therefore, ‘S’ belongs to (18 – 2) = 16th group and p-block.

iv. 79AU: 6s15d10
Here n = 6. Therefore, ‘Au’ belongs to the 6th period.
The sixth period begins with filling of electron into 6s and then into 5d orbital.
The outer configuration of ‘Au’: 6s1 5d10 implies that (1 + 10) = 11 electrons are filled in the outer orbitals to give ‘Au’. Therefore ‘Au’ belongs to the group 11.
As the last electron has entered ‘d’ orbital ‘Au’ belongs to the d-block.

Question 33.
Predict the block, periods and groups to which the following elements belong.
i. Mg (Z = 12)
ii. V (Z = 23)
iii. Sb (Z = 51)
iv. Rn (Z = 86)
v. Na (Z = 11)
vi. Cl (Z = 17)
Answer:
i. Mg (Z = 12): Atomic number of Mg is 12. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2.
Block: Since the last electron enters s subshell (3 s), Mg belongs to s-block.
Period: n = 3. Therefore, it is present in the third period.
Group: For s-block element, group number = number of valence electrons = 2. Hence, it belongs to group 2.

ii. V (Z = 23): Atomic number of V is 23. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2.
Block: Since the last electron enters d subshell (3d), V belongs to d-block.
Period: n = 4. Therefore, it is present in the fourth period.
Group: For d-block elements, group number = 2 + number of (n – 1)
d electrons = 2 + 3 = 5. Hence, it belongs to group 5.

iii. Sb (Z = 51): Atomic number of Sb is 51.
Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p6 4d10 5s2 5p3.
Block: Since the last electron enters p subshell (5p), Sb belongs to p-block.
Period: n = 5. Therefore, it is present in the fifth period.
Group: For p block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet
= 18 – 3 = 15. Hence it belongs to group 15.

iv. Rn (Z = 86): Atomic number of Rn is 86.
Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d10 4p6 4d10 4f14 5s2 5p6 5d10 6s2 6p6.
Block: Since the last electron enters p subshell (6p), Rn belongs to p-block.
Period: n = 6. Therefore, it is present in the sixth period.
Group: For p block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet
= 18 – 0 = 18. Hence, it belongs to group 18.

v. Na (Z = 11): Atomic number of Na is 11. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1.
Block: Since the last electron enters s subshell (3s), Na belongs to s-block.
Period: n = 3. Therefore, it is present in the third period.
Group: For s-block element, number of the group = number of valence electrons = 1. Hence, it belongs to group 1.

vi. Cl (Z = 17): Atomic number of Cl is 17. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5.
Block: Since the last electron enters p subshell (3p), Cl belongs to p-block.
Period: n = 3. Therefore, it is present in the third period.
Group: For p block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet
= 18 – 1 = 17. Hence, it belongs to group 17.

Question 34.
State the characteristics of s-block elements.
Answer:

  • The s-block contains the elements of group 1 (alkali metals) and group 2 (alkaline earth metals).
  • They occur in nature only in combined state as they are reactive elements.
  • Except Li and Be, compounds formed by all other s-block elements are predominantly ionic in nature.
  • This is because they have only one or two valence electrons which they can lose readily forming M+ or M2+ ions.
  • Since they can lose electrons easily, they have low ionization enthalpies, which decreases down the group resulting in increased reactivity.

Question 35.
What are main group elements?
Answer:
The p-block elements together with s-block elements are called main group elements or representative elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 36.
Give reason: Group 18 elements do not participate in chemical reactions readily.
Answer:

  • Group 18 is the last group of p-block and include noble or inert gases.
  • They have closed valence shells (complete duplet in the case of ‘He’ and complete octet in the case of the other noble gases).
  • Therefore, they show very low chemical reactivity and thus, do not participate in chemical reactions readily.

Question 37.
Why nonmetals present in group 17 and 16 in the modern periodic table are highly reactive?
Answer:

  • Nonmetals present in group 17 (halogen family) and group 16 (chalcogens) have highly negative electron gain enthalpies.
  • As a result, they readily accept one or two electrons and form anions (X or X2-) that have complete octet.
  • Therefore, nonmetals present in group 17 and 16 are highly reactive.

Question 38.
Explain the composition of the p-block in the modern periodic table.
Answer:

  • The p-block contains elements of groups 13 to 18.
  • It contains all the three types of elements i.e., metals, nonmetals and metalloids.
  • In the p-block, metals and nonmetals are separated from each other by a zig-zag line. The metals are present on the left and the nonmetals are present on the right side while the metalloids are present along the zig-zag line.

Question 39.
State whether the following statements are true or false. Correct if false.
i. Nonmetallic character increases from left to right across a period.
ii. Nonmetallic character increases down a group.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Nonmetallic character decreases down a group.

Question 40.
Differentiate between s-block and p-block elements.
Answer:
s-Block elements:

  • s-Block contains group 1 and group 2 elements.
  • It contains only metals.
  • The last electron in the s-block elements enters in s orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of s-block elements is ns1-2.
  • e.g. Na, K, Ca, Mg, etc.

p-Block elements:

  • p-Block contains elements from groups 13 to 18.
  • It contains metals, nonmetals as well as metalloids.
  • The last electron in the p-block elements enters in p orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of p-block elements is ns2 np1-6.
  • e.g. C, N, O, F, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 41.
Write a note on the characteristics of the d-block elements.
Answer:

  • The d-block contains elements of the groups 3 to 12 which are all metals. They are also known as transition elements or transition metals.
  • They form a bridge between chemically reactive s-block elements and less reactive elements of groups 13 and 14.
  • Most of the d-block elements possess partially filled inner d orbitals. As a result, the d-block elements have properties such as variable oxidation state, paramagnetism, ability to form coloured ions. They can be used as catalysts.
  • Zn, Cd, and Hg with configuration ns2 (n-1)d10, (completely filled s and d subshells) do not show characteristic properties of transition metals as they are stable.

Question 42.
Explain in brief about the f-block elements.
Answer:

  • The elements present in f-block are all metals and are placed in the two rows called lanthanide series (58Ce to 71Lu) and actinide series (90Th to 103Lr).
  • The lanthanides are also known as rare earth elements while the actinide elements beyond 92U are called transuranium elements.
  • All the transuranium elements are manmade and radioactive.
  • The last electron of the elements of these series is filled in the (n-2)f subshell, and therefore, these are called inner transition elements.
  • These elements have very similar properties within each series.

Question 43.
What is lanthanide and actinide series?
Answer:
i. Lanthanide series: The fourteen elements after lanthanum (Z = 57) i.e., from cerium (Z = 58) to lutetium (Z = 71) are named after their preceding member (57La) present in the third group and 6th period and are called lanthanides. They are kept in separate series called lanthanide series at the bottom of the modem periodic table.

ii. Actinide series: The fourteen elements after actinium i.e., from thorium (Z = 90) to lawrencium (Z = 103) are named after 89Ac present in third period and 7th group. They are kept in separate series called actinide series at the bottom of the modem periodic table.

Question 44.
Differentiate between d-block and f-block elements.
Answer:
d-Block elements:

  • d-Block contains elements from group 3 to group 12.
  • It is present in the middle of the modern periodic table.
  • They are also known as transition elements.
  • The last electron in the d-block elements enters in d orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of d-block elements is ns0-2 (n-1)d1-10 .
  • e.g. Cu, Zn, Cr, Ti, V, etc.

f-Block elements:

  • f-Block contains elements of lanthanide and actinide series.
  • f-block elements are present below the modern periodic table as two separate rows.
  • They are also known as inner transition elements.
  • The last electron in the f-block elements enters in f orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of f-block elements is ns2 (n-1) d0-1 (n-2) f114.
  • e.g. Ce, Pr, Nd Th, U, Np, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 45.
Chlorides of two metals are common laboratory chemicals and both are colourless. One of the metals reacts vigorously with water while the other reacts slowly. Place the two metals in the appropriate block in the periodic table. Justify your answer.
Answer:
i. Metals are present in all the four blocks of the periodic table.
ii. Salts of metals in the f-block and p-block (except AlCl3) are not common laboratory chemicals. Therefore, the choice is between s- and d-block.
iii. From the given properties their placement is done as shown below:

  • s-block: Metal that reacts vigorously with water.
  • d-block: Metal that reacts slowly with water.

iv. The colourless nature of the less reactive metal in the d-block implies that the inner d subshell is completely filled.

Question 46.
What are periodic properties?
Answer:

  • The elements in the modem periodic table (long form of periodic table) are arranged in such a way that on moving across a period or down the group, several properties of elements vary in regular fashion. These properties are called periodic properties.
  • Atomic and ionic radii, ionization enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy, electronegativity, valency and oxidation states are several properties of elements that show periodic variations.

Question 47.
What leads to the phenomena called effective nuclear charge and screening effect in an atom?
Answer:

  • The periodic trends are explained in the terms of two fundamental factors, namely, attraction of extranuclear electrons towards the nucleus and repulsion between electrons belonging to the same atom.
  • These attractive and repulsive forces operate simultaneously in an atom.
  • This results in two interrelated phenomena called effective nuclear charge and screening effect in an atom.

Question 48.
Explain the concept of effective nuclear charge in detail.
Answer:
i. In a multi-electron atom, the positively charged nucleus attracts the negatively charged electrons around it, and there is mutual repulsion between the negatively charged extranuclear electrons.
ii. The repulsion by inner shell electrons results in pushing the outer shell electrons further away from the nucleus. Thus, the outer shell electrons are held less tightly by the nucleus.
iii. As a result, the attraction of the nucleus for an outer electron is partially cancelled and hence, an outer shell electron does not experience the actual positive charge present on the nucleus. This effect of the inner electrons on the outer electrons is called screening effect or shielding effect.
iv. The net nuclear charge actually experienced by an electron is called the effective nuclear charge (Zeff).
The effective nuclear charge is lower than the actual nuclear charge (Z).
v. Effective nuclear charge (Zeff) = Z – electron shielding
= Z – σ
Here σ (sigma) is called shielding constant or screening constant and the value of σ depends upon type of the orbital that the electron occupies.

Question 49.
Define:
i. Effective nuclear charge (Zeff)
ii. Screening effect (or shielding effect)
Answer:
i. Effective nuclear charge (Zeff): In multi-electron atom, the net nuclear charge actually experienced by an electron is called the effective nuclear charge (Zeff).
ii. Screening effect (or shielding effect): In multi-electron atom, the effect of the inner electrons on the outer electrons is called screening effect or shielding effect of the inner/core electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 50.
Explain the variations in effective nuclear charge
i. Across a period
ii. Down a group
Answer:
i. Across a period:

  • As we move across a period, atomic number increases by one and thus, actual nuclear charge (Z) increases by +1 at a time.
  • However, the valence shell remains the same and the newly added electron gets accommodated in the same shell. There is no addition of electrons to the core i.e., inner shells. Thus, shielding due to core electrons remains the same even though the actual nuclear charge increases.
  • As a result, the effective nuclear charge (Zeff) goes on increasing across a period.

ii. Down a group:

  • As we move down a group, a new larger valence shell is added. As a result, there is an additional shell in the core.
  • The shielding effect of the increased number of core electrons outweighs the effect of the increased nuclear charge. Thus, the effective nuclear charge experienced by the outer electrons decreases largely down a group.
  • Hence, the effective nuclear charge (Zeff) decreases down a group.

Question 51.
Define atomic radius.
Answer:
Atomic radius is one half of the internuclear distance between two adjacent atoms of a metal or two single bonded atoms of a nonmetal.

Question 52.
What is meant by covalent radius of the atom? Explain with suitable examples.
Answer:

  • In the case of nonmetals (except noble gases), the atoms of an element are bonded to each other by covalent bonds.
  • Bond length of a single bond is taken as sum of radii of the two single bonded atoms. This is called covalent radius of the atom.
  • For example: Bond length of C-C bond in diamond is 154 pm. Therefore, atomic radius of carbon is estimated to be 77 pm which is half of bond length (\(\frac {1}{2}\) × 154 = 77).

Question 53.
How is atomic radius of a nonmetallic element estimated?
Answer:

  • The atomic size of a nonmetallic element is estimated from the distance between the two atoms bound together by a single covalent bond. From this, the covalent radius of the element is estimated.
  • The internuclear distance in a diatomic molecule of an element is its covalent bond length. Half the covalent bond length gives the covalent radius.
  • Bond length of Cl-Cl bond in Cl2 is measured as 198 pm. Therefore, the atomic radius of Cl is estimated to be 99 pm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 2

Question 54.
Define metallic radius.
Answer:
One half of the distance between the centres of nucleus of the two adjacent atoms of a metallic crystal is called as a metallic radius.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 55.
How is metallic radius determined in the case of metals? Give suitable example.
Answer:

  • In the case of metals, distance between the adjacent atoms in metallic sample is measured. One half of this distance is taken as the metallic radius.
  • For example: In beryllium, distance between the adjacent Be atoms is measured. One half of this distance is taken as the metallic radius of a Be atom.
  • Distance between two adjacent Be atoms is 224 pm. Therefore, metallic radius of a Be atom is 112 pm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 3

Note: Atomic radii of some elements are given in the table below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 4

Question 56.
How is a cation and an anion formed?
Answer:
A cation (or positively charged ion) is formed by the removal of one or more electrons from the atom of an element whereas an anion (or negatively charged ion) is formed when the atom of an element gains one or more electrons.

Question 57.
Give reasons: Radius of a cation is smaller and that of an anion is larger as compared to that of their parent atoms.
Answer:

  • A cation is formed by the loss of one or more electrons, therefore, it contains fewer electrons that the parent atom but has the same nuclear charge.
  • As a result, the shielding effect is less and effective nuclear charge is larger within a cation. Thus, radius of a cation is smaller than the parent atom.
  • However, an anion is formed by the gain of one or more electrons and therefore, it contains a greater number of electrons than the parent atom.
  • Due to these additional electrons, anion experiences increased electronic repulsion and decreased effective nuclear charge. As a result, an anion has larger radius than its parent atom.

Hence, radius of a cation is smaller and that of an anion are larger as compared to that of their parent atoms.

Question 58.
Define: Isoelectronic species
Answer:
The atoms or ions which have the same number of electrons are called isoelectronic species.

Question 59.
Explain with example why the radii of isoelectronic species vary.
Answer:
i. The radii of isoelectronic species vary according to actual nuclear charge. Larger nuclear charge exerts greater attraction on the electrons and thus, the radius of that isoelectronic species becomes smaller.
ii. For example, F and Na+ both have 10 electrons but the nuclear charge on F is +9 which is smaller than that of Na+ which has the nuclear charge +11.
Hence, F has larger ionic radii (133 pm) than Na+ (98 pm).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 60.
What is the trend observed in the ionic size of the following isoelectronic species? Explain.
i. Na+, Mg2+, Al3+ and Si4+
ii. O2-, F, Na+ and Mg2+
Answer:
i. Na+, Mg2+, Al3+ and Si4+
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 5
a. Among the given ions, the nuclear charge varies but the number of electrons remains the same and therefore, these are isoelectronic species.
b. The radii of isoelectronic species vary according to actual nuclear charge. Larger nuclear charge exerts greater attraction on the electrons and thus, the radius of that isoelectronic species becomes smaller.
c. The nuclear charge increases in the order Na+ < Mg2+ < Al3+ < Si4+ and thus, the ionic size decreases in the order Na+ > Mg2+ > Al3+ > Si4+.

ii. O2-, F, Na+ and Mg2+
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 6
a. Among the given ions, the nuclear charge varies but the number of electrons remains the same and therefore, these are isoelectronic species.
b. The radii of isoelectronic species vary according to actual nuclear charge. Larger nuclear charge exerts greater attraction on the electrons and thus, the radius of that isoelectronic species becomes smaller.
c. The nuclear charge increases in the order O2- < F < Na+ < Mg2+ and thus, the ionic size decreases in the order O2- > F > Na+ > Mg2+.

Question 61.
Identify the species having larger radius from the following pairs:
i. Na and Na+
ii. Na+ and Mg2+
Answer:
i. The nuclear charge is the same in Na and Na+. But Na+ has a smaller number of electrons and a smaller number of occupied shells (two shells in Na+, while three shells in Na). Therefore, radius of Na is larger.
ii. Na+ and Mg2+ are isoelectronic species. Mg2+ has a larger nuclear charge than that of Na+. Therefore, Na+ has larger radius.

Question 62.
Which of the following species will have the largest and the smallest size? Why?
Mg, Mg2+, Al, Al3+
Answer:

  • Atomic radius decreases across the period. Hence, the atomic radius of Mg is larger than that of Al.
  • Parent atoms have larger radius than their corresponding cations. Hence, the radius of Mg is larger than that of Mg2+ and the radius of Al is larger than that of Al3+.
  • Mg2+ and Al3+ are isoelectronic. Among isoelectronic species, the one with larger nuclear charge will have smaller radius. Al3+ (Z = 13) has a larger nuclear charge than that of Mg2+ (Z = 12). Hence, the ionic radius of Al3+ is smaller than Mg2+.
  • Therefore, the decreasing order of radius is Mg > Al > Mg2+ > Al3+.

Hence, species with the largest size is Mg and with the smallest size is Al3+.

Question 63.
Identify the element with more negative value of electron gain enthalpy from the following pairs. Justify.
i. Cl and Br
ii. F and O
Answer:
i. Cl and Br belong to the same group of halogens with Br having higher atomic number than CL As the atomic number increases down the group, the effective nuclear charge decreases. The increased shielding effect of core electrons can be noticed. The electron has to be added to a farther shell, which releases less energy and thus, electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative down the group. Therefore, Cl has more negative electron gain enthalpy than Br.

ii. F and O belong to the same second period with F having higher atomic number than O. As the atomic number increases across a period, atomic radius decreases, effective nuclear charge increases and electron can be added more easily. Therefore, more energy is released with gain of an electron as we move towards right in a period. Therefore, F has more negative electron gain enthalpy than O.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 64.
Explain the importance of electronegativity.
Answer:

  • When two atoms of different elements form a covalent bond, the electron pair is shared unequally.
  • Electronegativity represents attractive force exerted by the nucleus on shared electrons. Electron sharing between covalently bonded atoms takes place using the valence electron.
  • It depends upon the effective nuclear charge experienced by electron involved in formation of the covalent bond.
  • Electronegativity predicts the nature of the bond, or, how strong is the force of attraction that holds two atoms together.

Question 65.
Explain the trend in electronegativity
i. across a period
ii. down a group
Answer:
i. Across a period:
a. As we move across a period from left to right in the periodic table, the effective nuclear charge increases steadily.
b. Hence, due to the increase in effective nuclear charge, the tendency to attract shared electron pair in a covalent bond increases i.e., electronegativity increases from left to right across a period.
e. g. Li < Be < B < C < N < O <F.

ii. Down a group:
a. As we move down the group from top to bottom in the periodic table, the size of the valence shell goes on increasing.
b. However, the effective nuclear charge decreases as the shielding effect of the core electrons increases due to the increase in the size of the atoms.
c. Thus, the tendency to attract shared electron pair in a covalent bond decreases, decreasing the electronegativity down the group.
e.g. F > Cl > Br > I > At.

Question 66.
Explain the terms:
i. Valency of an element
ii. Oxidation state (or oxidation number)
iii. Chemical reactivity
Answer:
i. Valency of an element:

  • Valency of an element indicates the number of chemical bonds that the atom can form giving a molecule.
  • The most fundamental chemical property of an element is its combining power. This property is numerically expressed in terms of valency or valence.
  • Valence does not have any sign associated with it.
  • Valency of the main group elements is usually equal to the number of valence electrons (outer electrons) and/or equal to difference between 8 and the number of valence electrons.

ii. Oxidation state (or oxidation number):

  • The oxidation state or oxidation number is a frequently used term related to valence.
  • Oxidation number has a sign, + or – which is decided by the electronegativities of atoms that are bonded.

iii. Chemical reactivity:

  • Chemical reactivity is related to the ease with which an element loses or gains the electrons.
  • Chemical properties of elements depend on their electronic configuration.

Question 67.
What is the trend observed in the valency of main group elements?
Answer:
i. Valency of the main group elements is usually equal to the number of valence electrons (outer electrons) or it is equal to the difference between 8 and the number of valence electrons.
i.e., (8 – number of valence electrons).
ii. The valency remains the same down the group and shows a gradual variation across the period as atomic number increases from left to right.

Note: Periodic trends in valency of main group elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 7

Question 68.
Give any two distinguishing points between metals and nonmetals.
Answer:
Metals:

  1. Generally, metals exhibit good electrical conductivity.
  2. They can form compounds by loss of valence electrons.

Nonmetals:

  1. Generally, nonmetals exhibit poor electrical conductivity.
  2. Nonmetals can form compounds by gain of valence electrons in valence shell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 69.
Explain the variation of the following property of elements down a group and across a period.
i. Metallic character
ii. Nonmetallic character
Answer:
The variation observed in the metallic and nonmetallic character of elements can be explained in the terms of ionization enthalpy and electron gain enthalpy.
i. Metallic character:

  • The ionization enthalpy decreases down the group. Thus, the tendency to lose valence electrons increases down the group and the metallic character increases down a group.
  • However, the ionization enthalpy increases across the period and as a result metallic character decreases across a period.

ii. Nonmetallic character:

  • Electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative as we move down the group and hence, nonmetallic character decreases down the group.
  • However, electron gain enthalpy becomes more and more negative across the period and thus, nonmetallic character increases across the period.

Question 70.
Justify the position of most reactive and least reactive elements in the modern periodic table.
Answer:

  • Chemical reactivity of elements depends on the ease with which it attains electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas by gaining or losing electrons.
  • The elements preceding an inert gas react by gaining electrons in the outermost shell, whereas the elements which follow an inert gas in the periodic table react by loss of valence electrons. Thus, the chemical reactivity is decided by the electron gain enthalpy and ionization enthalpy values, which in turn, are decided by effective nuclear charge and finally by the atomic size.
  • The ionization enthalpy is the smallest for the element on the extreme left in a period, whereas the electron gain enthalpy is the most negative for the second last element on the extreme right, (preceding to the inert gas which is the last element of a period).
  • Thus, the most reactive elements lie on the extreme left and the extreme right (excluding inert gases) of the periodic table.

Question 71.
How can we predict chemical reactivity of elements based on their oxide formation reactions and the nature of oxides formed?
Answer:

  • The chemical reactivity can be illustrated by comparing the reaction of elements with oxygen to form oxides and the nature of the oxides.
  • Alkali metals present on the extreme left of the modem periodic table are highly reactive and thus, they react vigorously with oxygen to form oxides such as Na2O which reacts with water to form strong bases like NaOH.
  • The reactive elements on the right i.e., halogens react with oxygen to form oxides such as Cl2O7 which on reaction with water form strong acids like HClO4.
  • The oxides of the elements in the centre of the main group elements are either amphoteric (Al2O3) neutral (CO, NO) or weakly acidic (CO2).

Question 72.
Write the chemical equations for reaction, if any, of (i) Na2O and (ii) Al2O3 with HCl and NaOH both. Correlate this with the position of Na and Al in the periodic table, and infer whether the oxides are basic, acidic or amphoteric.
Answer:
i. Na2O + 2HCl → 2NaCl + H2O
Na2O + NaOH → No reaction
As Na2O reacts with an acid to form salt and water it is a basic oxide. This is because Na is a reactive metal lying on the extreme left of the periodic table.

ii. Al2O3 + 6HCl → 2AlCl3 + 3H2O
Al2O3 + 2NaOH → 2NaAlO2 + H2O
As Al2O3 reacts with an acid as well as base to form a salt and water. It is an amphoteric oxide. Al is a moderately reactive element lying in the centre of main group elements in the periodic table.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 73.
Comment on the chemical reactivity of d-block and f-block elements.
Answer:

  • d-block (transition) elements and f-block (inner transition) elements exhibit very small change in atomic radii.
  • Therefore, the transition and inner transition elements belonging to the individual series have similar chemical properties.
  • Their ionization enthalpies are intermediate between those of s-block and p-block elements. Thus, d-block and f-block elements generally show moderate reactivity.

Question 74.
Ge, S and Br belong to the groups 14, 16 and 17, respectively. Predict the empirical formulae of the compounds those can be formed by (i) Ge and S, (ii) Ge and Br.
Answer:
From the group number we understand that the general outer electronic configuration and number of valence electrons and valencies of the three elements are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 8
i. S is more electronegative than Ge. Therefore, the empirical formula of the compound formed by these two elements is predicted by the method of cross multiplication of the valencies:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 9

ii. Br is more electronegative than Ge. The empirical formula of the compound formed by these two elements is predicted by the method of cross multiplication of valencies:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 10
[Note: More electronegative element is written on right hand side in cross multiplication method.]

Question 75.
The first ionization enthalpies of 5 elements of second period are given below:

Element1st IE values (kJ mol-1)
I520
II1681
III1086
IV2080
V899

Based on the above data, answer the following questions:
i. Identify the element having highest atomic number.
ii. If element I is lithium, how will you explain its low value of first ionization enthalpy?
iii. Explain why ionization enthalpies are always positive.
Answer:
i. Element IV. The first ionization enthalpy increases with increase in atomic number along a period. Hence, the element IV having highest IE will have highest atomic number among the given elements.
ii. Alkali metals have only one electron in their valence shell which can be easily lost resulting in the stable noble gas configuration. Therefore, lithium shows low value of first ionization enthalpy.
iii. Energy is always required to remove electrons from an atom. Hence, ionization enthalpies have positive value.

Question 76.
From the elements Mg, Ar, Cl, Sr, P and S, choose one that fits each of the below given descriptions:
i. An element having two valence electrons.
ii. An element having properties similar to that of O.
iii. A noble gas.
iv. An alkaline earth metal,
v. An element having electronic configuration 1s22s22p63s23p3.
Answer:
i. Magnesium (Mg)
ii. Sulphur (S)
iii. Argon (Ar)
iv. Strontium (Sr)
v. Phosphorus (P)

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Mendeleev’s periodic table had …………… elements.
(A) 75
(B) 83
(C) 63
(D) 118
Answer:
(C) 63

2. The serial or ordinal number of an element in Mendeleev’s periodic table was recognized as ………….
(A) neutron number
(B) valency
(C) principal quantum number
(D) proton number
Answer:
(D) proton number

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

3. Mendeleev predicted the existence of …………..
(A) aluminium
(B) silicon
(C) tellurium
(D) germanium
Answer:
(D) germanium

4. According to Mendeleev’s periodic law, the physical and chemical properties of elements are the periodic function of their …………..
(A) atomic weights
(B) atomic numbers
(C) molecular formulas
(D) molecular weights
Answer:
(A) atomic weights

5. Moseley showed that the fundamental property of an element is ……………
(A) atomic number
(B) atomic mass
(C) both A and B
(D) none of these
Answer:
(A) atomic number

6. According to periodic law of elements, the variation in properties of elements is related to their ……………
(A) densities
(B) atomic masses
(C) atomic sizes
(D) atomic numbers
Answer:
(D) atomic numbers

7. At present, how many elements are known?
(A) 118
(B) 110
(C) 114
(D) 120
Answer:
(A) 118

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

8. The long form of the periodic table consists of how many periods?
(A) 5
(B) 8
(C) 10
(D) 7
Answer:
(D) 7

9. According to quantum mechanical model of the atom, the properties of elements can be correlated to their …………….
(A) atomic number
(B) atomic mass
(C) valency
(D) electronic configuration
Answer:
(D) electronic configuration

10. The fourth, fifth and sixth periods are long periods and contain ……………
(A) 18, 18 and 36
(B) 18, 28 and 32
(C) 18, 15 and 31
(D) 18, 18 and 32
Answer:
(D) 18, 18 and 32

11. f-block elements are also known as ……………
(A) transition elements
(B) inert gas elements
(C) normal elements
(D) inner transition elements
Answer:
(D) inner transition elements

12. Which of the following forms a bridge between reactive s-block elements and less reactive group 13 and 14 elements?
(A) Inert gases
(B) Transition metals
(C) Halogens
(D) Inner transition metals
Answer:
(B) Transition metals

13. ………… elements are known as chalcogens.
(A) Group 17
(B) Group 18
(C) Group 16
(D) Group 1
Answer:
(C) Group 16

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

14. The name ‘rare earth elements’ is used for …………..
(A) lanthanides only
(B) actinides only
(C) both lanthanides and actinides
(D) alkaline earth metals
Answer:
(C) both lanthanides and actinides

15. Atomic number of V is 23 and its electronic configuration is …………….
(A) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3p6 3d3 4s2
(B) 1s2 2s2 2d3 3p6 2p6 4s2
(C) 2s2 1s2 2p6 3s2 3d3 4s2
(D) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2
Answer:
(D) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2

16. Aluminium belongs to …………. elements.
(A) s-block
(B) p-block
(C) d-block
(D) f-block
Answer:
(B) p-block

17. In P3-, S2- and Cl ions, the increasing order of size is ………….
(A) Cl < S2- < P3-
(B) P3- < S2- < Cl
(C) S2- < Cl < P3-
(D) S2- < P3- < Cl
Answer:
(A) Cl- < S2- < P3-

18. The CORRECT order of radii is ……………
(A) N < Be < B
(B) F< O2- <N3-
(C) Na < Li < K
(D) Fe3+ < Fe2+ < Fe4+
Answer:
(B) F < O2- <N3-

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

19. Which of the following species will have the largest size Mg, Mg2+, Fe, Fe3+?
(A) Mg
(B) Mg2+
(C) Fe
(D) Fe3+
Answer:
(C) Fe

20. Which one of the following is CORRECT order of the size?
(A) I > I >I+
(B) I > I+ > I
(C) I+ > I > I
(D) I > I > I+
Answer:
(D) I > I > I+

21. The CORRECT order of increasing radii of the elements Na, Si, Al and P is ……………
(A) Si < Al < P < Na
(B) Al < Si < P < Na
(C) P < Si < Al < Na
(D) Al < P < Si < Na
Answer:
(C) P < Si < Al < Na

22. The metallic and nonmetallic properties of elements can be judged by their ……………
(A) electron gain enthalpy
(B) ionization enthalpy
(C) electronegativity
(D) valence
Answer:
(C) electronegativity

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

23. Which element has the most negative electron gain enthalpy?
(A) Sulphur
(B) Fluorine
(C) Chlorine
(D) Hydrogen
Answer:
(C) Chlorine

24. Which of the properties remain unchanged on descending a group in the periodic table?
(A) Atomic size
(B) Density
(C) Valency electrons
(D) Metallic character
Answer:
(C) Valency electrons

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 1.
What does the term ‘redox’ refer to?
Answer:
Redox is an abbreviation used for the terms ‘oxidation and reduction’.

Question 2.
Give examples of naturally occurring redox reactions.
Answer:

  1. Respiration
  2. Rusting
  3. Combustion of fuel

Question 3.
Define Oxidant/Oxidising agent.
Answer:
A reagent/substance which itself undergoes reduction and causes oxidation of another species is called oxidant/oxidising agent.

Question 4.
Define: Reductant/Reducing agent
Answer:
A reagent/substance which itself undergoes oxidation bringing about the reduction of another species is called reductant/reducing agent.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 5.
Explain redox reaction giving an example.
Answer:
Oxidation and reduction reactions occur simultaneously. Therefore, the oxidation-reduction reaction is also referred to as a redox reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 1
In the above reaction, HgCl2 is reduced to Hg2Cl2 and SnCl2 is oxidised to SnCl4. Hence, it is a redox reaction.

Question 6.
Explain redox reaction in terms of electron transfer.
Answer:
i. Redox reaction can be described in terms of electron transfer as shown below:
2Mg(s) + O2(g) → Mg2+ + 2O2-
ii. Charge development suggests that each magnesium atom loses two electrons to form Mg2+ and each oxygen atom gains two electrons to form O2-. This can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 2
iii. When Mg is oxidised to MgO, the neutral Mg atom loses electrons to form Mg2+ in MgO while the elemental oxygen gains electrons and forms O2- in MgO.
iv. Each of the above steps represents a half reaction which involves electron transfer (loss or gain).
v. Sum of these two half reactions or the overall reaction is a redox reaction.

Question 7.
Justify the following reaction as redox reaction in terms of electron transfer.
Mg + F2 → MgF2
Answer:
i. Redox reaction can be described in terms of electron transfer as shown below:
Mg(s) + F2(g) → Mg2+ + 2F
ii. Charge development suggests that magnesium atom loses two electrons to form Mg2+ and each fluorine atom gains one electron to form F. This can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 3
iii. When Mg is oxidised to MgF2, the neutral Mg atom loses electrons to form Mg2+ in MgF2 while the elemental fluorine gains electrons and forms Fin MgF2.
iv. Each of the above steps represents a half reaction which involves electron transfer (loss or gain).
v. Sum of these two half reactions or the overall reaction is a redox reaction.

Question 8.
Justify that the reaction 2Na(s) + H2(g) → 2NaH(s) is a redox reaction.
Answer:
Redox reaction can be described as electron transfer as shown below:
2Na(s) + H2(g) → 2Na+ + 2H
ii. Charge development suggests that each sodium atom loses one electron to form Na+ and each hydrogen atom gains one electron to form H. This can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 4
iii. When Na is oxidised to NaH, the neutral Na atom loses one electron to form Na+ in NaH while the elemental hydrogen gains one electron and forms H in NaH.
iv. Each of the above steps represents a half reaction which involves electron transfer (loss or gain).
v. Sum of these two half reactions or the overall reaction is a redox reaction.

Question 9.
Define the terms oxidation and reduction in terms of electron transfer.
Answer:
i. The half reaction involving loss of electrons is called oxidation reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 5
ii. The half reaction involving gain of electrons is called reduction reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 6

Question 10.
Define the terms oxidant and reductant in terms of electron transfer.
Answer:

  1. Oxidant: Oxidant or oxidising agent is an electron acceptor.
  2. Reductant: Reductant or reducing agent is an electron donor.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 11.
Identify oxidising and reducing agents in the following reaction.
\(\mathrm{Fe}_{(s)}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Answer:
Fe(s) acts as a reducing agent as it donates electrons while \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) acts as an oxidising agent as it accepts electrons.

Question 12.
Define: Displacement reaction.
Answer:
A reaction in which an ion (or an atom) in a compound is replaced by an ion (or an atom) of another element is called displacement reaction.
e.g. X + YZ → XZ + Y

Question 13.
Draw structure and assign oxidation number to each atom in:
i. Br3O8
ii. C3O2
Answer:
i. Br3O8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 7

ii. C3O2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 8

Question 14.
Deduce the oxidation number of S in the following species:
i. SO2
ii. \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\)
Answer:
i. SO2 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of oxidation numbers of all atoms of SO2 = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of S) + 2 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S + 2 × (- 2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S in SO2 = 0 – (- 4)
∴ Oxidation number of S in SO2 = +4

ii. \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) = – 2
∴ (Oxidation number of S) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S in \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) = – 2 – 4 × (-2) = – 2 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of S in \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) = +6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 15.
Assign oxidation number to each element in the following compounds or ions.
i. KMnO4
ii. K2Cr2O7
iii. Ca3(PO4)2
Answer:
i. KMnO4
Oxidation number of K = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
KMnO4 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of K) + (Oxidation number of Mn) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (+1) + Oxidation number of Mn + 4 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn + 1 – 8 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn – 7 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn in KMnO4 = +7

ii. K2Cr2O7
Oxidation number of K = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
K2Cr2O7 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of K) + 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) + 7 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (+1) + 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) + 7 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) + 2 – 14 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) – 12 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) = +12
∴ Oxidation number of Cr = +12/2
∴ Oxidation number of Cr in K2Cr2O7 = +6

iii. Ca3(PO4)2
Oxidation number of Ca = +2 (∵ Ca is alkaline earth metal.)
Oxidation number of O = -2
Ca3(PO4)2 is a neutral molecule.
Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 3 × (Oxidation number of Ca) + 2 × (Oxidation number of P) + 8 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 3 × (+2)+ 2 × (Oxidation number of P)+ 8 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of P) + 6 – 16 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of P) – 10 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of P) = +10
∴ Oxidation number of P = +10/2
∴ Oxidation number of P in Ca3(PO4)2 = +5

Question 16.
Assign oxidation number to the atoms other than O and H in the following species.
i. \(\mathrm{SO}_{3}^{2-}\)
ii. \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
iii. \(\mathrm{ClO}_{4}^{-}\)
iv. \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\)
v. \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\)
vi. \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\)
vii. SO3
viii. N2O5
Answer:
The oxidation number of O atom bonded to a more electropositive atom is -2 and that of H atom bonded to electronegative atom is +1. Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms in ionic species is equal to charge it carries and that for neutral molecule is zero. Using these values, the oxidation numbers of atoms of the other elements in a given polyatomic species are calculated as follows:
i. \(\mathrm{SO}_{3}^{2-}\)
(Oxidation number of S) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S + 3 × (-2) = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S – 6 = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S = – 2 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of S in \(\mathrm{SO}_{3}^{2-}\) = +4

ii. \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of Br) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = -1
∴ Oxidation number of Br + 3 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Br – 6 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Br = – 1 + 6
Oxidation number of Br in \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\) = +5

iii. \(\mathrm{ClO}_{4}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of Cl) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Cl + 4 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Cl – 8 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Cl = – 1 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of Cl in \(\mathrm{ClO}_{4}^{-}\) = +7

iv. \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\)
(Oxidation number of N) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) = + 1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 4 × (+1) = +1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 4 = + 1
∴ Oxidation number of N = + 1 – 4
∴ Oxidation number of N in \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) = -3

v. \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of N) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 3 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N – 6 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N = – 1 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of N in \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\) = +5

vi. \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of N) + 2 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 2 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N – 4 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N = – 1 + 4
∴ Oxidation number of N in \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\) = +3

vii. SO3
(Oxidation number of S) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S = 0 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of S in SO3 = +6

viii. N2O5
2 × (Oxidation number of N) + 5 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of N) + 5 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of N) – 10 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of N) = 0 + 10
∴ Oxidation number of N = 10/2
∴ Oxidation number of N in N2O5 = +5

Question 17.
Find the oxidation numbers of the underlined species in the following compounds or ions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 9
Answer:
i. P\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of F = -1
P\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of P) + 6 × (Oxidation number of F) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of P + 6 × (-1) = -1
∴ Oxidation number of P – 6 = – 1
Oxidation number of P in P\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) = +5

ii. NaIO3
Oxidation number of Na = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
NaIO3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
(Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of I) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
(+1) + (Oxidation number of I) + 3 × (-2) = 0
Oxidation number of I + 1 – 6 = 0
Oxidation number of I in NaIO3 = +5

iii. NaHCO3
Oxidation number of Na = +1
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
NaHCO3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (+1) + (+1) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C + 2 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C in NaHCO3 = +4

iv. ClF3
Oxidation number of F = -1
ClF3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Cl) + 3 × (Oxidation number of F) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Cl + 3 × (-1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Cl in ClF3 = +3

v. Sb\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of F = -1
Sb\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of Sb) + 6 × (Oxidation number of F) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Sb + 6 × (-1) = -1
∴ Oxidation number of Sb in Sb\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) = +5

vi. NaBH4
Oxidation number of Na =+1
Oxidation number of H = -1 (for Hydride)
NaBH4 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of B) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) = 0
∴ (+1) + (Oxidation number of B) + 4 × (-1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of B + 1 – 4 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of B in NaBH4 = +3

vii. H2PtCl6
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of Cl = -1
H2PtCl6 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of Pt) + 6 × (Oxidation number of Cl) = 0
∴ 2 × (+1) + (Oxidation number of Pt) + 6 × (-1) = 0
(Oxidation number of Pt) + 2 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Pt in H2PtCl6 = +4

viii. H5P3O10
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
H5P3O10 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 5 × (Oxidation number of H) + 3 × (Oxidation number of P) +10 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 5 × (+1) + 3 × (Oxidation number of P) + 10 × (-2) = 0
∴ 3 × (Oxidation number of P) + 5 – 20 = 0
Oxidation number of P = +\(\frac {15}{3}\)
∴ Oxidation number of P in H5P3O10 = +5

ix. V2\(\mathrm{O}_{7}^{4-}\)
Oxidation number of O = -2
V2\(\mathrm{O}_{7}^{4-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 4
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of V) + 7 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 4
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of V) + 7 × (-2) = – 4
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of V) = – 4 + 14
∴ Oxidation number of V = +\(\frac {10}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of V in V2\(\mathrm{O}_{7}^{4-}\) = +5

x. CuSO4
Oxidation number of Cu = +2
Oxidation number of O = -2
CuSO4 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Cu) + (Oxidation number of S) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (+2) + Oxidation number of S + 4 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S + 2 – 8 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S in CuSO4 = +6

xi. Bi\(\mathrm{O}_{3}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of O = -2
Bi\(\mathrm{O}_{3}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of Bi) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Bi + 3 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Bi = – 1 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of Bi in Bi\(\mathrm{O}_{3}^{-}\) = +5

xii. CH3OH
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
CH3OH is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of C) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of C) + 4 × (+1) + (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C + 2 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C in CH3OH = -2

xiii. H2O2
Oxidation number of O = -1 (for peroxide)
H2O2 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + 2 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + 2 × (-1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of H = +\(\frac {2}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of H in H2O2 = +1

xiv. C4H4\(\mathrm{O}_{6}^{2-}\)
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
C4H4\(\mathrm{O}_{6}^{2-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 2
∴ 4 × (Oxidation number of C) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) + 6 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 2
∴ 4 × (Oxidationnumber of C) + 4 × (+1) +6 × (-2) = -2
∴ 4 × (Oxidation number of C) + 4 – 12 = -2
∴ 4 × (Oxidation number of C) = – 2 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of C = +\(\frac {6}{4}\)
∴ Oxidation number of C in C4H4\(\mathrm{O}_{6}^{2-}\) = +1.5

xv. H2As\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
H2As\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of As) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = -1
∴ 2 × (+1) + Oxidation number of As + 4 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of As + 2 – 8 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of As = – 1 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of As in H2As\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) = +5

xvi. Mn(OH)3
Oxidation number of O = -2
Oxidation number of H = +1
Mn(OH)3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Mn) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) + 3 × (Oxidation number of H) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn + 3 × (-2) + 3 × (+1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn – 6 + 3 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn in Mn(OH)3 = +3

xvii. \(\mathrm{I}_{3}^{-}\)
\(\mathrm{I}_{3}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ 3 × Oxidation number of I = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of I in \(\mathrm{I}_{3}^{-}\) = –\(\frac {1}{3}\)

xviii. C2H5OH
Oxidation number of O = -2
Oxidation number of H = +1
C2H5OH is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of C) + 6 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidationnumberof C) + 6 × (+1) + (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of C) = – 4
∴ Oxidation number of C = –\(\frac {4}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of C in C2H5OH = -2

xix. Na2CO3
Oxidation number of Na = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
Na2CO3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (+1) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C + 2 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C in Na2CO3 = +4

xx. I[latex]\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}[/latex]
Oxidation number of O = -2
I\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of I) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of I + 4 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of I = -1 +8
∴ Oxidation number of I in I\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) = +7

xxi. V\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{3-}\)
Oxidation number of O = -2
V\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{3-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 3
∴ (Oxidation number of V) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 3
∴ Oxidation number of V + 4 × (-2) = – 3
∴ Oxidation number of V = -3 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of V in V\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{3-}\) = +5

xxii. Ni2O3
Oxidation number of O = -2
Ni2O3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Ni) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Ni) + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Ni) = +6
∴ Oxidation number of Ni = +\(\frac {6}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of Ni in Ni2O3 = +3

xxiii. K3[Fe(CN)6]
Oxidation number of K = +1
Oxidation number of CN group = -1
K3[Fe(CN)6] is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 3 × (Oxidation number of K) + (Oxidation number of Fe) + 6 × (Oxidation number of CN group) = 0
∴ 3 × (+1) + Oxidation number of Fe + 6 × (-1) = O
∴ Oxidation number of Fe + 3 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Fe in K3[Fe(CN)6] = +3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 18.
Define: Stock notation.
Answer:
Representation in which oxidation number of an atom is denoted by Roman numeral in parentheses after the chemical symbol is called Stock notation. This name was given after the German scientist, Alfred Stock. e.g. Au1+Cl1- → Au(I)Cl

Question 19.
What is the use of Stock notation?
Answer:
The Stock notation is used to specify the oxidation number of the metal.

Question 20.
How will you write Stock notations for the following compounds?
i. AuCl3
ii. SnCl4
iii. SnCl2
iv. MnO2
Answer:
i. AuCl3: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Au}^{3+} \mathrm{Cl}_{3}^{1-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Au(III)Cl3.
ii. SnCl4: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Sn}^{4+} \mathrm{Cl}_{4}^{1-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Sn(IV)Cl4.
iii. SnCl2: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \mathrm{Cl}_{2}^{1-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Sn(II)Cl2.
iv. MnO2: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Mn}^{4+} \mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Mn(IV)O2.

Question 21.
Write the formula for each of the following ionic compounds:
i. Nickel(III) oxide
ii. Tin(IV) chloride
iii. Bismuth(V) chloride
iv. Cobalt(III) chloride
v. Lead(IV) oxide
vi. Chromium(II) chloride
Answer:
i. Ni2O3
ii. SnCl4
iii. BiCl5
iv. CoCl3
v. PbO2
vi. CrCl2

Question 22.
Define the terms oxidation and reduction in terms of oxidation number.
Answer:
i. Oxidation is an increase in the oxidation number of an element in a given substance.
e.g. Fe(s) → \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\)
ii. Reduction is a decrease in the oxidation number of an element in a given substance. e.g. \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) → Cu(s)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 23.
Define the terms oxidant and reductant in terms of oxidation number.
Answer:

  1. Oxidant: Oxidant or oxidising agent is a substance which increases the oxidation number of an element in a given substance, and itself undergoes decrease in oxidation number of a constituent element in it.
  2. Reductant: Reductant or reducing agent is a substance that lowers the oxidation number of an element in a given substance, and itself undergoes an increase in the oxidation number of a constituent element in it.

Question 24.
Identify whether the following reaction is redox or NOT. State oxidant and reductant therein.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 10
Answer:
i. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 11

ii. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 12
iii. The oxidation number of As increases from +3 to +5 and that of Br decreases from +5 to -1. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
iv. The oxidation number of As increases by loss of electrons and therefore, As is a reducing agent and itself is oxidised. On the other hand, the oxidation number of Br decreases and therefore, Br is an oxidising agent and itself is reduced by gain of electrons.
Result:
a. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
b. Oxidant/oxidising agent: \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
c. Reductant/reducing agent: H3AsO3

Question 25.
For the reaction, \(\mathrm{SeO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{SeO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\), complete the following table.

Oxidising agent————–
Reducing agent————–
Oxidised species————–
Reduced species————–

Answer:

Oxidising agentCl2(g)
Reducing agent\(\mathrm{Se} \mathrm{O}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)
Oxidised species\(\mathrm{Se} \mathrm{O}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)
Reduced species\(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Question 26.
Using oxidation number concept, identify the redox reactions, identify oxidizing and reducing agents in case of redox reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 13
Answer:
i. H3PO4(aq) + 3KOH(aq) → K3PO4(aq) + 3H2O(l)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 14
b. Since, the oxidation numbers of all the species remain same, this is NOT a redox reaction.

Result:
The given reaction is NOT a redox reaction.

ii. Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) → ZnCl2((aq)) + H2(g)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 15
b. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 16
c. The oxidation number of Zn increases from 0 to +2 and that of H decreases from +1 to 0. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of other decreases, the reaction is redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Zn increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Zn is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of H decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, H is oxidising an agent and itself is reduced by gain of electrons.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: HCl
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: Zn

iii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 17
c. The oxidation number of Fe increases from +2 to +3 and that of Br decreases from +5 to -1. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Fe increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Fe is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of Br decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, Br is an oxidising an agent and itself is reduced.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: Fe2+

iv. 2Zn(s) + O2(g) → 2ZnO(s)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 18
b. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 19
c. The oxidation number of Zn increases from 0 to +2 and that of O decreases from 0 to -2. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Zn increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Zn is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of O decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, O is an oxidising agent and itself is reduced.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: O2
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: Zn

v. \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(a q)}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(2 q)}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Sn}_{(aq)}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(a \mathrm{q})}^{-}\)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 20
b. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 21
c. The oxidation number of Sn increases from +2 to +4 and that of I decreases from +7 to -1. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Sn increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Sn is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of I decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, I is an oxidising agent and itself is reduced.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: Sn2+
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: \(\mathrm{IO}_{4}^{-}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 27.
Name two methods used to balance redox reactions.
Answer:

  1. Oxidation number method
  2. Half reaction method or ion electrode method

Question 28.
Describe the steps involved in balancing redox reactions by the oxidation number method.
Answer:
i. Step 1: Write the unbalanced equation for redox reaction. Balance the equation for all atoms in the reactions, except H and O. Identify the atoms which undergo change in oxidation number and by how much. Draw the bracket to connect atoms of the elements that changes the oxidation number.

ii. Step 2: Show an increase in oxidation number per atom of the oxidised species and hence, the net increase in oxidation number. Similarly, show a decrease in the oxidation number per atom of the reduced species and the net decrease in oxidation number. Determine the factors which will make the total increase and decrease equal. Insert the coefficients into the equation.

iii. Step 3: Balance oxygen atoms by adding H2O to the side containing less O atoms, one H2O is added for one O atom. Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side having less H atoms.

iv. Step 4: If the reaction occurs in basic medium, then add OH ions equal to the number of H+ ions added in step 3, on both the sides of equation. The H+ and OH ions on same side of reactions are combined to give H2O molecules.

v. Step 5: Check the equation with respect to both, the number of atoms of each element and the charges. It is balanced.
Note: For acidic medium, step 4 is omitted.

Question 29.
Using the oxidation number method write the net ionic equation for the reaction of potassium permanganate, KMnO4, with ferrous sulphate, FeSO4.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)
Answer:
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Mn and Fe, and calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 22
To make the net increase and dicrease equal, we must take 5 atoms of Fe2+
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 3: Balance the ‘O’ atoms by adding 4H2O to the right-hand side.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 8H+ on the left-hand side.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check the two sides for balance of charges and atoms. The net ionic equation obtained in step 4 is the balanced equation.
Hence, balanced equation:
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 30.
Balance the following reaction by oxidation number method.
CuO + NH3 → Cu + N2 + H2O
Answer:
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
CuO + 2NH3 → Cu + N2 + H2O
Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Cu and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 23
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 3 atoms of Cu and 2 atoms of N. (There are already 2 N atoms.)
3CuO + 2NH3 → 3Cu + N2 + H2O
Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 3H2O to the right-hand side.
3CuO + 2NH3 → 3Cu + N2 + 3H2O
Step 4: Charges are already balanced.
Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges. The equation obtained in step 3 is balanced.
Hence, balanced equation: 3CuO + 2NH3 → 3Cu + N2 + 3H2O

Question 31.
Balance the following redox equation by oxidation number method. The reactions occur in acidic medium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 24
Answer:
i. \(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7 \text { (aq) }}^{2-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7 \text { (aq) }}^{2-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to O and Cr. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 25
Since there are two Cr atoms, the net decrease in oxidation number is 6. In order to make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 6 atoms of O i.e., 3H2O2.
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 7H2O to the right-hand side.
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 8H+ on the left-hand side.
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation:
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

ii. \(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{q})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{q})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Ag and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 26
Because net increase is equal to net decrease, multiplying coefficients are not required.

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding H2O to the right-hand side.
\(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 2H+ on the left-hand side.
\(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)
Thus, the equation is balanced with respect to the atoms as well as charges.

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

iii. \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathfrak{a q})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathfrak{a q})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Sn and I. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 27
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 4 atoms of Sn.
\(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 4H2O to the right-hand side.
\(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\text {aq })}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\text {aq })}^{-}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 8H+ on the left-hand side.
\(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

iv. \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Mn and I. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 28
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 29
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 2 atoms of Mn and 3 atoms of I.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(a q)}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 1H2O to the right-hand side.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 2H on the left-hand side.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check two sides for balanced of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Question 32.
Balance the following redox equation in basic medium by oxidation number method:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 30
Answer:
i. \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than 0 and H.
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Zn and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 31
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 2 atoms of Zn.
\(2 \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+2 \mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 9H2O to the left-hand side.
\(2 \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+9 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+2 \mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 4: The medium is basic. To make hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 3H on the right-hand side.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 32

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 33

ii. \(\mathrm{MnCl}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{HO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}(\mathrm{OH})_{3(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{MnCl}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{HO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}(\mathrm{OH})_{3(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Mn and O. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 34
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 35

iii. Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → Cu(s) + N2(g)
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other that O and H.
Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → Cu(s) + N2(g)
Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Cu and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 36
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 37
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 2 atoms of Cu.
2Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → 2Cu(s) + N2(g)
Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 4H20 to the right-hand side.
2Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → 2Cu(s) + N2(g) + 4H2O(l)
Step 4: The equation is balanced for both atoms as well as charges.
Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: 2Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → 2Cu(s) + N2(g) + 4H2O(l)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 33.
Describe the steps involved in balancing redox reactions by ion electron method (Half reaction method).
Answer:
In this method two half equations are balanced separately and then added together to give balanced equation. Following steps are involved.

  • Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction, assign oxidation number to all the atoms in the reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations. One half equation involves increase in oxidation number and another involves decrease in oxidation number (Write two half equations separately).
  • Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance oxygen atom by adding H2O to the side with less O atoms.
  • Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side having less H atoms.
  • Step 4: Balance the charges by adding appropriate number of electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and to the left of reduction half equation.
  • Step 5: Multiply half equation by suitable factors to equalize the number of electrons in two half equations. Add two half equations and cancel the number of electrons on both sides of equation.
  • Step 6: If the reaction occurs in basic medium then add OH ions, equal to number of H+ ions on both sides of equation. The H+ and OH ions on same side of equation combine to give H2O molecules.
  • Check that the equation is balanced in both, the atoms and the charges.

Question 34.
Balance the following unbalanced equation (in acidic medium) by ion electron method (half reaction method).
\(\mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{ClO}_{3(\mathrm{qq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Answer:
Step 1: Write imbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 38

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equations for O atoms by adding H2O to the side with less O atoms. Add 2H2O to left side of oxidation half equation and 1H2O to the right side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 39

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence add 4H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 40

Step 4: Now add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 1 electron to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 41

Step 5: Multiply reduction half equation by 2 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 42
Add two half equations:
\(\mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}\)
The equation is balanced in terms of number of atoms and the charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(\mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}\)

Question 35.
Balance the following unbalanced equation by ion electron method (half reaction method).
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{ClO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
Answer:
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 43

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance the half equation for O atoms by adding H2O to the side with less O atoms. Hence, add 2H2O to the right side of reduction half equation and none to the oxidation half equation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 44

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence add 2H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation and 4H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 45

Step 4: Add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 4 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 46

Step 5: Multiply oxidation half equation by 2 to equalize the number of electrons and then add two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 47

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 36.
Balance the following redox equations by ion-electron (half reaction method).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 48
Answer:
i. \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(\text { acidic })\)
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 50

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding 7H2O to the right side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 51

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 14H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 52

Step 4: Now add 1 electron to the right side of oxidation half equation and 6 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 53

Step 5: Multiply oxidation half equation by 6 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 54

ii. \(\mathrm{SO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}(\text { acidic })\)
Step 1 : Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products in them. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 55

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding 2H2O to the left side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 56

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 4H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 57

Step 4: Now add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 1 electron to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 58

Step 5: Multiply reduction half equation by 2 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 59

iii. \(\mathrm{ClO}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Cr}(\mathrm{OH})_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{CrO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \text {(basic) }\)
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction: Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 60

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding 1H2O to the right side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 61

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 4H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 62

Step 4: Now add 3 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 63

Step 5: Multiply oxidation half equation by 2 and reduction half equation by 3 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 64

Step 6: The reaction takes place in basic medium. 20H ions, equal to the number of H+ ions (2H+ ions) are added on both sides of the equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 65

iv. \(\mathrm{SeO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{SeO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \text {(basic) }\)
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products in them. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 66
Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding H2O to the left side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 67

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 2H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 68

Step 4: Now add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 69

Step 5: There is equal number of electrons in two half equations. Add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 70

Question 37.
Explain displacement reaction in terms of redox reaction by giving example.
Answer:
i. Displacement reaction can be looked upon as redox reaction. Consider the following displacement reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 71
ii. Here, Zn gets oxidized to Zn2+ ion and Cu2+ ions get reduced to metallic Cu. A direct transfer of electron from zinc atom to cupric ions takes place in this case.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 38.
Explain construction of Daniel cell.
Answer:

  • The zinc and copper plates are connected by an electric wire through a switch and voltmeter.
  • The solution in two containers are connected by salt bridge (U-shaped glass tube containing a gel of KCl or NH4NO3 in agar-agar).
  • When switch is on, electrical circuit is complete as indicated by the deflection in the voltmeter.
  • The circuit has two parts, one in the form of electrical wire which allows the flow of electrons and the other in the form of two solutions joined by salt bridge. In solution part of the circuit, the electric current is carried by movement of ions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 72

Question 39.
Explain working of Daniel cell.
Answer:
i. When a circuit is complete, the zinc atoms on zinc plates spontaneously lose electrons which are picked up in the external circuit.
ii. The electrons flow from the zinc plate to copper plate through wire.
iii. Cu2+ ions in the second container receive these electrons through the copper plate and are reduced to copper atoms which get deposited on the copper plate.
iv. Here, zinc plate acts as anode (negative electrode) and the copper plate acts as cathode (positive electrode).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 73
v. Thus, when two half reactions, namely, oxidation and reduction, are allowed to take place in separate containers and provision is made for completing the electrical circuit, electron transfer take place through the circuit.
vi. This results in flow of electric current in the circuit as indicated by deflection in voltmeter.
vii. Thus, in Daniel cell, electricity is generated by redox reaction.

Question 40.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram of Daniel cell.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 74

Question 41.
Chalcopyrite (CuFeS2) is a common ore of copper. Since it has low concentration of copper, the ore is first concentrated through froth floatation process. The concentrated ore is then heated strongly with silicon dioxide (silica) and oxygen in a furnace. The product obtained, copper(I) sulphide, is further converted to copper (99.5% pure) with a final blast of air (O2) during which sulphur dioxide is released as a by-product.
i. Write a balanced reaction for the extraction of copper from copper(I) sulphide.
ii. Which species undergoes an increase in the oxidation state?
iii. Which species accepts electrons?
Answer:
i. Cu2S + O2 → 2Cu + SO2
ii. Sulphur undergoes an increase in the oxidation state from -2 (in Cu2S) to +4 (in SO2).
iii. Copper accepts one electron and undergoes a decrease in the oxidation state from +1(in Cu2S) to 0 (in Cu). Oxygen accepts two electrons and undergoes a decrease in the oxidation state from 0 (in O2) to -2 (in SO2).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 42.
Consider the elements: Cs, Ne, I and F
i. Identify the element that exhibits only negative oxidation state.
ii. Identify the element that exhibits only positive oxidation state.
iii. Identify the element that exhibits both negative as well as positive oxidation state.
iv. Identify the element that exhibits neither the negative nor the positive oxidation state.
Answer:
i. F: It is most electronegative. It shows only a negative oxidation state of -1.
ii. Cs: Alkali metals have only one electron in their valence shell and hence, exhibits only positive (+1) oxidation state.
iii. I: Because of the presence of 7 electrons in its valence shell, I shows negative oxidation state of -1 (to have stable noble gas configuration) and positive oxidation numbers of +1, +3, +5 and +7 because of the presence of d-orbitals.
iv. Ne: It is an inert gas and therefore, does not exhibit negative or positive oxidation state.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Loss of electrons means ………….
(A) reduction
(B) oxidation
(C) precipitation
(D) complexometry
Answer:
(B) oxidation

2. Reduction involves ……………
(A) gain of electrons
(B) addition of oxygen
(C) increase in oxidation number
(D) loss of electron
Answer:
(A) gain of electrons

3. Which of the following statement is INCORRECT?
(A) Oxidant is a substance which increases the oxidation number of other substance.
(B) Reductant is a substance which decreases the oxidation number of other substance.
(C) The oxidation number of oxidant decreases.
(D) In oxidation, there is decrease in oxidation number.
Answer:
(D) In oxidation, there is decrease in oxidation number.

4. Which of the following is an example of oxidation process?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 75
Answer:
(D) \(\mathrm{Li}_{(\mathrm{s})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Li}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

5. Which is the best description of the behaviour of chlorine in the reaction?
H2O + Cl2 → HOCl + HCl
(A) Neither oxidized not reduced
(B) Both oxidised and reduced
(C) Oxidised only
(D) Reduced only
Answer:
(B) Both oxidised and reduced

6. In the reaction,
\(\begin{array}{r} 3 \mathrm{Br}_{2}+6 \mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}+3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \ 5 \mathrm{Br}^{-}+\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}+6 \mathrm{HCO}_{3}^{-} \end{array}\) …………..
(A) Br2 is oxidised and carbonate is reduced
(B) bromine is reduced and water is oxidised
(C) bromine is neither reduced nor oxidised
(D) bromine is both reduced and oxidised
Answer:
(D) bromine is both reduced and oxidised

7. A chemical reaction in which oxidation and reduction processes takes place simultaneously is known as ………… reaction.
(A) redox
(B) precipitation
(C) complexometric
(D) titration
Answer:
(A) redox

8. Which of the following is a redox reaction?
(A) NaCl + KNO3 → NaNO3 + KCl
(B) CaC2O4 + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2C2O4
(C) Mg(OH)2 + 2NH4Cl → MgCl2 + 2NH4OH
(D) Zn + 2AgCN → 2Ag + Zn(CN)2
Answer:
(D) Zn + 2AgCN → 2Ag + Zn(CN)2

9. Oxidation number of metal ion is always …………..
(A) positive
(B) negative
(C) zero
(D) non zero
Answer:
(A) positive

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

10. The oxidation number of oxygen in peroxide is …………..
(A) -2
(B) -1
(C) +1
(D) +2
Answer:
(B) -1

11. The oxidation number of oxygen is …………. in oxygen difluoride.
(A) -2
(B) -1
(C) +2
(D) +1
Answer:
(C) +2

12. Oxidation number of carbon in CH2F2 is ………….
(A) +1
(B) -1
(C) 0
(D) +2
Answer:
(C) 0

13. In calcium hydride (CaH2), the oxidation number of hydrogen is ………….
(A) +1
(B) -1
(C) +2
(D) -2
Answer:
(B) -1

14. The element with atomic number 9 can exhibit oxidation state of …………..
(A) +1
(B) +3
(C) -1
(D) +5
Answer:
(C) -1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

15. The highest and lowest oxidation states possible for Te (group 16) are ……………
(A) +6, -2
(B) +6, 0
(C) +4, -4
(D) +6, -6
Answer:
(A) +6, -2

16. What is the oxidation state of S in Na2S2 ?
(A) +1
(B) -2
(C) -1
(D) 0
Answer:
(C) -1

17. The oxidation state of S in S2O82- is ………….
(A) +2
(B) + 4
(C) +6
(D) + 7
Answer:
(D) + 7

18. The oxidation state of phosphorus in Ba(H2PO2)2 is …………..
(A) +3
(B) +2
(C) +1
(D) -1
Answer:
(C) +1

19. Amongst the following, identify the species having an atom with +6 oxidation state.
(A) \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\)
(B) \(\mathrm{Cr}(\mathrm{OH})_{3}^{6-}\)
(C) \(\mathrm{NiF}_{6}^{2-}\)
(D) CrO2Cl2
Answer:
(D) CrO2Cl2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

20. In which of the following compounds, the oxidation number of carbon is NOT zero?
(A) (CHCl)2
(B) HCHO
(C) CH3COOH
(D) CH2Cl2
Answer:
(C) CH3COOH

21. The oxidation number of S in S8, S2F2 and H2S respectively are ………….
(A) 0, +1, -2
(B) +2, +1, -2
(C) 0, +1, +2
(D) +2, +1, -2
Answer:
(A) 0, +1, -2

22. The coefficients x, y, and z in the following balanced equation
xZn + \(\mathrm{yNO}_{3}^{-}\) + 10H+ → zZn2+ + \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) + 3H2O are …………..
(A) 4, 1, 4
(B) 2, 2, 2
(C) 4, 2, 4
(D) 4, 4, 4
Answer:
(A) 4, 1, 4

23. For the redox reaction:
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}{ }^{-}+\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4}^{2-}+\mathrm{H}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}+\mathrm{CO}_{2}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
The CORRECT coefficients of the reactants in the balanced reaction are ……………
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 76
Answer:
(A)

24. In the reaction
3CuO + 2NH3 → N2 + 3H2O + 3Cu
the change of NH3 to N2 involve ……………..
(A) loss of 6 electrons per mol of N2
(B) loss of 3 electrons per mol of N2
(C) gain of 6 electrons per mole N2
(D) gain of 3 electrons per mole N2
Answer:
(A) loss of 6 electrons per mol of N2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

25. When KMnO4 acts as an oxidizing agent and ultimately forms \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\), MnO2, Mn2O3, and Mn2+, then the number of electrons transferred in each case is …………..
(A) 4, 3, 1, 5
(B) 1, 5, 3, 7
(C) 1, 3, 4, 5
(D) 3, 5, 7, 1
Answer:
(C) 1, 3, 4, 5

26. In electrochemical cell, the magnitude and direction of the electrode potential depends on which of the following?
(A) Nature of metal and ions
(B) Concentration of ions
(C) Temperature
(D) All of these
Answer:
(D) All of these

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 1.
Explain the electronic theory of valence.
Answer:
Electronic theory of valence:

  • The electronic theory of valence was proposed by Kossel and Lewis in 1916.
  • They gave a logical explanation of valence which was based on the inertness of noble gases (that is, the octet rule developed by Lewis).
  • According to Lewis, the atom can be pictured in terms of a positively charged ‘kernel’ (the nucleus plus inner electrons) and outer shell that can accommodate a maximum of eight electrons. This octet of electrons represents a stable electronic arrangement.
  • Thus, according to this theory, during the formation of a chemical bond, each atom loses, gains or shares outer electrons so that it achieves stable octet.
  • The formation of NaCl involves transfer of one electron from sodium (Na) to chlorine (Cl). Na+ and Cl ions are formed which are held together by chemical bond. The formation of H2, F2, Cl2, HCl, etc., involves sharing of a pair of electrons between the atoms. In both cases, each atom attains a stable outer octet of electrons.

Question 2.
Give the significance of octet rule. Explain why this rule is not valid for H and Li atoms.
Answer:
i. Significance: Octet rule is found to be very useful:

  • in explaining the normal valence of elements
  • in the study of the chemical combination of atoms leading to the formation of molecules.

ii. Octet rule is not valid for H and Li atoms. According to octet rule, during the formation of a chemical bond, each atom loses, gains or shares electrons so that it achieves stable octet (eight electrons in the valence shell). However, H and Li atoms tend to have only two electrons in their valence shell similar to that of Helium (1s2), which called duplet. Hence, octet rule is not valid for H and Li atoms.

Question 3.
Define ionic bond.
Answer:
The bond formed by complete transfer of one or more electrons from an electropositive atom to an electronegative atom, leading to formation of ions which are held together by electrostatic attraction is called ionic bond or electrovalent bond.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 4.
Explain the formation of ionic bond in sodium chloride (NaCl).
Answer:
Formation of sodium chloride (NaCl):
i. The electronic configurations of sodium and chlorine are:
Na (Z = 11): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1 or (2, 8, 1)
Cl (Z = 17): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5 or (2, 8, 7)
ii. Sodium has one electron in its valence shell. It has tendency to lose one electron to acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, neon (2, 8).
iii. Chlorine has seven electrons in its valence shell. It has tendency to gain one electron and thereby acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, argon (2, 8, 8).
iv. During the combination of sodium and chlorine atoms, the sodium atom transfers its valence electron to the chlorine atom.
v. Sodium atom changes into Na+ ion while the chlorine atom changes into Cl ion. The two ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction.
vi. The formation of ionic bond between Na and Cl can be shown as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 1

Question 5.
Explain the formation of ionic bonds in calcium chloride (CaCl2).
Answer:
Formation of calcium chloride (CaCl2):
i. The electronic configurations of calcium and chlorine are:
Na (Z = 11): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 or (2, 8, 8, 2)
Cl (Z = 17): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5 or (2, 8, 7)
ii. Calcium has two electrons in its valence shell. It has tendency to lose two electrons to acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, argon (2, 8, 8).
iii. Chlorine has seven electrons in its valence shell. It has tendency to gain one electron and thereby acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, argon (2, 8, 8).
iv. During the combination of calcium and chlorine atoms, the calcium atom transfers its valence electrons to two chlorine atoms.
v. Calcium atom changes into Ca2+ ion while the two chlorine atoms change into two Cl ions. These ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction.
vi. The formation of ionic bond(s) between Ca and Cl can be shown as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 2

Question 6.
What are ionic solids?
Answer:
Ionic solids are solids which contain cations and anions held together by ionic bonds.
e.g. Sodium chloride (NaCl), Calcium chloride (CaCl2)

Question 7.
Define lattice enthalpy.
Answer:
Lattice enthalpy of an ionic solid is defined as the energy required to completely separate one mole of solid ionic compound into the gaseous components.
Note: Lattice enthalpy values of some ionic compounds:

CompoundLattice enthalpy kJ mol1
LiCl853
NaCl788
BeF23020
CaCl22258
AlCl35492

Question 8.
Arrange NaCl, CaCl2 and AlCl3 in increasing order of lattice enthalpy (positive value). Justify your answer.
Answer:
Compounds having cations with higher charge have large lattice enthalpy (higher positive value) than compounds having cations with lower charge.
Hence, the correct order is NaCl < CaCl2 < AlCl3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 9.
Lattice enthalpy of LiF is more than that of NaF. Explain.
Answer:
As the size of the cation decrease, lattice enthalpy increases. Li+ ion is smaller than Na+ ion. Hence, lattice enthalpy of LiF is more than that of NaF.

Question 10.
Define covalent bond.
Answer:
The attractive force which exists due to the mutual sharing of electrons between the two atoms of similar electronegativity or having small difference in electronegativities is called a covalent bond.

Question 11.
Explain the formation of covalent bond in H2 molecule.
Answer:
Formation of H2 molecule:
i. The electronic configuration of H atom is 1s1.
ii. It needs one more electron to complete its valence shell.
iii. When two hydrogen atoms approach each other at a certain internuclear distance, they share their valence electrons.
iv. The shared pair of electrons belongs equally to both the hydrogen atoms. The two atoms are said to be linked by a single covalent bond and a H2 molecule is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 3

Question 12.
Explain the formation of covalent bond in Cl2 molecule.
Answer:
Formation of Cl2 molecule:
i. The electronic configuration of Cl atom is [Ne] 3s2 3p5.
ii. It needs one more electron to complete its valence shell.
iii. When two chlorine atoms approach each other at a certain internuclear distance, they share their valence electrons. In the process, both the atoms attain the valence shell of octet of nearest noble gas, argon.
iv. The shared pair of electrons belongs equally to both the chlorine atoms. The two atoms are said to be linked by a single covalent bond and a Cl2 molecule is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 4

Question 13.
What are the important features of covalent bond?
Answer:

  • Each covalent bond is formed as a result of sharing of electron pair between the two atoms.
  • When a covalent bond is formed, each combining atom contributes one electron to the shared pair.
  • The combining atoms attain the outer shell noble gas configuration as a result of the sharing of electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 14.
Explain the types of covalent bond with suitable examples.
Answer:
The three types of covalent bonds are as follows.
i. Single bond: When two combining atoms share one electron pair, the covalent bond between them is called single bond.
Single bond is observed in number of molecules.
e.g. H2, Cl2, water molecule, etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 5

ii. Double bond: When two combining atoms share two pairs of electrons, the covalent bond between them is called a double bond, e.g. Double bond is present in C2H4 molecule
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 6

iii. Triple bond: When two combining atoms share three pairs of electrons, the covalent bond between them is called a triple bond, e.g. Triple bond is present in N2 molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 7
Note: Formation of covalent bonds in CO2, CCl4 and C2H2:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 8

Question 15.
Distinguish between ionic bond and covalent bond.
Answer:
Ionic bond:

  1. It is formed by the transfer of electrons from one atom to another.
  2. It is formed by the transfer of electrons from one atom to another.
  3. In this, oppositely charged ions are formed.
  4. There are no multiple ionic bonds.
  5. This bond usually exists between metal and non-metal atoms.
  6. e.g. NaCl, CaCl2

Covalent bond:

  1. It is formed by sharing of electrons.
  2. Atoms are held together due to shared pair of electrons.
  3. In this, oppositely charged ions are not formed.
  4. Covalent bonds may be single or double or triple bonds.
  5. This bond usually exists between non-metal atoms.
  6. e.g. H2, Cl2

Question 16.
What are the steps to write Lewis dot structure?
Answer:
Steps to write Lewis dot structures:

  • Add the total number of valence electrons of combining atoms in the molecule.
  • In anions, add one electron for each negative charge.
  • In cations, subtract one electron from valence electrons for each positive charge.
  • Write skeletal structure of the molecule to show the atoms and number of valence electrons forming the single bond between the atoms.
  • Add remaining electron pairs to complete the octet of each atom.
  • If octet is not complete form multiple bonds between the atoms such that octet of each atom is complete.
  • In polyatomic atoms and ions, the least electronegative atom is the central atom.
    e.g. In \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) ion, ‘S’ is the central atom and in \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\), ‘N’ is the central atom.
  • After writing the number of electrons as shared pairs forming single bonds, the remaining electron pairs are used either for multiple bonds or they remain as lone pairs.

Question 17.
Write the Lewis structure of nitrite ion, \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\).
Answer:
Step I: Count the total number of valence electrons of nitrogen atom, oxygen atom and one electron of additional negative charge.
Valence shell configuration of nitrogen and oxygen are:
N ⇒ (2s2 2p3), O ⇒ (2s2 2p4)
The total electrons available are:
5 + (2 × 6) + 1 = 18 electrons
Step II: The skeletal structure of \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\) is written as O N O
Step III: Draw a single bond i.e., one shared electron pair between the nitrogen and each oxygen atoms. Then distribute the remaining electrons to achieve noble gas configuration for each atom. This does not complete the octet of nitrogen.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 9
Hence, there is a multiple bond between nitrogen and one of the oxygen atoms (a double bond). The remaining two electrons constitute a lone pair on nitrogen.
Following are Lewis dot structures of \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 10

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 18.
Write the Lewis structure of CO molecule.
Answer:
Step I: Count number of electrons of carbon and oxygen atoms. The valence shell configuration of carbon and oxygen atoms are: 2s2 2p2 and 2s2 2p4, respectively. The valence electrons available are:
4 + 6=10
Step II: The skeletal structure of CO is written as
C O
Step III: Draw a single bond (One shared electron pair) between C and O and complete the octet on O. The remaining two electrons is a lone pair on C.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 11
The octet on carbon is not complete. Hence, there is a multiple bond between C and O (a triple bond between C and O atom). This satisfies the octet rule for carbon and oxygen atoms.
The Lewis structure of CO molecule is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 12

Question 19.
Explain the term formal charge.
Answer:
i. Formal charge is the charge assigned to an atom in a molecule, assuming that all electrons are shared equally between atoms, regardless of their relative electronegativities.
ii. While determining the best Lewis structure per molecule, the structure is chosen such that the formal charge is as close to zero as possible.
iii. The structure having the lowest formal charge has the lowest energy.
iv. Formal charge is assigned to an atom based on electron dot structures of the molecule/ion.
v. Formal charge on an atom in a Lewis structure of a polyatomic species can be determined using the following formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 13

Question 20.
Explain the calculation of the formal charge on oxygen atoms in case of O3 (ozone) molecule.
Answer:
i. Lewis dot structure of O3 (ozone) molecule is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 14
Three oxygen atoms are present in the O3 molecule and are labelled as 1, 2 and 3.
ii. Formal charges on oxygen atoms labelled as 1, 2, 3 are calculated as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 15
iii. On the basis of the formal charge values, O3 is shown as
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 16
[Note: Indicating the charges on the atoms in the Lewis structure helps in keeping track of the valence electrons in the molecule. Formal charges help in the selection of the lowest energy structure from a number of possible Lewis structures for a given species.]

Question 21.
CO2 can be represented by following three structures:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 17
Calculate the formal charge on each atom in all the three structures of CO2 molecule. Identify the structure with lowest energy.
Answer: Formal charges on atoms labelled as 1, 2, 3 are calculated as shown below:
Structure (I):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 18
Structure (II):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 19
Structure (III):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 20
While determining the best Lewis structure per molecule, the structure is chosen such that the formal charge is as close to zero as possible. The structure having the lowest formal charge has the lowest energy.

In structure (I), the formal charge on each atom is 0 while in structures (II) and (III) formal charge on carbon is 0 while oxygens have formal charge -1 or +1. Hence, the possible structure with the lowest energy will be structure (I). Thus, formal charges help in the selection of the lowest energy structure from a number of possible Lewis structures for a given species.

Question 22.
Find out the formal charges on S, C and N.
(S = C = N) ; (S – C ≡ N) ; (S ≡ C – N)
Answer:
Step I:
Write Lewis dot diagrams for the structures:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 21
Step II:
Assign formal charges for all the atoms:
F.C. = V.E. – N.E. – 1/2 (B.E.)
Structure A:
Formal charge on S = 6 – 4 – 1/2(4) = 0
Formal charge on C = 4 – 0 – 1/2 (8) = 0
Formal charge on N = 5 – 4 – 1/2 (4) = -1
Structure B:
Formal charge on S = 6 – 6 – 1/2(2) = -1
Formal charge on C = 4 – 0 – 1/2 (8) = 0
Formal charge on N = 5 – 2 – 1/2 (6) = 0
Structure C:
Formal charge on S = 6 – 2 – 1/2(6) = +1
Formal charge on C = 4 – 0 – 1/2(8) = 0
Formal charge on N = 5 – 6 – 1/2(2) = -2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 23.
Give the limitations of octet rule:
Answer:
Limitations of octet rule:
i. Octet rule does not explain stability of some molecules.
The octet rule is based on the inert behaviour of noble gases, which have their octet complete i.e., have eight electrons in their valence shell. It is very useful to explain the structures and stability of organic molecules. However, there are many molecules whose existence cannot be explained by the octet theory. The central atoms in these molecules does not have eight electrons in their valence shell, and yet they are stable.
Such molecules can be categorized as having:
a. Incomplete octet
b. Expanded octet
c. Odd electrons

a. Molecules with incomplete octet: e.g. BF3, BeCl2, LiCl
In these covalent molecules, the atoms B, Be and Li have less than eight electrons in their valence shell but these molecules are stable.
Li in LiCl has only two electrons, Be in BeCl2 has four electrons while B in BF3 has six electrons in the valence shell.

b. Molecules with expanded octet: Some molecules like SF6, PCl5, H2SO4 have more than eight electrons around the central atom.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 22

c. Odd electron molecules:
Some molecules like NO (nitric oxide) and NO2 (nitrogen dioxide) do not obey the octet rule. These molecules, have odd number of valence electrons.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 23
ii. The observed shape and geometry of a molecule, cannot be explained, by the octet rule.
iii. Octet rule fails to explain the difference in energies of molecules, though all the covalent bonds are formed in an identical manner, that is, by sharing a pair of electrons. The rule fails to explain the differences in reactivities of different molecules.
Note: Sulphur also forms many compounds in which octet rule is obeyed. For example, in sulphur dichloride, the sulphur atom has eight electrons around it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 24

Question 24.
State the basic idea on which VSEPR theory was proposed by Sidgwick and Powell.
Answer:
Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion (VSEPR) theory is based on the basic idea that the electron pairs on the atoms shown in the Lewis diagram repel each other. In the real molecule, they arrange themselves in such a way that there is minimum repulsion between them.

Question 25.
Give the rules of VSEPR Theory.
Answer:
Rules of VSEPR Theory:
i. Electron pairs arrange themselves in such a way that repulsion between them is minimum.
ii. The molecule acquires minimum energy and maximum stability.
iii. Lone pair of electrons also contribute in determining the shape of the molecule.
iv. Repulsion of other electron pairs by the lone pair (L.P.) stronger than that of bonding pair (B.P.).
Trend for repulsion between electron pair is as follows:
L.P. – L.P. > L.P. – B.P. > B.P. – B.P.
Lone pair-Lone pair repulsion is maximum because this electron pair is under the influence of only one nucleus while the bonded pair is shared between two nuclei.
Thus, the number of lone pair and bonded pair of electrons decide the shape of the molecules. Molecules having no lone pair of electrons have a regular geometry.

Note:
i. Electron pair geometry: The arrangement of electrons around the central atom is called as electron pair geometry. These electron pairs may be shared in a covalent bond or they may be lone pairs.
ii. Geometry of some molecules (having no lone pair of electrons):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 25
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 26
iii. Geometry of some molecules (having one or more lone pairs of electrons):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 27
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 28

Question 26.
Match the following:

MoleculeShape
i.SbF5a.Trigonal bipyramidal
ii.SO2b.Bent
iii.SF4c.Square pyramidal
iv.IF5d.See-saw

Answer:
i – a,
ii – b,
iii – d,
iv – c

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 27.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 30

Question 28.
Explain geometry of NH3 molecule according to VSEPR theory.
Answer:

  • In NH3 molecule, the central atom nitrogen has five electrons in its valence shell. On bond formation with three hydrogen atoms, there are 8 electrons in the valence shell of nitrogen. Out of these, three pairs are bond pairs (N – H covalent bonds) and one forms lone pair. The expected geometry is tetrahedral and bond angle is 109° 28′.
  • There are two types of repulsions between the electron pairs: Lone pair – bond pair and bond pair – bond pair
  • The lone pair – bond pair repulsions are stronger and the bonded pairs are pushed inwards. Thus, reducing the bond angle to 107°18′ and shape of the molecule becomes trigonal pyramidal.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 31

Question 29.
Explain geometry of H2O molecule according to VSEPR theory.
Answer:

  • In H2O molecule, the central atom oxygen has six electrons in its valence shell. On bond formation with two hydrogen atoms, there are 8 electrons in the valence shell of oxygen. Out of these, two pairs are bond pairs and two are lone pairs.
  • Due to lone pair – lone pair repulsion, the lone pairs are pushed towards the bond pairs and bond pair – lone pair repulsions become stronger thereby reducing the H-O-H bond angle from 109° 28′ to 104° 35′ and the geometry of the molecule becomes angular (bent).

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 32

Question 30.
Write the postulates of Valence Bond Theory.
Answer:
Postulates of Valence Bond Theory:

  • A covalent bond is formed when the half-filled valence orbital of one atom overlaps with the half-filled valence orbital of another atom.
  • The electrons in the half-filled valence orbitals must have opposite spins.
  • During bond formation, the half-filled orbitals overlap and the opposite spins of the electrons get neutralized. The increased electron density decreases the nuclear repulsion and energy is released during overlapping of the orbitals.
  • Greater the extent of overlap, stronger is the bond formed. However, complete overlap of orbitals does not take place due to intemuclear repulsions.
  • If an atom possesses more than one unpaired-electrons, then it can form more than one bond. So, number of bonds formed will be equal to the number of half-filled orbitals in the valence shell i.e., number of unpaired electrons.
  • The distance at which the attractive and repulsive forces balance each other is the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of the bonded atoms. At this distance, the total energy of the two bonded atoms is minimum and stability of the molecule is maximum.
  • Electrons which are paired in the valence shell cannot participate in bond formation. However, in an atom if there is one or more vacant orbital present then these electrons can unpair and participate in bond formation provided the energies of the filled and vacant orbitals differ slightly from each other.
  • During bond formation, the ‘s’ orbital which is spherical can overlap in any direction. The ‘p’ orbitals can overlap only in the x, y or z directions. Similarly, ‘d’ and ‘f orbitals are oriented in certain directions in space and overlap only in these directions. Thus, the covalent bond is directional in nature.

Note: In order to explain the covalent bonding, Heitler and London developed the valence bond theory on the basis of wave mechanics. This theory was further extended by Pauling and Slater.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 31.
Explain the formation of hydrogen molecule with the help of potential energy curve.
OR
Explain the formation of H2 on the basis of VBT.
Answer:
Formation of H2 on the basis of VBT:

  • Hydrogen atom has electronic configuration 1s1. It contains one unpaired electron in its valence shell.
  • When the two hydrogen atoms containing unpaired electrons with opposite spins are separated by a large distance, they can neither attract nor repel each other (there are no interactions between them). The energy of the system is the sum of the potential energies of the two atoms which is arbitrarily taken as zero.
  • When the two atoms approach each other, attractive and repulsive forces begin to operate on them. Experimentally, it has been found that during formation of hydrogen molecule, the magnitude of the newly developed attractive forces contributes more than the newly developed repulsive forces. As a result, the potential energy of the system begins to decrease.
  • As the atoms come closer to one another the energy of the system decreases. The overlap of the atomic orbitals increases only up to a certain distance between the two nuclei, where the attractive and repulsive forces balance each other and the system attains minimum energy. At this stage, a stable bond is formed between the two atoms.
  • If the distance between the two atoms is decreased further, the repulsive forces exceed the attractive forces and the energy of the system increases and stability decreases.
  • When two hydrogen atoms with electrons having parallel spin approach each other, the potential energy of the system increases and bond formation does not take place.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 33

Question 32.
Define:
i. Sigma overlap
ii. pi overlap
Answer:
i. Sigma overlap (σ bond): When two half-filled orbitals of two atoms overlap along the internuclear axis, it is called as sigma overlap or sigma bond.
ii. pi overlap (π bond): When two half-filled orbitals of two atoms overlap side-ways (laterally), it is called as π overlap or π bond.

Question 33.
Explain with example:
i. s-s σ overlap
ii. p-p σ overlap
iii. s-p a overlap
Answer:
i. s-s σ overlap:
a. The overlap between two half-filled s orbitals of two different atoms containing unpaired electrons with opposite spins is called s-s overlap.
e.g. Formation of H2 molecule by s-s overlap:
Hydrogen atom (Z = 1) has electronic configuration: 1s1. The 1s1 orbitals of two hydrogen atoms overlap along the internuclear axis to form a σ bond between the atoms in H2 molecule.
b. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 34

ii. p-p σ overlap:
a. This type of overlap takes place when two p orbitals from different atoms overlap along the internuclear axis.
e.g. Formation of F2 molecule by p-p overlap:
Fluorine atom (Z = 9) has electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\).
During the formation of F2 molecule, half-filled 2pz orbital of one F atom overlaps with similar half-filled 2pz orbital containing electron with opposite spin of another F atom axially and a p-p σ bond is formed.
b. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 35

iii. s-p σ overlap:
a. In this type of overlap one half filled s orbital of one atom and one half filled p orbital of another orbital overlap along the internuclear axis.
e.g. Formation of HF molecule by s-p overlap:
Hydrogen atom (Z = 1) has electronic configuration: 1s1 and fluorine atom (Z = 9) has electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\). During the formation of HF molecule, half-filled 1s orbital of hydrogen atom overlaps coaxially with half-filled 2pz orbital of fluorine atom with opposite electron spin and an s-p σ bond is formed.
b. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 36

Question 34.
Explain the formation of π bond with diagram.
OR
Explain π overlap with diagram.
Answer:

  • When two half-filled p orbitals of two atoms overlap side-ways (laterally), it is called π overlap and the bond formed is called π bond.
  • π bond is perpendicular to the intemuclear axis.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 37

Question 35.
Identify the type of bond formed:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 38
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 39
Answer:
i. σ bond
ii. π bond
iii. σ bond
iv. σ bond

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 36.
Explain divalency of beryllium, though number of unpaired electrons in a beryllium atom is zero.
Answer:
Beryllium (Z = 4) has electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 in its ground state.
When one of the 2s electrons of Be is promoted to the vacant 2p orbital, the electronic configuration of Be in its excited state becomes 1s2 2s1 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\). This is called formation of an excited state and it has two unpaired electrons. Hence, though the number of unpaired electrons in the ground state of Be atom is zero, beryllium shows divalency.

Question 37.
Define the term hybridization.
Answer:
Hybridization is defined as the process of mixing of valence orbitals of same atom and recasting them into equal number of new equivalent orbitals (hybrid orbitals).

Question 38.
Explain in detail the steps involved in hybridization.
Answer:
Steps involved in hybridization:
i. Formation of the excited state:
a. The paired electrons in the ground state are uncoupled and one electron is promoted to the vacant orbital having slightly higher energy.
b. Now, total number of half-filled orbitals is equal to the valency of the element in the stable compound, e.g. In BeF2, valency of Be is two. In the excited state, one electron from 2s orbital is uncoupled and promoted to 2p orbital.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 40

ii. Mixing and recasting:

  • In this step, the two ‘s’ and ‘p’ orbitals having slightly different energies mix with each other.
  • Redistribution of electron density and energy takes place and two new orbitals having exactly same shape and energy are formed.
  • These new orbitals arrange themselves in space in such a way that there is minimum repulsion and maximum separation between them. e.g. During formation of sp hybrid orbitals as in Be, the two sp hybrid orbitals form an angle of 180° with each other.

Question 39.
List the important conditions required for hybridization.
Answer:
Conditions for hybridization:

  • Orbitals belonging to the same atom can participate in hybridization.
  • Orbitals having nearly same energy can undergo hybridization.

[Note: 2s and 2p orbitals of the same atom undergo hybridization but 3s and 2p orbitals of the same atom do not.]

Question 40.
Enlist the characteristic features of hybrid orbitals.
Answer:
Characteristic features of hybrid orbitals:

  • Number of hybrid orbitals formed is exactly the same as the participating atomic orbitals.
  • They have same energy and shape.
  • Hybrid orbitals are oriented in space in such a way that there is minimum repulsion and thus are directional in nature.
  • The hybrid orbitals are different in shape from the participating atomic orbitals, but they bear the characteristics of the atomic orbitals from which they are derived.
  • Each hybrid orbitals can hold two electrons with opposite spins.
  • A hybrid orbital has two lobes on the two sides of the nucleus. One lobe is large and the other small.
  • Covalent bonds formed by hybrid orbitals are stronger than those formed by pure orbitals, because the hybrid orbital has electron density concentrated on the side with a larger lobe and the other is small allowing greater overlap of the orbitals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 41.
Explain with diagrams:
i. sp3 hybridization
ii. sp2 hybridization
iii. sp hybridization
Answer:
i. sp3 hybridization:
In this type, one s and three p orbitals having comparable energy mix and recast to form four sp3 hybrid orbitals, ‘s’ orbital is spherically symmetrical while the px, py, pz, orbitals have two lobes and are directed along x, y and z axes, respectively.

The four sp3 hybrid orbitals formed are equivalent in energy and shape. They have one large lobe and one small lobe. They are at an angle of 109° 28′ with each other in space and point towards the comers of a tetrahedron. CH4, NH3, H2O are examples where the orbitals on central atom undergo sp3 hybridization.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 41

ii. sp2 hybridization:
This hybridization involves the mixing of one s and two p orbitals to give three sp2 hybrid orbitals of same energy and shape. The three orbitals are maximum apart and oriented at an angle of 120° and are in one plane. The third p orbital does not participate in hybridization and remains at right angles to the plane of the sp2 hybrid orbitals. BF3, C2H4 molecules are examples of sp2 hybridization.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 42

iii. sp hybridization:
In this type, one s and one p orbital undergo mixing and recasting to form two sp hybrid orbitals of same energy and shape. The two hybrid orbitals are placed at an angle of 180°. Other two p orbitals do not participate in hybridization and are at right angles to the hybrid orbitals. For example, BeCl2 and acetylene molecule (HC ≡ CH).
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 43

Question 42.
Explain the formation of an ammonia molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of an ammonia (NH3) molecule on the basis of sp3 hybridization:
i. Ammonia molecule (NH3) has one nitrogen atom and three hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of nitrogen (Z = 7) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\)
Electronic configuration of nitrogen:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 44
iii. The ground state electronic configuration explains the observed valency of nitrogen in NH3 which is three.
iv. The 2s, 2px, 2py and 2pz orbitals of nitrogen atom mix and recast to form four sp3 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energy. These orbitals are tetrahedrally oriented in space. One of the sp3 hybrid orbital contains a lone pair of electrons.
v. Three half-filled sp3 hybrid orbitals of N atom overlap axially with half-filled 1s orbital of three different hydrogen atoms to form three N-H (sp3-s) sigma covalent bonds.
vi. Since, there is one lone pair of electrons in one of the sp3 hybrid orbitals of nitrogen, there is repulsion between lone pair and bonding pair of electrons. As a result, the H-N-H bond angle is reduced from regular tetrahedral angle 109° 28′ to 107° 18′. Geometry of NH3 molecule is pyramidal or distorted tetrahedral.

Question 43.
Explain the formation of water (H2O) molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of water (H2O) molecule on the basis of sp3 hybridization:
i. Water molecule (H2O) has one oxygen atom and two hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of oxygen (Z = 8) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\).
Electronic configuration of oxygen:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 45
iii. The ground state electronic configuration explains the observed valency of oxygen in H2O molecule which is 2.
iv. The 2s, 2px, 2py and 2pz orbitals of oxygen atom mix and recast to form four sp3 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energy. These orbitals are tetrahedrally oriented in space. Two of the sp hybrid orbitals contain lone pair of electrons.
v. Two half-filled sp3 hybrid orbitals of O atom overlap axially with half-filled 1s orbitals of two different hydrogen atoms to fonn two O-H (sp3-s) sigma covalent bonds.
vi. Since, there are two lone pairs of electrons in two of the sp3 hybrid orbitals of oxygen, there is repulsion between lone pair and bonding pair of electrons. As a result, the H-O-H bond angle is reduced from regular tetrahedral angle 109°28′ to 104°35′. The geometry of H2O molecule is angular or V shaped.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 46

Question 44.
Explain the formation of an ethene molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of an ethene (ethylene) molecule on the basis of sp2 hybridization:
i. Ethene molecule (C2H4) has two carbon atoms and four hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of C (Z = 6) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of carbon:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 47
iii. One electron from 2s orbital of each carbon atom is excited to the 2pz orbital. Then each carbon atom undergoes sp2 hybridization.
iv. One ’s’ orbital and two ‘p’ orbitals on carbon hybridize to form three sp2 hybrid orbitals of equal energy and symmetry.
v. Two sp2 hybrid orbitals overlap axially two ‘s’ orbitals of hydrogen to form sp2-s σ bond. The unhybridized ‘p’ orbitals on the two carbon atoms overlap laterally to form a π bond. Thus, the C2H4 molecule has four sp2-s σ bonds, one sp2-sp2 σ bond and one p-p π bond.
vi. Each H-C-H and H-C-C bond angle in ethene molecule is 120°. All the six atoms in ethene (ethylene) molecule are in one plane. Geometry of the molecule at each carbon atom is trigonal planar.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 48

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 45.
Explain the formation of boron trifluoride on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of boron trifluoride on the basis of sp2 hybridization:
i. Boron trifluoride (BF3) has one boron atom and three fluorine atoms.
ii. Observed valency of boron in BF3 molecule is three and its geometry is trigonal planar. This can be explained on the basis of sp2 hybridization.
iii. The ground state electronic configuration of B (Z = 5) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{0}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of boron:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 49
iv. One electron from 2s orbital of boron atom is uncoupled and promoted to vacant 2py orbital.
v. The three orbitals i.e. 2s, 2px of and 2py of boron undergoes sp2 hybridization to form three sp2 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energy, which are oriented along the three comers of an equilateral triangle making an angle of 120°.
vi. Each sp2 hybrid orbital of boron atom having unpaired electron overlaps axially with half-filled 2pz orbital of fluorine atom containing electron with opposite spin to form three B-F sigma bonds by sp2-p type of overlap.
vii. Each F-B-F bond angle in BF3 molecule is 120°. The geometry of BF3 molecule is trigonal planar.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 50

Question 46.
Explain the formation of an acetylene molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of acetylene (ethyne) molecule on the basis of sp hybridization:
i. Acetylene molecule (C2H2) has two carbon atoms and two hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of C (Z = 6) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of carbon:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 51
iii. Each carbon atom undergoes sp hybridization. One s and one p orbitals mix and recast to give two sp hybrid orbitals arranged at 180° to each other.
iv. Out of the two sp hybrid orbitals of carbon atom, one overlaps axially with s orbital of hydrogen while the other sp hybrid orbital overlaps with sp hybrid orbital of other carbon atom to form the sp-sp σ bond. The C H σ bond is formed by sp-s overlap.
v. The remaining two unhybridized p orbitals overlap laterally to form two p-p π bonds. So, there are three bonds between the two carbon atoms: one C-C σ bond (sp-sp) overlap, two C-C π bonds (p-p) overlap. There are two sp-s σ bonds in acetylene (one between each C and H).
vi. Each H-C-C bond angle in ethyne molecule is 180°. All the four atoms in ethyne molecule are in a straight line. The geometry of acetylene molecule is linear.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 52

Question 47.
Explain the formation of BeCl2.
Answer:
Formation of BeCl2:
i. BeCl2 molecule has one Be atom and two chlorine atoms.
ii. Electronic configuration of Be is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of beryllium:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 53
iii. The 2s and 2pz orbitals undergo sp hybridization to form two sp hybrid orbitals oriented at 180° with each other. 2pz orbitals of two chlorine atoms overlap with the sp hybrid orbitals to form two sp-p σ bonds.
Cl – Be – Cl bond angle is 180°. The geometry of the molecule is linear.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 54

Question 48.
Match the following:

MoleculeHybridization and bond angle
i.Watera.Sp2, 120°
ii.Boron trifluorideb.Sp3, 104.5°
iii.Beryllium fluoridec.Sp3, 109.5°
iv.Methaned.Sp, 180°

Answer:
i – b
ii – a
iii – d
iv – c

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 49.
Give the importance of valence bond theory.
Answer:
Valence Bond theory introduced five new concepts in chemical bonding:

  • Delocalization of electron over the two nuclei
  • Shielding effect of electrons
  • Covalent character of bond
  • Partial ionic character of a covalent bond
  • The concept of resonance and connection between resonance energy and molecular stability

Question 50.
What are the limitations of valence bond theory?
Answer:
Limitations of valence bond theory:

  • Valence Bond theory explains only the formation of covalent bond in which a shared pair of electrons comes from two bonding atoms. However, it offers no explanation for the formation of a coordinate covalent bond in which both the electrons are contributed by one of the bonded atoms.
  • Oxygen molecule is expected to be diamagnetic according to this theory. The two atoms in oxygen molecule should have completely filled electronic shells which give no unpaired electrons to the molecule making it diamagnetic. However, experimentally the molecule is found to be paramagnetic having two unpaired electrons. Thus, this theory fails to explain paramagnetism of oxygen molecule.
  • Valence bond theory does not explain the bonding in electron deficient molecules like B2H6 in which the central atom possesses a smaller number of electrons than required for an octet of electron.

Question 51.
What are the two ways in which two atomic orbitals combine to form molecular orbitals (MOs)?
Answer:
Two atomic orbitals can combine in two ways to form molecular orbitals:
i. By addition of their wave functions.
ii. By subtraction of their wave functions.
Addition of the atomic orbtials wave functions results in formation of a molecular orbital which is lower in energy than atomic orbitals and is termed as Bonding Molecular Orbital (BMO). Subtraction of the atomic orbitals results in the formation of a molecular orbital which is higher in energy than the atomic orbitals and is termed as Antibonding Molecular Orbital (AMO).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 55

Question 52.
State True or False. Correct the false statement.
i. According to MO theory, the formation of molecular orbitals from atomic orbitals is expressed in terms of Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals (LCAO).
ii. An MO contains maximum two electrons with opposite spins.
iii. Interference of electron waves of combining atoms can only be constructive.
iv. In bonding molecular orbital, the large electron density is observed between the nuclei of the bonding atoms than the individual atomic orbitals.
v. In the antibonding molecular orbital, the electron density is nearly zero between the nuclei.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False
Interference of electron waves of combining atoms can be constructive or destructive.
iv. True
v. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 53.
What are the conditions required for linear combination of atomic orbitals to form molecular orbitals?
Answer:
The following conditions are required for the linear combination of atomic orbitals (LCAO) to form molecular orbitals:
i. The combining atomic orbitals must have comparable energies.
So, Is orbitals of one atom can combine with 1 s orbital of another atom but not with 2s orbital, because energy of 2s orbital is much higher than that of 1 s orbital.

ii. The combining atomic orbitals must have the same symmetry along the molecular axis. Conventionally, z axis is taken as the internuclear axis. So even if atomic orbitals have same energy but their symmetry is not same they cannot combine. For example, 2s orbital of an atom can combine only with 2pz orbital of another atom, and not with 2px or 2py orbital of that atom because the symmetries are not same. pz is symmetrical along z axis while px is symmetrical along x axis.

iii. The combining atomic orbitals must overlap to the maximum extent. Greater the overlap, greater is the electron density between the nuclei and so stronger is the bond formed.

Question 54.
Explain and draw an energy level diagram obtained by the linear combination of two 1s atomic orbitals.
Answer:
The s-orbitals are spherically symmetrical along x, y and z axis. Two Is atomic orbitals combine to form σ 1s (bonding molecular orbital) and σ*1s (antibonding molecular orbital). Both the a bonding and σ* antibonding orbitals are symmetrical along the bond axis.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 56
[Note: If we consider ‘z’ to be internuclear axis then linear combination of pz orbitals from two atoms can form σ 2pz bonding σ*(2pz) molecular orbitals.]

Question 55.
Explain the formation of π and π* molecular orbitals with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
When the atomic orbitals overlap laterally, a pi (π) molecular orbital is formed.
The px and py orbitals are not symmetrical along the bond axis. They have a positive lobe above the axis and negative lobe below the axis. Hence, linear combination of such orbitals leads to the formation of molecular orbitals with positive and negative lobes above and below the bond axis. These are designed as π bonding and π antibonding orbitals. The electron density in such π orbitals is concentrated above and below the bond axis. The π molecular orbitals has a node between the nuclei.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 57

Question 56.
Write the increasing order of energies of molecular orbitals in various diatomic molecules of second row elements.
Answer:
The increasing order of energies of molecular orbitals for molecules (except O2 and F2) is:
σ1s < σ*1s < σ2s < σ*2s < (π2px = π2py) < σ2pz < (π*2px = π*2py) < σ*2pz
The increasing order of energy of molecular orbitals for diatomic molecules like O2 and F2 is:
σ1s < σ*1s < σ2s < σ*2s < σ2pz < (π2px = π2py) < (π*2px = π*2py) < σ*2pz

Question 57.
Explain briefly the information provided by the electronic configuration of molecules.
Answer:
The electronic configuration of molecules provides the following information:

  • Stability of molecules: If the number of electrons in bonding MOs is greater than the number in antibonding MOs the molecule is stable.
  • Magnetic nature of molecules: If all MOs in a molecule are completely filled with two electrons each, the molecule is diamagnetic (i.e., repelled) by magnetic field. However, if at least one MO is half-filled with one electron, the molecule is paramagnetic (i. e., attracted by magnetic field).
  • Bond order of molecule: The bond order of the molecule can be calculated from the number of electrons in bonding MOs (Nb) and antibonding MOs (Na).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 58.
What are the key ideas of MO theory?
OR
What are the salient features of MO theory?
Answer:
Key ideas of MO Theory:

  • MOs in molecules are similar to AOs of atoms. Molecular orbital describes region of space in the molecule representing the probability of an electron.
  • MOs are formed by combining AOs of different atoms. The number of MOs formed is equal to the number of AOs combined.
  • Atomic orbitals of comparable energies and proper symmetry combine to form molecular orbitals.
  • MOs those are lower in energy than the starting AOs are bonding MOs and those higher in energy are antibonding MOs.
  • The electrons are filled in MOs beginning with the lowest energy.
  • Only two electrons occupy each molecular orbital and they have opposite spins, that is, their spins are paired.
  • The bond order of the molecule can be calculated from the number of bonding and antibonding electrons.

Question 59.
Explain the formation of the following molecules on the basis of MOT. Also find the bond order.
i. H2
ii. Li2
iii. N2
iv. O2
v. F2
Answer:
i. Hydrogen molecule (H2):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 58
a. Hydrogen atom (Z = 1) has electronic configuration as 1s1.
b. Hydrogen atom contains one electron, hence hydrogen molecule which is diatomic contains two electrons.
c. Linear combination of two 1s atomic orbitals gives rise to two molecular orbitals σ1s and σ*1s.
d. The two electrons from the hydrogen atoms occupy the σ1s molecular orbital and σ*1s remains vacant.
e. Thus, electronic configuration of H2 molecule is σ1s2.
f. Since, no unpaired electron is present in hydrogen molecule, it is diamagnetic.
g. There are no electrons in the antibonding molecular orbital (σ*1s).
h. The bond order of H2 molecule is
Bond order = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{b}}-\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2}=\frac{2-0}{2}\) = 1
Thus, a single covalent bond is present between two hydrogen atoms.
[Note: The bond length is 74 pm and the bond dissociation energy is 438 kJ mol-1.]

ii. Lithium molecule (Li2):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 59
a. Lithium atom (Z = 3) has electronic configuration as 1s2 2s1.
b. Lithium atom has 3 electrons, hence Li2 molecule has 6 electrons.
c. Linear combination of four atomic orbitals gives rise to four molecular orbitals namely σ1s, σ*1s, σ2S and σ*2s.
d. The electronic configuration of Li2 molecule is (σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2 (σ2s)2.
e. Since no unpaired electron is present in lithium molecule, it is diamagnetic.
f. Bond order of Li2 molecule
\(=\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{b}}-\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2}=\frac{4-2}{2}=1\)
Thus, a single covalent bond is present between two Li atoms. Hence, Li2 is a stable molecule.

iii. Nitrogen molecule (N2):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 60
a. Nitrogen atom (Z = 7) has electronic configuration as 1s2 2s2 2p3.
b. Nitrogen atom contains 7 electrons, hence nitrogen molecule contains 14 electrons.
c. Linear combination of atomic orbitals gives rise to different molecular orbitals.
d. The electronic configuration of N2 molecule is
N2: (σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2 (σ2s)2 (σ*2s)2 (π2px)2 (π2py)2 (σ2pz)2
e. Since N2 molecule does not have unpaired electron, it is diamagnetic.
f. Bond order of N2 molecule
\(=\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{b}}-\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2}=\frac{10-4}{2}=3\)
Thus, there are three bonds in N2 molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 60.
Study the following tables showing bond enthalpies of single and multiple bonds.

BondΔaH/kJ mol-1
C-H400-415
N-H390
O-H460-464
C-C345
C-N290-315
C-O355-380
C-Cl330
BondΔaH/kJ mol-1
C-Br275
O-O175-184
C=C610-630
C≡C835
C=O724-757
C≡N854

i. Among single bonds, which bond is the strongest?
ii. How is bond enthalpy related to bond strength?
Answer:
i. Among single bonds, O-H bond is the strongest.
ii. Larger the bond enthalpy, stronger is the bond.

Question 61.
Write a short note on bond length.
Answer:
Bond length:

  • Bond length is defined as the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of two covalently bonded atoms in a molecule.
  • Each atom of the bonded pair contributes to the bond length.
  • Bond length depends upon the size of atoms and multiplicity of bonds. It increases with increase in size of atom and decreases with increase in multiplicity of bond.
    e.g. C – C single bond is longer than C ≡ C triple bond.
  • Bond lengths are measured by X-ray and electron diffraction techniques.

Question 62.
Cl-Cl covalent bond length is smaller than Br-Br covalent bond length. Explain.
Answer:
Bond length increases with increase in size of atom. Cl atom is smaller than Br atom. Hence, Cl-Cl covalent bond length is smaller than Br-Br covalent bond length.

Question 63.
Arrange the following bonds in decreasing order of bond strength: C-N, C=N, C≡N
Answer:
C≡N > C=N > C-N
Note: Average bond lengths for some single, double and triple bonds:

Type of bond

Covalent bond length (pm)

O-H96
C-H107
N-O136
C-O143
C-N143
C-C154
C=C121
N=O122
C=C133
C=N138
C≡N116
C≡C120
Type of bond

Covalent bond length (pm)

H2(H-H)74
F2(F-F)144
Cl2(Cl-Cl)199
Br2(Br-Br)228
I2(I-I)267
N2(N≡N)109
O2(O-O)121
HF (H-F)92
HCl (H-Cl)127
HBr (H-Br)141
HI (H-I)160

Question 64.
Write a short note on bond order.
Answer:
i. According to the Lewis theory, bond order is given by the number of bonds between the two atoms in a molecule.
e.g. a. In hydrogen molecule, bond order between hydrogen atoms is one as one electron pair is shared.
b. In oxygen molecule, bond order between oxygen atoms is two as two electron pairs are shared.
c. In acetylene molecule, bond order between two carbon atoms is three as three electron pairs are shared.

ii. The isoelectronic molecules and ions have identical bond orders.
e.g. a. The bond order of F2 and \(\mathrm{O}_{2}{ }^{2-}\) is one.
b. The bond order of N2, CO and NO+ is 3.

iii. As the bond order increases, the bond enthalpy increases and bond length decreases.
iv. With the help of bond order, the stability of a molecule can be predicted.
[Note: N2 molecule has bond enthalpy of 946 kJ mol-1. It is one of the highest for diatomic molecules.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 65.
Explain how polarity (ionic character) is developed in a covalent bond.
Answer:
i. Covalent bonds are formed between two atoms of the same or different elements.
ii. When a covalent bond is formed between atoms of same element such as H-H, F-F, Cl-Cl, etc., the shared pair of electrons is attracted equally to both atoms and is situated midway between two atoms. Such covalent bond is termed as nonpolar covalent bond.
iii. When a covalent bond is formed between two atoms of different elements that have different electronegativities, the shared electron pair does not remain at the centre. The electron pair is pulled towards the more electronegative atom resulting in the separation of charges. This give rise to dipole. The more electronegative atom acquires a partial -ve charge and the other atom gets a partial +ve charge. Such a bond is called as polar covalent bond. The examples of polar molecules include HF, HC1, etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 61
Fluorine is more electronegative than hydrogen, therefore, the shared electron pair is more attracted towards fluorine and the atoms acquire partial +ve and -ve charges, respectively.
iv. Polarity of the covalent bond increases as the difference in the electronegativity between the bonded atoms increases. When the difference in electronegativities of combining atom is about 1.7, ionic percentage in the covalent bond is 50%.

Question 66.
Define and explain the term dipole moment.
Answer:
i. Dipole moment (μ) is the product of the magnitude of charge and distance between the centres of +ve and -ve charges.
ii. It is given by, µ = Q × r
where, Q = charge, r = distance of separation.
iii. Unit of dipole moment is Debye (D).
iv. Dipole moment being a vector quantity is represented by a small arrow with the tail on the positive centre and head pointing towards the negative centre.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 62
Note: 1 D = 3.33564 × 10-30 C m
where C is coulomb and m is meter.

Question 67.
Dipole moment in case of BeF2 is zero. Explain.
Answer:

  • Dipole moment is a vector quantity. Therefore, the resultant dipole moment of a molecule is the vector sum of dipole moments of various bonds in the molecule.
  • In BeF2 molecule, Be-F bond is polar and has a bond dipole moment.
  • BeF2 is a linear molecule with two Be-F bonds oriented at 180° (opposite to each other).
  • The two bond dipoles are equal in magnitude and act in opposite direction to cancel each other. Therefore, the net dipole moment in case of BeF2 is zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 63

Question 68.
Dipole moment in case of BF3 is zero. Explain.
Answer:
i. Dipole moment is a vector quantity. Therefore, the resultant dipole moment of a molecule is the vector sum of dipole moments of various bonds in the molecule.
ii. In BF3 molecule, B-F bond is polar and has a bond dipole moment.
iii. Also, in BF3, the three B-F bonds are oriented at an angle of 120° to one another.
iv. The resultant of any two bond moments is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to that of third. Hence, the net sum is zero and the dipole moment of tetra-atomic BF3 molecule is zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 64

Question 69.
Dipole moment of H2O is higher than that of NH3. Explain.
Answer:
In both NH3 and H2O, the central atom undergoes sp3 hybridization. In both the molecules, the orbital dipole due to the lone pair increases the effect of resultant dipole moment. However, in NH3, nitrogen has only one lone pair while in H2O, oxygen has two lone pairs. Hence, dipole moment of H2O is higher than that of NH3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 65

Question 70.
Dipole moment of NF3 is less than that of NH3, even though N-F bond is more polar than N-H bond. Explain.
Answer:

  • Both NH3 and NF3 have pyramidal structure with a lone pair on the N atom. In NF3, F is more electronegative than N while in NH3, N is more electronegative.
  • In NH3, the orbital dipole due to the lone pair is in the same direction as the resultant dipole moment of N-H bonds, whereas in NF3 the orbital dipole is in the direction opposite to the resultant dipole moment of three N-F bonds.
  • The orbital dipole because of lone pair decreases the effect of the resultant N-F bond moments, which results in the low dipole moment of NF3 (0.8 × 10-30 C m) as compared to NH3 (4.90 × 10-30 C m).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 66

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 71.
CHCl3 is polar. Explain.
Answer:
In CHCl3, the dipoles are not equal and do not cancel each other. Hence, CHCl3 is polar with a non-zero dipole moment.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 67
Note: Dipole moments and geometry of some molecules are given in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 68

Question 72.
Explain Fajan’s rule with suitable examples.
Answer:
Fajan’s rule:
i. Smaller the size of the cation and larger the size of the anion, greater is the covalent character of the ionic bond. For example, Li+ Cl is more covalent than Na+Cl. Similarly, Li+I is more covalent than Li+Cl.

ii. Greater the charge on cation, more is covalent character of the ionic bond. For example, covalent character of AlCl3, MgCl2 and NaCl decreases in the following order Al3+(Cl)3 > Mg2+(Cl)2 > Na+ Cl

iii. A cation with the outer electronic configuration of the s2p6d10 type possesses greater polarising power compared to the cation having the same size and same charge but having outer electronic configuration of s2p6 type.

This is because d electrons of the s2p6d10 shell screen nuclear charge less effectively compared to s and p electrons of s2p6 shell. Hence, the effective nuclear charge in a cation having s2p6d10 configuration is greater than that of the one having s2p6 configuration. For example: Cu+Cl is more covalent than Na+Cl. Here,
(Cu+ = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10; Na+ = 1s2 2s2 2p6)

Question 73.
Explain resonance with respect to \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\) ion.
Answer:
i. Three structures written for \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\) as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 69
ii. Each structure differs from the other only in the position of electrons without changing positions of the atoms. None of these individual structures is adequate to explain the properties of \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\).
iii. The actual structure of \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\) is a combination of three Lewis structures and is called as the resonance hybrid.
iv. Energy of the resonance hybrid structure is less than the energy of any single canonical form. Hence, resonance stabilizes certain polyatomic molecules or ions.
v. The average of all resonating structures contributes to overall bonding characteristic features of the molecule or ion.

Question 74.
Explain O3 molecule is the resonance hybrid.
Answer:
Ozone is a resonance hybrid of structures I and II. The structures I and II are canonical forms while structure III is a resonance hybrid. The energy of structure III is less than that of I and II.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 70

Question 75.
Define resonance energy.
Answer:
Resonance energy is defined as the difference in energy of the most stable contributing structure and the resonating forms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 76.
Write the resonance structures of \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\) ion.
Answer:
Resonance structures of \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\) :
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 71

Question 77.
A student represents the Lewis dot structure of AlCl3 molecule as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 72
i. Is the representation correct? Justify your answer.
ii. If the chlorine atoms are replaced by bromine atoms, what will be the number of electrons present in the valence shell of aluminium?
Answer:
i. No, the representation is incorrect. There will be no lone pair of electrons on aluminium.
ii. The number of electrons present in the valence shell of aluminium will be six.

Question 78.
Below is an incomplete Lewis structure for glycine. Complete the following Lewis structure and answer the following questions. (Hint: Add lone pairs and multiple bonds to the structure below to give each atom a formal charge of zero.)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 73
i. How many lone pairs of electrons are present on N-atom in the structure?
ii. How many pi bonds are present in the structure?
iii. How many sigma bonds are present in the structure?
Answer:
The correct Lewis structure is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 74
i. The number of lone pairs of electrons on N-atom is 1.
ii. The number of pi bonds in the structure is 1.
iii. The number of sigma bonds in the structure is 9.

Question 79.
Consider the following four species and answer the below given questions.
\(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\), O2 \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\), \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\)
i. What is the bond order of \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) ?
ii. Which species is least stable?
Answer:
i. Electronic configuration of \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) can be given as:
(σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2 (σ2s)2 (σ*2s)2 (σ2pz)2 (π2px)2 (π2py)2 (π*2px)1 (π*2py)0
∴ Bond order = \(\frac {1}{2}\) (10 – 5) = 2.5

ii. Stability of the molecule or species ∝ Bond order
Bond order decreases as: \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) > O2 > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\)
∴ Stability decreases as: \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) > O2 > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\)
Hence, least stable species is \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The CORRECT Lewis structure of CO molecule is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 75
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 76

2. Which of the following molecule does NOT obey octet rule?
(A) BF3
(B) CO2
(C) H2O
(D) N2
Answer:
(A) BF3

3. In BF3, bond angle is .
(A) 90°
(B) 109°
(C) 120°
(D) 180°
Answer:
(C) 120°

4. Identify the geometry represented by the following diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 77
(A) Trigonal bipyramidal
(B) T-shape
(C) square planar
(D) square pyramidal
Answer:
(D) square pyramidal

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

5. The geometry of H2S is ………….
(A) tetrahedral
(B) angular
(C) linear
(D) trigonal planar
Answer:
(B) angular

6. What will be the shape of molecule whose central atom is associated with 3 bonds and one lone pair?
(A) Trigonal pyramidal
(B) Tetrahedral
(C) Square planar
(D) Triangular planar
Answer:
(A) Trigonal pyramidal

7. Pair of molecules having identical geometry is …………..
(A) BF3, NH3
(B) BF3, AlF3
(C) BeF2, H2O
(D) BCl3, PCl3
Answer:
(B) BF3, AlF3

8. Which of the following molecule has bent shape?
(A) PCl3
(B) OF2
(C) BH3
(D) BeBr2
Answer:
(B) OF2

9. Which of the following is INCORRECT?
(A) The strength of the bond depends on the extent of overlap of the atomic orbitals.
(B) The extent of overlap depends on the shape and size of the atomic orbitals.
(C) The energy of the bonded atoms is more than that of the free atoms.
(D) During overlap of atomic orbitals, the electron density increases in between the two nuclei.
Answer:
(C) The energy of the bonded atoms is more than that of the free atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

10. In the potential energy curve for hydrogen molecule, the maximum stability is achieved when …………..
(A) potential energy of the system is maximum
(B) potential energy of the system is minimum
(C) force of repulsion become greater than force of attraction
(D) no bond formation takes place
Answer:
(B) potential energy of the system is minimum

11. In acetylene, C-C σ bond is formed by …………. overlap.
(A) sp2-sp2
(B) sp-sp
(C) sp-s
(D) p-p
Answer:
(B) sp-sp

12. The formation of O-H bonds in a water molecule involves …………. overlap.
(A) sp3-s
(B) sp1-s
(C) sp-p
(D) sp3-p
Answer:
(A) sp3-s

13. The molecular orbital shown in the diagram can be described as ………….
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 78
(A) σ
(B) σ*
(C) π*
(D) π
Answer:
(C) π*

14. The bond order of lithium molecule is ………….
(A) one
(B) two
(C) three
(D) four
Answer:
(A) one

15. The bond order in N2 molecule is …………
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
Answer:
(C) 3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

16. The bond energies of F2, Cl2, Br2 and I2 are 37, 58, 46, and 36 kcal/mol respectively. The strongest bond is present in …………..
(A) Br2
(B) I2
(C) Cl2
(D) F2
Answer:
(C) Cl2

17. The common features among the species CO and NO+ are: ……………
(A) isoelectronic species and bond order 3
(B) isoelectronic species and bond order 2
(C) odd electron species and unstable
(D) odd electron species and bond order 1
Answer:
(A) isoelectronic species and bond order 3

18. Which of the following is CORRECT for H2O ?

H=O bondH2O molecule
(A)polarnonpolar
(B)nonpolarpolar
(C)polarpolar
(D)nonpolarnonpolar

Answer:
(C)

19. Each of the following molecules has a non-zero dipole moment EXCEPT:
(A) NF3
(B) BF3
(C) SO2
(D) LiH
Answer:
(B) BF3

20. Which of the following compounds is non-polar?
(A) HCl
(B) CH2Cl2
(C) CHCl3
(D) CCl4
Answer:
(D) CCl4

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

21. The dipole moment of …………..
(A) NF3 is higher than that of NH2
(B) BF3 is higher than that of NH3
(C) H2S is higher than that of H2O
(D) HCl is higher than that of HBr
Answer:
(D) HCl is higher than that of HBr

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 1.
Complete the information about the properties of subatomic particles in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 1
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 2

Question 2.
What are three important subatomic particles of an atom?
Answer:
Electron, proton and neutron are the three important subatomic particles of an atom.

Question 3.
Write a short note on discovery of electron.
Answer:

  • In the year 1897, J J. Thomson studied the properties of cathode rays through a cathode ray tube experiment and found that the cathode rays are a stream of very small, negatively charged particles.
  • These particles are 1837 times lighter than a hydrogen atom and are present in all atoms.
  • These particles were later named as electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 3

Question 4.
Draw labelled diagram of Rutherford’s α-particle scattering experiment.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 4

Question 5.
Write a short note on discovery of proton.
Answer:

  • After the discovery of nucleus in an atom, Rutherford found that the fast moving α-particles transmuted nitrogen into oxygen with simultaneous liberation of hydrogen.
    \({ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{~N}+{ }_{2}^{4} \alpha \longrightarrow{ }_{8}^{17} \mathrm{O}+{ }_{1}^{1} \mathrm{H}\)
  • He further showed that other elements could also be transmuted similarly and hydrogen was always emitted in the process.
  • Based on these observations, he proposed that the hydrogen nucleus must be contained inside nuclei of all the elements. Hence, he renamed hydrogen nucleus as proton.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 6.
Write a short note on discovery of neutron.
Answer:

  • In 1920, Ernest Rutherford proposed the existence of an electrically neutral and massive particle in the nucleus of an atom in order to account for the disparity in atomic number and atomic mass of an element.
  • In 1932, James Chadwick measured the velocity of protons ejected from paraffin by an unidentified radiation from beryllium (Be).
  • From that he determined the mass of the particles of this unidentified neutral radiation, which was found to be almost same as that of the mass of a proton.
  • He named this neutral particle as ‘neutron’, which was earlier predicted by Rutherford.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 5

Question 7.
State true or false. Correct the false statement.
i. An electron is 1837 times lighter than a proton.
ii. In Rutherford’s experiment of scattering of α-particles by thin gold foil, most of the α-particles
bounced back.
iii. Cathode rays are a stream of very small, positively charged particles.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False,
In Rutherford’s experiment of scattering of α-particles by thin gold foil, very few α-particles bounced back.
iii. False,
Cathode rays are a stream of very small, negatively charged particles.

Question 8.
Explain the term: Atomic number
Answer:

  • Atomic number is defined as the number of protons present in the nucleus of an atom of a particular element.
  • Atomic number is represented by Z.
  • An atom is electrically neutral. Hence, the number of protons equals to the number of electrons. In other words, the atomic number of an atom is equal to the number of electrons.

∴ Atomic Number (Z) = Number of protons = Number of electrons

Question 9.
Give reason: The approximate atomic mass in Daltons is numerically equal to the number of nucleons in the atom.
Answer:

  • The electrons possess negligible mass. They do not contribute much to the mass of an atom.
  • Therefore, the entire mass of an atom is supposed to be present in the nucleus which consists of protons and neutrons, which are collectively called as nucleons.

Hence, approximate atomic mass in Daltons is numerically equal to the number of nucleons in the atom.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 10.
Explain: Atomic mass number.
Answer:

  • The sum of the total number of protons and neutrons present in the nucleus of an atom is called the atomic mass number of that atom.
  • Atomic mass number is represented by A
  • Mass number (A) = Number of protons (Z) + Number of neutrons (N) = Total number of nucleons
    ∴ A = Z + N OR N = A – Z

Question 11.
How is an atom of an element ‘X’ having atomic number ‘Z’ and atomic mass number ‘A’ represented?
Answer:
An atom of an element ‘X’ having atomic number ‘Z’ and atomic mass number ‘A’ is represented as: \({ }_{Z}^{A} X\)

Question 12.
What is a nuclide?
Answer:
The atom or nucleus having a unique composition as specified by \({ }_{Z}^{A} X\) is called as a nuclide.

Question 13.
If an element ‘X’ has 6 protons and 8 neutrons, then write its representation.
Answer:
The representation of the given element is \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{X}\).

Question 14.
Three elements Q, R and T have mass number 40. Their atoms contain 22, 21 and 20 neutrons respectively. Represent their atomic composition with appropriate symbol.
Answer:
Mass number (A) = Number of protons (Z) + Number of neutrons (N) .
A = Z + N
∴ Z = A – N
For the given three elements, A = 40. Values of their atomic numbers Z, are calculated from the given values of the number of neutrons, N, using the above formula.
For Q: Z = A – N = 40 – 22 = 18
For R: Z = A – N = 40 – 21 = 19
For T: Z = A – N = 40 – 20 = 20
Now, atomic composition of an element (X) is represented as \({ }_{Z}^{A} X\).
The atomic compositions of the three elements are written as follows:
\({ }_{18}^{40} \mathrm{Q}\), \({ }_{19}^{40} \mathrm{R}\), \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{T}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 15.
Find out the number of protons, electrons and neutrons in the nuclide \({ }_{18}^{40} \mathrm{Ar}\).
Solution:
For the given nuclide,
Atomic number, Z = 18, Mass number, A = 40
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 18
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 40 – 18 = 22
Ans: Number of protons = 18, Number of electrons = 18, Number of neutrons = 22

Question 16.
How many protons, electrons and neutrons are there in the following nuclei?
i. \({ }_{8}^{17} \mathrm{O}\)
ii. \({ }_{12}^{25} \mathrm{Mg}\)
iii. \({ }_{35}^{80} \mathrm{Br}\)
Solution:
i. \({ }_{8}^{17} \mathrm{O}\)
Atomic number, Z = 8, Mass number, A = 17
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 8
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 17 – 8 = 9
Ans: Number of protons = 8, Number of electrons = 8, Number of neutrons = 9

ii. \({ }_{12}^{25} \mathrm{Mg}\)
Atomic number, Z = 12, Mass number, A = 25
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 12
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 25 – 12 = 13
Ans: Number of protons = 12, Number of electrons = 12, Number of neutrons = 13

iii. \({ }_{35}^{80} \mathrm{Br}\)
Atomic number, Z = 35, Mass number, A = 80
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 35
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 80 – 35 = 45
Ans: Number of protons = 35, Number of electrons = 35, Number of neutrons = 45

Question 17.
Define isotopes.
Answer:
Isotopes are defined as the atoms of an element having the same number ofprotons but different number of neutrons in their nuclei.
e.g. \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\), \({ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{Br}\) are isotopes.

Question 18.
Complete the information about the isotopes of carbon in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 6
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 7

Question 19.
Define isobars.
Answer:
Isobars are defined as the atoms of different elements having the same mass number but different atomic number.
e.g. \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{N}\) are isobars.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 20.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 8
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 9

Question 21.
The two natural isotopes of chlorine viz. \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\) and \({ }_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}\) exist in relative abundance of 3 : 1. Find out the average atomic mass of chlorine.
Solution:
Given: Isotopes of chlorine \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\) and \({ }_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}\).
Ratio of relative abundance of these isotopes is 3 : 1.
To find: Average atomic mass of chlorine
Calculation: From the relative abundance 3 : 1, it is understood that out of 4 chlorine atoms, 3 atoms have mass 35 and 1 atom has mass 37.
Therefore, the average atomic mass of chlorine = \(\frac{3 \times 35+1 \times 37}{4}\) = 35.5
∴ Average atomic mass of chlorine = 35.5 u
Ans: The average atomic mass of chlorine is 35.5 u.

Question 22.
Find out the average atomic mass of lithium (Li) from the following data:

IsotopeAtomic mass (u)Abundance
6Li6.0157.59%
7Li7.01692.41%

Solution:
Given: Three isotopes of lithium along with respective atomic mass and % abundance.
To find: Average atomic mass of lithium
Calculation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 10
Ans: Average atomic mass of lithium is 6.940 u.

Question 23.
Certain results were obtained when scientists studied the interactions of radiation with matter. What were the two results, utilized by Neils Bohr to overcome the drawbacks of Rutherford model?
Answer:
The two results utilized by Neils Bohr to overcome the drawbacks of Rutherford model were:

  • Wave particle duality of electromagnetic radiation
  • Line emission spectra of hydrogen

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 24.
Explain in short the wave particle duality of light (electromagnetic radiation).
Answer:
Wave particle duality of light (electromagnetic radiation):

  • Light has both particle and wave like nature.
    Phenomena such as diffraction and interference of light could be explained by treating light as electromagnetic wave.
  • However, the black-body radiation or photoelectric effect could not be explained by wave nature of light. This could be accounted for by considering particle nature of light. Thus, both phenomena could be explained only by accepting that light has dual behaviour.
  • When light interacts with matter it behaves as a stream of particles (called photons) and when light propagates, it behaves as an electromagnetic wave.

Question 25.
Observe the following figure of an electromagnetic wave and answer the questions given below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 11
i. What does ‘x’ represent?
ii. What does ‘y’ represent?
Answer:
i. ‘x’ represents amplitude of the wave.
ii. ‘y’ represents wavelength of the wave.

Question 26.
Define and explain the following terms:
i. Wavelength (λ).
ii. Frequency (ν)
iii. Wavenumber (\(\bar{v}\))
iv. Amplitude (A)
v. Velocity (c)
Answer:
i. Wavelength (λ):

  • The distance between two consecutive crests or two consecutive troughs in a wave is called wavelength.
  • It is represented by Greek letter λ (lambda).
  • The SI unit for wavelength is metre (m).

Note: The other units include Angstrom, nanometre, picometer (1 pm = 10-12 m) and micron (1µ = 10-6 m).
1Å = 10-8 cm = 10-10 m
1nm = 10-9 m = 10Å

ii. Frequency (ν):

  • The number of waves that pass a given point in one second is called frequency.
  • It is represented by Greek letter ‘ν’ (nu).
  • The SI unit of frequency is Hertz (Hz) or s-1.

Note: 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second (1 cps)
The units, kilo Hertz (kHz) and mega Hertz (mHz) are commonly used.
1 kHz = 103 Hz = 103 cps
1 mHz = 106 Hz = 106 cps

iii. Wavenumber (\(\bar{v}\)):

  • The number of wavelengths per unit length is called the wavenumber.
  • It is represented by \(\bar{v}\) (nu bar).
  • The commonly used unit for wavenumber is cm-1 while its SI unit is m-1.
  • Wavenumber of a wave is related to the wavelength as follows:
    \(\bar{v}\) = \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

iv. Amplitude (A):

  • The height of a crest or the depth of a trough from the line of propagation of the wave is called
    amplitude.
  • It is represented by letter ‘A’.
  • The square of the amplitude represents the intensity (brightness) of the radiation.

v. Velocity (c):

  • The distance travelled by a wave in one second is called the velocity of the wave.
  • It is denoted by letter c.
  • It is the product of the frequency and wavelength. Hence, c = νλ
  • The velocity of all types of electromagnetic radiations (in space or in vacuum) is the same and it is equal to the velocity of light (3 × 1010 cm s-1 or 3 × 108 m s-1. However, they may have different wavelengths and frequencies.

Question 27.
Write a short note on quantum theory of radiation.
Answer:
i. Max Planck put forward a theory known as Planck’s quantum theory to explain black-body radiation.
ii. According to this theory, the energy of electromagnetic radiation depends upon the frequency and not the amplitude.
iii. The smallest quantity of energy that can be emitted or absorbed in the form of electromagnetic radiation is called as ‘quantum’.
iv. The energy (E) of each quantum of radiation is directly proportional to its frequency (ν).
i.e., E ∝ ν ; E = hν
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10-34 J s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 28.
Parameters of blue and red light are 400 nm and 750 nm respectively. Which of the two is of higher energy?
Answer:
400 nm and 750 nm are the wavelengths of blue and red light respectively. Energy of radiation is given by the expression E = hν and the frequency (ν), of radiation is related to the wavelength by the expression.
ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
∴ E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
Therefore, shorter the wavelength, λ, larger the frequency, ν, and higher the energy, E. Thus, blue light which has shorter λ (400 nm) than red light (750 nm) has higher energy.

Question 29.
What is an emission spectrum?
Answer:

  • When a substance is irradiated with electromagnetic radiation, it absorbs energy. Atoms, molecules or ions, which have absorbed radiation are said to be ‘excited’. Heating can also result in an excited state.
  • The excited species emits the absorbed energy in the form of radiation. This process is called emission of radiation and the recorded spectrum of this emitted radiation is called ‘emission spectrum’.

Question 30.
Give some examples of commonly used light sources that work on atomic emission.
Answer:
Examples are fluorescent tube, sodium vapor lamp, neon sign and halogen lamp.

Question 31.
Write a short note on emission spectrum of hydrogen. Also, list all the five series of lines in the hydrogen spectrum.
Answer:
i. When electric discharge is passed through gaseous hydrogen, it emits radiation. The recorded spectrum of this emitted radiation is called hydrogen emission spectrum.

ii. This spectrum falls in different regions of electromagnetic radiation and it is comprised of a series of lines corresponding to different frequencies. That is, the spectrum was discontinuous.

iii. In the year, 1885, Balmer expressed the wave numbers of the emission lines in the visible region of electromagnetic spectrum by the formula:
\(\overline{\mathrm{v}}=109677\left[\frac{1}{2^{2}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)
where, n = 3, 4, 5,…
These lines are known as Balmer series.

iv. Rydberg found that other series of lines could be described by the following formula:
\(\bar{v}=109677\left[\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}}-\frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)
where, 109677 cm-1 is called Rydberg constant for hydrogen (RH).

v. Different series of emission spectral lines for hydrogen are as follows:

Seriesn1n2Region
Lyman12, 3, 4, ….Ultraviolet
Balmer23, 4, 5, ….Visible
Paschen34, 5, 6, ….Infrared
Bracket45, 6, 7, ….Infrared
Pfund56, 7, 8,….Infrared

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 32.
Observe the emission spectrum of hydrogen and answer the following questions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 12
i. Is the spectrum continuous?
ii. In which region of electromagnetic radiation does the Paschen series belong?
iii. Which series falls in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation?
Answer:
i. The spectra is not continuous and comprises of a series of lines corresponding to different frequencies.
ii. Paschen series falls in the infrared region of electromagnetic radiation.
iii. Balmer series falls partly in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation.

Question 33.
Give the expression to calculate wavenumber of the emission lines in the Balmer series.
Answer:
\(\bar{v}=109677\left[\frac{1}{2^{2}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)
where, n = 3, 4, 5, ….

Question 34.
Visible light has wavelengths ranging from 400 nm (violet) to 750 nm (red). Express these wavelengths in terms of frequency (Hz). (1 nm = 10-9 m)
Solution:
Given: Wavelengths: λ1 = 400 nm (for violet light), λ2 = 750 nm (for red light)
To find: Frequencies: ν1, ν2
Formula: ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
Calculation: i. Wavelength of violet light, λ1 = 400 nm = 400 × 10-9 m
Frequency, ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\) where c is speed of light = 3.0 × 108 ms-1
∴ ν1 = \(\frac{3.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}{400 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\) = 7.50 × 1014 Hz
ii. Wavelength of red light, λ2 = 750 nm = 750 × 10-9 m
Frequency, ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
∴ ν2 = \(\frac{3.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{750 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\) = 4.00 × 1014 Hz
Ans: The frequency of violet light is 7.50 × 1014 Hz and that of red light is 4.00 × 1014 Hz.

Question 35.
Yellow light emitted from a lamp has a wavelength of 580 nm. Find the frequency and wavenumber of this light.
Solution:
Given: Wavelength (λ) = 580 nm
To find: Frequency (ν), Wave number \(\bar{v}\)
Formulae : \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}, \bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}\)
Calculation: Wavelength of yellow light (λ) = 580 nm = 580 × 10-9 m [1 nm = 10-9 m]
We know that frequency (ν) is related to wavelength as: ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
where, c, velocity of light = 3.0 × 10-8 m s-1
∴ ν = \(\frac{3.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{580 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=5.17 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)
Again, Wave number, \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{580 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=1.72 \times 10^{6} \mathrm{~m}^{-1}\)
Ans: Frequency = 5.17 × 1014 s-1 and wave number = 1.72 × 106 m-1

Question 36.
Calculate the energy of a photon of radiation having wavelength 300 nm. [h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s]
Solution:
Given: Wavelength (λ) = 300 nm
To find: Energy of a photon (E)
Formulae: E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
Calculation: From formula,
E = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~s} \times 3 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{300 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=6.63 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)
Ans: Energy of a photon is 6.63 × 10-19 J.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 37.
Explain briefly the results of Bohr’s theory for hydrogen atom.
Answer:
i. The stationary states for electrons are numbered n = 1, 2, 3……. These integers are known as principal quantum numbers.
ii. The radii of the stationary states are rn = n2 a0, where a0 = 52.9 pm (picometer). Thus, the radius of the first stationary state, called the Bohr radius is 52.9 pm.
iii. The most important property associated with the electron is the energy of its stationary state. It is given by the formula:
En = -RH (1/n2), where n = 1, 2, 3, …..
RH is the Rydberg constant for hydrogen and its value in joules is 2.18 × 10-18 J.
The lowest energy state is called the ground state. Energy of the ground state (n = 1) is:
E1 = -2.18 × 10-18 × 1/12 = -2.18 × 10-18 J
Energy of the stationary state corresponding to n = 2 is
E2 = -2.18 × 10-18 × (1/(2)2) = -0.545 × 10-18 J.
iv. Bohr theory can be applied to hydrogen like species. For example, He+, Li2+, Be3+ and so on. Energies and radii of the stationary states associated with these species are given by:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 13
where, Z is the atomic number. From the above expressions, it can be seen that the energy decreases (becomes more negative) and radius becomes smaller as the value of Z increases.
v. Velocities of electrons can also be calculated from the Bohr theory. Qualitatively, it is found that the magnitude of velocity of an electron increases with increase of Z and decreases with increase in the principal quantum number (n).

Question 38.
How many electrons are present in \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\), 2He and He+ ? Which of these are hydrogen-like species?
Answer:
Hydrogen-like species contain only one electron.
Consider \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\):
Number of protons = Number of electrons = 1
Consider 2He:
Number of protons = Number of electrons = 2
Consider He+:
Number of electrons = (Number of electrons in He – 1) = 2 – 1 = 1
Thus, \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\) and He+ are hydrogen-like species.
[Note: Bohr’s theory is applicable to hydrogen atom and hydrogen-like species, which contain only one electron.]

Question 39.
Describe how the line spectrum of hydrogen is explained by Bohr theory.
Answer:
i. According to second postulate of Bohr theory, radiation is emitted when an electron moves from an outer orbit of higher principal quantum number (ni) to an inner orbit of lower principal quantum number (nf). The energy difference (ΔE) between the initial and final orbit of the electronic transition corresponds to the energy of the emitted radiation.
ii. From the third postulate of Bohr theory, ΔE can be expressed as
ΔE = Ei – Ef …….(1)
iii. According to the results derived from Bohr theory, the energy (En) of an orbit is related to its principal quantum number ‘n’ by the equation:
E = \(-\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{H}}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\right)\) ……(2)
iv. On combining these two equations, we get:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 14
v. Substituting the value of RH in joules, we get
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 15
vi. This expression can be rewritten in the terms of wavenumber of the emitted radiation in the following steps:
(ΔE) J = (h) J s × (ν) Hz
and
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 16
This equation appears like the Rydberg equation, where, nf = n1 and ni = n2.
In other words, Bohr theory successfully accounts for the empirical Rydberg equation for the line emission spectrum of hydrogen.

Question 40.
Observe the following diagram showing electronic transition in the hydrogen spectrum.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 17
i. Electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 1. Which series does it correspond to?
ii. Electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 4. Which series does it correspond to?
iii. Which transition will give second line of Balmer series?
Answer:
i. When electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 1, it corresponds to Lyman series.
ii. When electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 1, it corresponds to Bracket series.
iii. When electron jumps from n = 4 to n = 1, the second line of Balmer series is observed.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 41.
Explain de Broglie’s equation.
Answer:
de Broglie’s equation:

  • de Broglie proposed (in 1924) that matter should exhibit a dual behaviour. That is, every object which possesses a mass and velocity behaves both as a particle and as a wave. An electron has mass and velocity. This means that an electron should have momentum (p), a property of particle as well as wavelength (λ), a property of wave.
  • According to de Broglie, the wavelength λ of a particle of mass m moving with a velocity v is
    λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) where, h is Planck’s constant.
  • The quantity mv gives the momentum of the particles.
    λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\) where, p represents the momentum of the particle.
  • de Broglie’s prediction was confirmed by diffraction experiments (a wave property).

[Note: According to de Broglie’s equation, the wavelength of a moving particle is inversely proportional to its mass. Therefore, heavier particles have much smaller wavelength than lighter particles like electrons.]

Question 42.
Write a note on Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.
Answer:
i. Uncertainty principle was proposed by Wemer Heisenberg in 1927. It can be stated as “It is impossible to determine simultaneously, the exact position and exact momentum (or velocity) of an electron ”.
ii. If Δx is the uncertainty in the determination of the position of a very small moving particle and Δpx is the uncertainty in the determination of its momentum, then
Δx Δpx ≥ \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{4 \pi}\) …….(1) where h is Planck’s constant
iii. The above equation can alternatively be stated as,
Δx × m × Δvx ≥ \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{4 \pi}\), because Δpx = m × Δvx ……..(2)
where Δvx is the uncertainty in the determination of velocity and m is the mass of the particle.

Question 43.
Calculate the radius and energy associated with the first orbit of He.
Solution:
Given: n = 1
To find: Radius and energy associated with the first orbit of He+
Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 18
Calculation: He+ is a hydrogen-like species having Z = 2.
Using formula (i),
Radius of the first orbit of He+ = r1 = \(\frac{52.9 \times(1)^{2}}{2} \mathrm{pm}\)
= 26.45 pm
Using formula (ii),
Energy of the first orbit of He+ = E1 = -2.18 × 10-18 \(\left(\frac{2^{2}}{1^{2}}\right) \mathrm{J}\)
= -8.72 × 10-18 J
Ans: Radius of the first orbit of He+ is 26.45 pm and energy of the first orbit of He+ is -8.72 × 10-18 J.

Question 44.
What is the wavelength of the photon emitted during the transition from the orbit of n = 5 to that of n = 2 in hydrogen atom?
Solution:
Given: ni = 5, nf = 2
To find: Wavelength of the photon emitted
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 19
Ans: Wavelength of the photon emitted is 434 nm.

Question 45.
Calculate the mass of a hypothetical particle having wavelength 5894 A and velocity 1.0 × 108 ms-1.
Solution:
Given: Wavelength (λ) = 5894 Å, Velocity (ν) = 1.0 × 108 ms-1
To find: Mass of a particle
Formula: λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) or m = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda \mathrm{v}}\) (according to de-Broglie equation)
Calculation: m = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda \mathrm{v}}\)
∴ m = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~m}^{2} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\left(5894 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\right) \times\left(1.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\right)}\)
= 1.124 × 10-35 kg
Ans: Mass of a particle is 1.124 × 10-35 kg.

[Calculation using log table:
\(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{5894 \times 10^{-10} \times 1.0 \times 10^{8}}=\frac{6.626}{5894} \times 10^{-32}\)
= Antilog10 [log10 6.626 – log10 5894] × 10-32
= Antilog10 [0.8213 – 3.7704] × 10-32
= Antilog10 [latex]\overline{3} .0509[/latex] × 10-32 = 1.124 × 10-35]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 46.
Write a short note on Schrodinger equation.
Answer:
Schrodinger equation or wave equation:
i. Schrodinger developed the fundamental equation of quantum mechanics which incorporates wave particle duality of matter. The Schrodinger equation or wave equation is written as:
It \(\hat{\mathbf{H}}\)ψ = Eψ
Here \(\hat{\mathbf{H}}\) is a mathematical operator called Hamiltonian, ψ (psi) is the wave function and E is the total energy of the system.

ii. When Schrodinger equation is solved for an electron in hydrogen atom, the possible values of energy states (E) that the electron may have along with the corresponding wave function (ψ) are obtained. As a consequence of solving this equation, a set of three quantum numbers characteristic of the quantized energy levels and the corresponding wave functions are obtained. These are: Principal quantum number (n), azimuthal quantum number (l) and magnetic quantum number (ml).

iii. The solution of Schrodinger wave equation led to three quantum numbers and successfully predicted features of hydrogen atom emission spectrum.

iv. Splitting of spectral lines in multi-electron atomic emission spectra could not be explained through such model. These were explained by George Uhlenbeck and Samuel Goudsmit (1925) who proposed the presence of the fourth quantum number called electron spin quantum number, ms.

Question 47.
Write a short note on magnetic orbital quantum number (ml).
Answer:
Magnetic orbital quantum number (ml):

  • Magnetic orbital quantum number describes the relative spatial orientation of the orbitals in a given subshell.
  • It is denoted by m; and it has values from -l to +l through zero, giving total values or total orientations equal to (2l + 1).
  • For s-subshell, 1 = 0, hence, ml = 0. Thus, s-subshell contains only one orbital.
  • For p-subshell, l = 1, hence, ml = +1, 0, -1. Thus, p-subshell contains three orbitals having distinct orientations.

Question 48.
If n = 2, what are the values of quantum number l and ml ?
Answer:
For a given n, l = 0 to (n – 1) and for given l, ml = -l…., 0…. + l
Therefore, the possible values of l and ml for n = 2 are:

Value of nValue of lValue of ml
20ml = 0
1ml = -1

ml = 0

ml = +1

Question 49.
What are the values of ml for f-subshell?
Answer:
For f-subshell, l = 3. Therefore, ml has seven values: + 3, + 2, + 1, 0, -1, -2, -3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 50.
How many orbitals make the N-shell? What is the subshell wise distribution of orbitals in the N-shell?
Answer:
For N-shell principal quantum number n = 4
∴ Total number of orbitals in N-shell = n2 = 42 = 16. The total number of subshells in N-shell = n = 4.
The four subshells with their azimuthal quantum numbers and the constituent number of orbitals are as shown below:

Azimuthal quantum number (l)Symbol of subshellNumber of orbitals (2l + 1)
l = 0s(2 × 0) + 1 = 1
l = 1P(2 × 1) + 1 = 3
l = 2d(2 × 2) + 1 = 5
l = 3f(2 × 3) + 1 = 7

Question 51.
Complete the following flow chart:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 20
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 21

Question 52.
Write a short note on electron spin quantum number.
Answer:
Electron spin quantum number (ms):

  • Electron spin quantum number describes the spin state of the electron in an orbital. It is designated as ms.
  • An electron spins around its axis and this imparts spin angular momentum to it.
  • The two orientations which the spin angular momentum of an electron can take up give rise to the spin states which can be distinguished from each other by the spin quantum number, ms, which can be either +1/2 or -1/2.
  • The two spin states are represented by two arrows, ↑ (pointing up) and ↓ (pointing down) and thus have opposite spins.

Question 53.
An atom has two electrons in its 4s orbital. Write the values of the four quantum numbers for each of them.
Answer:
For the 4s orbital, 4 stands for the principal quantum number n; s stands for the subshell s having the value of azimuthal quantum number, l = 0. In the ‘s’ subshell, there is only one orbital and has magnetic quantum number, ml = 0. The two electrons in this orbital have opposite spins. Thus, the four quantum numbers of two electrons in 4s orbital are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 22

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 54.
Write a short note on probability density of electron.
Answer:
i. The probability of finding an electron at a given point in an atom is proportional to the square of the wave function at that point (ψ2).
ii. According to Max Born, the square of wave function at a point in an atom is the probability density of the electron at that point.
The following figure shows the probability density diagrams of Is and 2s atomic orbitals. These diagrams appear like a cloud.
The electron cloud of 2s orbital shows one node, which is a region with nearly zero probability density and displays the change of sign for its corresponding wavefunction.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 23

Question 55.
What is meant by the term ‘boundary surface diagram’?
Answer:
A boundary surface is drawn in space for an orbital such that the value of probability density (ψ2) is constant and encloses a region where the probability of finding electron is typically more than 90%. Such a boundary surface diagram is a good representation of shape of an orbital.
e.g. Boundary surface diagram of Is and 2s orbitals are spherical in shape.

Question 56.
Describe the shape of s orbital.
Answer:
Shape of s orbital:

  • For each value of principal quantum number ‘n’, there is only one s-orbital.
  • For s-orbital, l = 0 and ml = 0, hence s-orbital has only one orientation i.e., the probability of finding the electrons is same in all directions. Thus, s-orbital is spherically symmetrical around the nucleus.
  • The value of n determines the size of an orbital. With increase in the value of n, the size of the s-orbital increases.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 24

Question 57.
Describe the shape of 2p orbitals.
Answer:
Shape of 2p orbitals:
i. For p orbital, l = 1. For l = 1, ml = +1, 0, -1. Thus, p orbitals have three orientations.
ii. Each orbital has two lobes on the two sides of a nodal plane passing through the nucleus.
iii. Shape of 2p orbitals resembles a dumbbell.
iv. The size and energy of the three 2p orbitals are the same. However, their orientations in space are different. The lobes of the three 2p orbitals are along the x, y and z axes. Accordingly, the corresponding orbitals are designated as 2px, 2py and 2pz. The size and energy of the orbitals in p subshell increase with the increase of principal quantum number.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 25

Question 58.
Describe the shape of 3d orbitals.
Answer:
Shape of 3d orbitals:

  • For d orbital, l = 2. For l = 2, ml = +2, +1, 0, -1, -2. Thus, d orbitals have five orientations.
  • They are designated as dxy, dyz, dzx, dx2-y2 and dz.
  • Shape of 3d orbitals are shown in the following figure. The first three have double dumb-bell shape. They lie in xy, yz and xz plane, respectively. The dx2-y2 is also dumb-bell shaped and lies along the x and y axes. dz2 is dumb-bell shaped along z axis with a dough-nut shaped ring of high electron density around the nucleus in xy plane.
  • In spite of difference in their shapes, the five d orbitals are equivalent in energy. The shapes of 4d, 5d, 6d…….. orbitals are similar to those of 3d orbitals, but their respective size and energies are large or they are said to be more diffused.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 26

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 59.
Explain (n + l) rule with respect to energies of orbitals.
Answer:
The lower the sum (n + l) for an orbital, the lower is its energy. If two orbitals have the same (n + l) values, then the orbital with the lower value of n is of lower energy. This is called the (n + l) rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 27

Question 60.
What are the two methods of representing electronic configuration of an atom?
Answer:
The two methods of representing electronic configuration of an atom are:
i. Orbital notation: nsa npb ndc …..
In the orbital notation method, a shell is represented by the principal quantum number (n) followed by respective symbol of the subshell. The number of electrons occupying that subshell being written as superscript on right side of the symbol.

ii. Orbital diagram:
In the orbital diagram method, each orbital in a subshell is represented by a box and the electrons represented by an arrow (↑ for up spin and ↓ for down spin) are placed in the respective boxes. In this method, all the four quantum numbers of electron are accounted for.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 28
Note: Consider two electrons in 3s orbital:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 29

Question 61.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 30
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 31

Question 62.
Explain condensed orbital notation of electronic configuration of an atom.
Answer:

  • The orbital notation of electronic configuration of an element with high atomic number comprises a long train of symbols of orbitals with an increasing order of energy.
  • It can be condensed by dividing it into two parts: Inner or core part of electronic configuration and outer electronic configuration.
  • Electronic configuration of the preceding inert gas is a part of the electronic configuration of any element. In the condensed orbital notation, it is implied by writing symbol of that inert gas in a square bracket. It is core part of the electronic configuration of that element. The outer electronic configuration is specific to a particular element and written immediately after the bracket.
  • For example, the orbital notation of potassium ‘K (Z = 19) is Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1’. Its core part is the electronic configuration of the preceding inert gas argon ‘Ar: 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6, while ‘4s1’ is an outer part. Therefore, the condensed orbital notation of electronic configuration of potassium is ‘K: [Ar] 4s2.’

Note: Electronic configuration of the elements with atomic numbers 1 to 30 is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 32
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 33

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 63.
Write electronic configuration of 18Ar and 19K using orbital notation and orbital diagram method.
Answer:
From the atomic numbers, it is understood that 18 electrons are to be filled in Ar atom and 19 electrons are to be filled in K atom. These are to be filled in the orbitals according to the Aufbau principle. The electronic configuration of these atoms can be represented as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 34

Question 64.
Write condensed orbital notation of electronic configuration of the following elements:
i. Fluorine (Z = 9)
ii. Scandium (Z = 21)
iii. Cobalt (Z = 27)
iv. Zinc (Z = 30)
Answer:

No.ElementCondensed orbital notation
i.Fluorine (Z = 9)[He] 2s2 2p5
ii.Scandium (Z = 21)[Ar] 4s2 3d1
iii.Cobalt (Z = 27)[Ar] 4s2 3d7
iv.Zinc (Z = 30)[Ar] 4s2 3d10

Question 65.
Find out one dinegative anion and one unipositive cation which are isoelectronic with Ne atom. Write their electronic configuration using orbital notations and orbital diagram method.
Answer:
Atomic number (Z) of Ne is 10. Therefore, Ne and its isoelectronic species contain 10 electrons each. The dinegative anionic species, isoelectronic with Ne is obtained by adding two electrons to the atom with Z = 8. This is O2- ion.
The unipositive cationic species, isoelectronic with Ne is obtained by removing one electron from an atom with Z = 11. It is Na+ ion.
These species and their electronic configurations are shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 35

Question 66.
A student pictorially represented the electronic configuration of cobalt (Z = 27) in ground state as shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 36
i. Is this the correct representation?
ii. Identify the rules of electron filling that are violated (if any) in the above answer and give the correct representation.
Answer:
i. No, the electronic configuration of cobalt in ground state is incorrectly represented.
ii. The mles of electron filling that are violated in the above diagram are Pauli’s exclusion principle and Hund’s rule. The correct electronic configuration is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 37

Question 67.
With reference to the representative model of the gold foil experiment, answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 38
i. What evidence regarding an atom do lines A, B and C provide?
ii. How does Rutherford’s model contradict Thomson’s plum-pudding model?
iii. What results would you expect from the experiment if Thomson’s plum-pudding model was correct?
Answer:
i. Line A – Most of the space inside the atom is empty because most of the α-particles passed through the gold foil without getting deflected.
Line B – The nucleus is positively charged since some α-particles were deflected at small angles.
Line C – The nucleus contains most of the atoms mass since few α-particles were deflected backward, i.e. toward the radioactive source.

ii. According to plum-pudding model, an atom was considered a positively charged sphere with negatively charged electrons embedded in it. However, Rutherford’s gold foil experiment proved that an atom consists of large empty space with positive charge concentrated only at the centre (nucleus) and negatively charged electrons revolve around the nucleus in various orbits.

iii. If Thomson’s plum-pudding model was correct, then in the gold foil experiment we would not expect to see any significant deflection of the α-particles, i.e., Most α-particles would pass through the foil with very small or no deflections.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 68.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 39
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 40

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following statements about the electron is INCORRECT?
(A) It is a negatively charged particle.
(B) The mass of electron is equal to the mass of neutron.
(C) It is a basic constituent of all atoms.
(D) It is a constituent of cathode rays.
Answer:
(B) The mass of electron is equal to the mass of neutron.

2. The isotopes of an element differ in
(A) the number of neutrons in the nucleus
(B) the charge on the nucleus
(C) the number of extra-nuclear electrons
(D) both the nuclear charge and the number of extra-nuclear electrons
Answer:
(A) the number of neutrons in the nucleus

3. The difference between U235 and U238 atoms is that U238 contains ………….
(A) 3 more protons
(B) 3 more protons and 3 more electrons
(C) 3 more neutrons and 3 more electrons
(D) 3 more neutrons
Answer:
(D) 3 more neutrons

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

4. The number of electrons, protons and neutrons in 31P3- ion is respectively ……………
(A) 15, 15, 16
(B) 15, 16, 15
(C) 18, 15, 16
(D) 15, 16, 18
Answer:
(C) 18, 15, 16

5. In vacuum, the speed of all types of electromagnetic radiation is equal to ………….
(A) 3.0 × 106 m s-1
(B) 3.0 × 108 m s-1
(C) 3.0 × 1010 m s-1
(D) 3.0 × 1012 m s-1
Answer:
(B) 3.0 × 108 m s-1

6. In the electromagnetic spectrum, the ultraviolet region is around ………….. Hz.
(A) 106
(B) 1010
(C) 1016
(D) 1026
Answer:
(C) 1016

7. In hydrogen spectrum, the series of lines appearing in ultraviolet region of electromagnetic spectrum are called ………….
(A) Lyman series
(B) Balmer series
(C) Pfund series
(D) Brackett series
Answer:
(A) Lyman series

8. The energy of electron in the nth Bohr orbit of H-atom is …………
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 41
Answer:
(C) \(-\frac{2.18 \times 10^{-18}}{\mathrm{n}^{2}} \mathrm{~J}\)

9. Which of the following is a hydrogen-like species?
(A) He2+
(B) Be3+
(C) Li+
(D) H+
Answer:
(B) Be3+

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

10. The de Broglie wavelength associated with a particle of mass 10-6 kg moving with a velocity of 10 m s-1 is ………..
(A) 6.63 × 10-22 m
(B) 6.63 × 10-29 m
(C) 6.63 × 10-31 m
(D) 6.63 × 10-34 m
Answer:
(B) 6.63 × 10-29 m

11. An orbital is designated by …………. quantum numbers while an electron in an atom is designated by …………. quantum numbers.
(A) two, three
(B) three, two
(C) four, two
(D) three, four
Answer:
(D) three, four

12. In a multi-electron atom, the energy of the orbital depends on two quantum numbers: ……….
(A) n and ms
(B) n and ml
(C) ml and ms
(D) n and l
Answer:
(D) n and l

13. The number of subshells in a shell is equal to ………..
(A) n
(B) n2
(C) n – 1
(D) l + 1
Answer:
(A) n

14. The maximum number of electrons in a subshell for which l = 3 is …………..
(A) 14
(B) 10
(C) 8
(D) 4
Answer:
(A) 14

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

15. Which of the following is INCORRECT?
(A) A nodal plane has ψ2 very close to zero.
(B) The value of ψ2 at any finite distance from the nucleus is always zero.
(C) A boundary surface diagram enclosing 100 % probability density cannot be drawn.
(D) A boundary surface diagram is a good representation of shape of an orbtial.
Answer:
(B) The value of ψ2 at any finite distance from the nucleus is always zero.

16. pz-Orbital has ……….. nodal plane/planes.
(A) zero
(B) one
(C) two
(D) three
Answer:
(B) one

17. Which of the following pairs of d-orbitals will have electron density along the axis?
(A) dxy, dx2-y2
(B) dz2, dxz
(C) dxz, dyz
(D) dz2, dx2-y2
Answer:
(D) dz2, dx2-y2

18. The two electrons have the following set of quantum numbers:
P = 3, 2, -2, +\(\frac {1}{2}\)
Q = 3, 0, 0, +\(\frac {1}{2}\)
Which of the following statement is TRUE?
(A) P and Q have same energy
(B) P has greater energy than Q
(C) P has lesser energy than Q
(D) P and Q represent same electron
Answer:
(B) P has greater energy than Q

19. For 3d orbital, the values of n and l are ………… respectively.
(A) 0, 3
(B) 3, 2
(C) 3, 0
(D) 3, 3
Answer:
(B) 3, 2

20. For the electron present in 1 s orbital of helium atom, the correct set of values of quantum numbers is ………..
(A) 1, 0, 0, +1/2
(B) 1, 1, 0, +1/2
(C) 1, 1, 1, +1/2
(D) 2, 0, 0, +1/2
Answer:
(A) 1, 0, 0, +1/2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

21. The ground state electronic configuration for chromium atom (Z = 24) is …………
(A) [Ar] 3d5 4s1
(B) [Ar] 3d4 4s2
(C) [Ar] 3d8
(D) [Ar] 4s1 4p5
Answer:
(A) [Ar] 3d5 4s1

22. The electronic configuration of Ni2+ is ……….. (Atomic number of Ni = 28)
(A) [Ar] 4s2 3d6
(B) [Ar] 4s1 3d8
(C) [Ar] 3d8
(D) [Ar] 4s2 3d8
Answer:
(C) [Ar] 3d8

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 1.
Give reason: Purification of a chemical substance is important before investigating its composition and properties.
Answer:

  • Chemical substances occur in nature in the impure stage.
  • Also, chemical substances synthesized in the laboratory are obtained in crude and impure form.
  • Impurities present in the chemical substances may interfere with the properties to be determined (e.g. melting point or boiling point).
  • Therefore, before investigating the composition and properties of a given chemical substance, it is important to obtain it in pure form.

Question 2.
What are the different types of impurities that a solid may contain?
Answer:
A solid substance may contain two types of impurities:

  • Impurities that are soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.
  • Impurities that are not soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.

Question 3.
For which of the following cases, is the process of filtration feasible? Why?
Case 1: A solid substance containing impurities that are soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.
Case 2: A solid substance containing impurities that are not soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.
Answer:
Impurities which are not soluble in the same solvent as the main compound can be separated by a simple process called filtration. Hence, for ‘Case 2’, filtration is more feasible.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 4.
Describe the process of filtration with a neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
i. Impurities which are not soluble in the same solvent as the main compound can be separated by a simple process called filtration.
ii. Procedure:
a. A circular piece of filter paper is folded to form a cone and fitted in the funnel.
b. The funnel is fixed on a stand and a beaker is kept below.
c. The mixture which has to be purified is added to a suitable solvent in which the main compound dissolves.
d. The paper is made moist, and the solution to be filtered is poured on the filter paper.
e. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 1
iii. The insoluble part remaining on the filter paper is called residue and the liquid which pass through the filter paper and collected in the beaker is called filtrate.
iv. This process is similar to separating tea leaves from decoction of tea or sand from mixture of sand and water.

Question 5.
Why is safety bottle used when filtration is carried out under suction?
Answer:
The safety bottle is used to prevent sucking of the filtrate into suction pump.

Question 6.
Name the steps involved in the process of crystallization.
Answer:
Steps involved in the process of crystallization:

  • Preparation of a saturated solution
  • Hot filtration
  • Cooling of the filtrate
  • Filtration

Question 7.
How is saturated solution of the crude solid prepared?
Answer:

  • A saturated solution of the crude solid is prepared by boiling it in a small but sufficient quantity of a suitable solvent.
  • The main solute from the sample of the crude solid dissolves to form a saturated solution on boiling.

[Note: The solution is not saturated with respect to the soluble impurities, as they are in small proportion.]

Question 8.
Explain the following steps with respect to the process of crystallization.
i. Preparation of a saturated solution
ii. Hot filtration
iii. Cooling of the filtrate
iv. Filtration
Answer:
i. Preparation of a saturated solution:

  • A saturated solution of the crude solid is prepared by boiling it in a small but sufficient quantity of a suitable solvent.
  • On doing so the main solute forms an almost saturated solution, but the solution is not saturated with respect to the soluble impurities, as they are in small proportion.

ii. Hot filtration: The hot saturated solution is quickly filtered to remove undissolved impurities as residue. Filtration under suction can be employed for rapid filtration.

iii. Cooling of the filtrate:

  • The hot filtrate is allowed to cool.
  • On cooling, the filtrate becomes supersaturated with respect to the main dissolved solute because solubility of a substance decreases with lowering of temperature.
  • The excess quantity of the dissolved solute comes out of the solution in the form of crystals.
  • The dissolved impurities, however, do not supersaturate the solution, as their quantity is small.
  • These continue to stay in the solution in dissolved state even on cooling. Therefore, the separated crystals are free from soluble impurities.

iv. Filtration:

  • The crystals obtained on cooling are further purified by filtration to remove insoluble impurities.
  • The filtrate obtained is called as mother liquor.
  • The crystals obtained after filtration are free from soluble as well as insoluble impurities.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 9.
Name the common solvents used in the process of crystallization.
Answer:
The commonly used solvents are water, ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, acetone, ether or their combinations.

Question 10.
Describe the process of crystallization of common salt from impure sample with the help of a diagram.
Answer:

  • Impure sample of a common salt is added to the required quantity of water and stirred with a glass rod.
  • More amount of salt is added and the solution is heated till no more salt dissolves.
  • The hot saturated solution is filtered off to remove insoluble impurities while the filtrate is collected in an evaporating dish.
  • The filtrate is allowed to cool which results in the formation crystals of pure salt (NaCl) leaving behind the soluble impurities.
  • The crystals are filtered and dried.

The diagram is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 2

Question 11.
Which solvent is used for the purification of copper sulphate and benzoic acid?
Answer:
The solvent used for the purification of copper sulphate and benzoic acid is water.

Question 12.
Define: Fractional crystallization
Answer:
Fractional crystallization is a process wherein two or more soluble substances having widely different solubilities in the same solvent at same temperature are separated by crystallization.

Question 13.
Give a brief description of the principle of fractional crystallization.
Answer:
Fractional crystallization is based on the differences in solubilities of two or more compounds in the same solvent at the same temperature. That is, the substance which is least soluble crystallizes out first and the most soluble substance crystallizes out last.
e.g. Mixture of two solutes A and B can be purified by fractional crystallization as follows:

  • Preparation of a saturated solution: Mixture of two solutes A and B are dissolved in a suitable hot solvent to prepare a saturated solution.
  • Hot filtration: The hot saturated solution is filtered to remove insoluble impurities.
  • Cooling of the filtrate: Hot filtrate is allowed to cool. On cooling, the solute which is least soluble crystallizes out first leaving behind the most soluble substance in the mother liquor.
  • Filtration: The crystals formed are filtered, washed with solvent and dried. Crystals obtained will be of a solute which is least soluble in a given solvent.
  • Concentration of a mother liquor: The mother liquor is concentrated by evaporating the solvent. These crystals are filtered and dried to obtain the second purified component (which was more soluble in given solvent).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 14.
Which type of impure liquids can be purified by the process of distillation?
Answer:
Distillation technique can be employed for the purification of

  • volatile liquids from non-volatile impurities.
  • liquids having sufficient difference in their boiling point.

Question 15.
Explain the construction of simple distillation unit using neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
i. The apparatus used for simple distillation is shown in the figure below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 3
ii. It consists of round bottom flask fitted with a cork having a thermometer.
iii. The flask has a sidearm through which it is connected to a condenser.
iv. The condenser has a jacket with two outlets through which water is circulated.
v. The liquid to be distilled is taken in the round bottom flask fixed by clamp.
vi. The flask is placed in a water bath or oil bath or sometimes wire gauze is kept on a stand as shown in the figure.

Question 16.
State the principle involved and describe the process to separate acetone and water from their mixture.
Answer:
i. Acetone and water can be separated from their mixture by simple distillation.

ii. Principle: Acetone and water are two miscible liquids having an appreciable difference (more than 30 K) in their boiling points. Acetone boils at 56 °C while boiling point of water is 100 °C. When the mixture of acetone and water is heated and temperature of the mixture reaches 56 °C acetone will distil out first. Once all acetone distils out, and when the temperature rises to 100 °C water will distil out.

iii. Process to separate acetone and water from their mixture:

  • Take the mixture of water and acetone in the distillation flask.
  • Heat the flask on a water bath carefully. At 56 °C acetone will distil out, collect it in receiver.
  • After all acetone distilled, change the receiver. Discard a few mL of the liquid. As the temperature reaches 100 °C water will begin to distil. Collect this in another receiver.

Question 17.
What is the advantage of fractional distillation over simple distillation?
Answer:
If in a mixture, the difference in boiling points of two liquids is not appreciable/large, they cannot be separated using simple distillation. To separate such liquids, fractional distillation is used.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 18.
Label the following diagram and explain the process by giving example.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 4
Answer:
The labelled diagram is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 5
i. In fractional distillation, vapours first pass through the fractionating column.
ii. Vapours of more volatile liquid with lower boiling point rise up more than the vapours of liquid having higher boiling point.
e.g.

  • Suppose we have a mixture of two liquid ‘A’ and ‘B’ having boiling points 363 K and 373 K respectively.
  • ‘A’ is more volatile and ‘B’ is less volatile. As the mixture is heated, vapours of ‘A’ along with a little vapours of ‘B’ rise up and come in contact with the large surface of the fractionating column.
  • Vapours of ‘B’ condense rapidly into the distillation flask. While passing through the fractionating column, there is an exchange between the ascending vapours and descending liquid. The vapours of ‘B’ are scrubbed off by the descending liquid, this makes the vapours richer in ‘A’.
  • This process is repeated each time the vapours and liquid come in contact with the surface in the fractionating column.
  • Rising vapours become richer in ‘A’ and escape through the fractionating column and reach the condenser while the liquid in the distillation flask is richer in ‘B.
  • The separated components are further purified by repeating the process.

Question 19.
Give two examples of a mixture that can be separated by fractional distillation.
Answer:

  1. Mixture of acetone (b.p. 329 K) and methyl alcohol (b.p. 337.7 K)
  2. Mixture of acetone (b.p. 329 K) and benzene (b.p. 353 K)

Question 20.
Give one industrial application of fractional distillation.
Answer:
Fractional distillation is used in petroleum industry to separate different fractions of crude oil.

Question 21.
Write a short note on distillation under reduced pressure.
Answer:

  • Liquids having very high boiling points or which decompose on heating are purified by the method of distillation under reduced pressure.
  • In this method, the liquid is made to boil at a temperature lower than its normal boiling point by reducing the pressure on its surface.
  • The external pressure is reduced using a water pump or vacuum pump, e.g. Glycerol can be separated from soap by using this method.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 22.
Write the principle of solvent extraction and explain the process with labelled diagram.
Answer:
Principle: Extraction of compound takes place based on the difference in solubility of compound in two liquids.

  • In this process, the solute distributes itself between two immiscible liquids. From the aqueous phase the solute gets extracted in the organic phase.
  • On shaking for a few times with small volumes of organic phase, most of the solute gets extracted into the organic phase.
  • Then solute is then recovered from organic solvent either by evaporation of organic solvent or distillation.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 6

Question 23.
Write a short note on continuous extraction method.
Answer:

  • During solvent extraction, if the solute is found to be less soluble in organic phase, then continuous extraction method is employed.
  • In this method, the same amount of organic solvent is used repeatedly for extraction.
  • This ensures that the most of the solute gets extracted in the organic phase.
  • This technique involves continuous distillation of the solvent within the same assembly. Hence, the use of large quantity of organic solvent is avoided.

Question 24.
Match the following:

ProcessUsed in the purification/separation of
i.Crystallizationa.Acetone and benzene
ii.Simple distillationb.Benzoic acid and water
iii.Fractional distillationc.Impure copper sulphate
iv.Solvent extractiond.Acetone and water

Answer:
i – c,
ii – d,
iii – a,
iv – b

Question 25.
What is chromatography? Explain the principle behind it.
Answer:
Chromatography is a technique used to separate components of a mixture, and also purify compounds.
Principle: The principle of separation of substances in chromatography is based on the distribution of the solutes in two phases, i.e., stationary phase and mobile phase.

  • Chromatography uses two phases for separation.
  • This technique is based on the difference in rates at which components in the mixture move through the stationary phase under the influence of the mobile phase.
  • In this technique, first the mixture of components is loaded at one end of the stationary phase and then the mobile phase is allowed to move over the stationary phase. The mobile phase can be a pure solvent or a mixture of solvents.
  • Depending on the relative affinity of the components toward the stationary phase and mobile phase, they remain on the surface of the stationary phase or move along with the mobile phase, and gradually get separated.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 26.
Give a brief description of column chromatography with an illustration.
Answer:
Column chromatography involves the separation of components over a column of stationary phase. The stationary phase material can be alumina, silica gel.
Procedure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 7

  • A slurry of the stationary phase material is filled in a long glass tube provided with a stopcock at the bottom and a glass wool plug at the lower end.
  • The mixture to be separated is dissolved in a suitable solvent and then it is loaded on top of adsorbent column.
  • A suitable mobile phase which could be a single solvent or a mixture of solvents is then poured over the adsorbent column.
  • The mixture along with the mobile phase slowly moves down the column.
  • The solutes get adsorbed on the stationary phase and depending on the degree to which they are adsorbed, they get separated from each other.
  • The component which is readily adsorbed are retained on the column and others move down the column to various distances forming distinct bands.
  • The component which is less strongly adsorbed is desorbed first and leaves the column first, while the strongly adsorbed component is eluted later.
  • The solutions of these components are collected separately.
  • These different components can be recovered by evaporating the solvent.

Question 27.
How is TLC plate or chromplate prepared?
Answer:
TLC plate or chromplate is prepared by applying a thin layer (0.2 mm thick) of adsorbent silica gel or alumina spread over a glass plate.

Question 28.
Describe the process of thin layer chromatography (TLC) and separation of components in it.
Answer:
i. Process:

  • A thin layer (about 0.2 mm thick) of an adsorbent like silica gel or alumina is spread over a thin glass plate (called chromplate or TLC plate). This plate acts as a stationary phase.
  • With the help of a capillary tube, the solution of the mixture to be separated is spotted at above 2 cm (on base line) from one end of the TLC plate.
  • The TLC plate is then placed in a closed jar containing a suitable solvent (mobile phase or eluant).
  • As the mobile phase rises up the plate, the components of the mixture move up along with the mobile phase to different distances depending upon their degree of adsorption, thus resulting in complete separation.

ii. Separation of components:

  • If the components are coloured, they appear as separated coloured spots on the plate.
  • If the components are not coloured but have property of fluorescence, they can be visualised under UV light, or the plate can be kept in a chamber containing a few iodine crystals. The Iodine vapours are adsorbed by the components and the spots appear brown.
  • Amino acids are visualised by spraying the plate with a solution of ninhydrin. This is known as spraying agent.

Question 29.
Name the physical state each of stationary phase and mobile phase in partition chromatography.
Answer:
In partition chromatography, both stationary and mobile phases are in liquid state.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 30.
State the principle of partition chromatography.
Answer:
Partition chromatography is based on continuous differential partitioning of components of a mixture between stationary and mobile phases.

Question 31.
Describe the process of paper chromatography.
Answer:
Process of paper chromatography:

  • The mixture of the compound to be analysed is dissolved in a suitable solvent and spotted on the chromatography paper about 2 cm from one end of the paper using a glass capillary.
  • The paper is then suspended in a chamber containing the mobile phase.
  • The mobile phase rises up the paper and flows over the spot, due to capillary action.
  • Different solutes are retained differently on the paper depending on their selective partitioning between the two phases. The paper strip so developed, is known as chromatogram.

Question 32.
Name the following:
i. A glass plate coated with a thin layer of silica gel.
ii. A spraying agent used for the visualization of amino acids.
Answer:
i. Chromplate/TLC plate
ii. Ninhydrin

Question 33.
Write a short note on Rf value.
Answer:
i. In chromatography, migration of the solute relative to the solvent front gives an idea about the relative retention of the solutes (or components of t the mixture) on the stationary phase.
ii. The relative adsorption of solutes is expressed in terms of its Rf value.
The symbol Rf stands for Retardation Factor.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 9

Question 34.
In a chemical laboratory, Priyal was asked to isolate an organic compound from its aqueous solution. She added ethyl acetate to the given sample, separated the organic layer and kept it for evaporation. At the end of her practical, Priyal found few crystals in the beaker which she kept for evaporation. Answer the following questions:
i. In the above passage, which method was used by Priyal for separation? State its principle.
ii. Why do you think the organic compound dissolved in ethyl acetate?
iii. Illustrate the method of separation used in the passage with an example.
Answer:
i. Method used: Solvent extraction method.
Principle: Extraction of compound takes place based on the difference in solubility of compound in two liquids,

  • In this process, the solute distributes itself between two immiscible liquids. From the aqueous phase the solute gets extracted in the organic phase.
  • On shaking for a few times with small volumes of organic phase, most of the solute gets extracted into the organic phase.
  • Then solute is then recovered from organic solvent either by evaporation of organic solvent or distillation.

ii. An organic compound (non-polar) dissolves in organic solvents (non-polar) because of the dipole-dipole interactions in between them (like dissolves like). Water is a polar solvent and it is unlikely that the covalent constituents of the organic substance is strong enough to break the ionic bonds. Any substance dissolves in other because it is able to break the bonds between the solvent molecules and form weak bonds with the solvent molecules. Hence, the organic compound will be more soluble in ethyl acetate as compared to water and this helps in its isolation from aqueous solution.

iii. An example for the separation of organic compound using solvents extraction method is: Benzoic acid in water can be extracted from its aqueous solution by using benzene.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 35.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 10
Based on the above diagram, answer the following questions:
i. Name the chromatographic technique involved.
ii. From the developed chromatogram, state which has the highest and which has the lowest Rf value?
iii. Based on the TLC, which component would elute out at the end of a column chromatography?
iv. Mention two applications of TLC method.
Answer:
i. Thin layer chromatography
ii. Based on the developed chromatogram, spot ‘x’ has the highest Rf value while spot ‘z’ the lowest Rf value.
iii. Based on the TLC, spot ‘z’ being strongly adsorbed will elute at the end of a column chromatography.
iv. Applications of TLC are:

  • Separation of plant pigments from its mixture.
  • Separation of impurities from a given organic compound.
  • Separation of different amino acid.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. If a crude solid is made of mainly one substance and has some impurities then it is purified by ……………..
(A) crystallization
(B) distillation
(C) extraction
(D) sublimation
Answer:
(A) crystallization

2. Impure common salt can be purified by ……………
(A) crystallization
(B) distillation
(C) extraction
(D) sublimation
Answer:
(A) crystallization

3. Which of the following solvents is most commonly used for the crystallization of copper sulphate?
(A) Water
(B) Acetone
(C) Ether
(D) Methanol
Answer:
(A) Water

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

4. In distillation of liquid, water condenser is used ……………
(A) to boil the liquid
(B) to collect the liquid
(C) to condense hot vapours of the liquid
(D) to adsorb the liquid
Answer:
(C) to condense hot vapours of the liquid

5. Separation of binary mixture of acetone and methyl alcohol is done by ……………
(A) simple distillation
(B) fractional distillation
(C) fractional crystallization
(D) re-crystallization
Answer:
(B) fractional distillation

6. Which of the following method is used to separate different fractions of crude oil?
(A) Solvent extraction
(B) Simple distillation
(C) Fractional distillation
(D) TLC
Answer:
(C) Fractional distillation

7. The method used to separate a given organic compound present in aqueous solution by shaking with a suitable solvent in which the compound is more soluble than water is called ……………….
(A) simple distillation
(B) fractional distillation
(C) solvent extraction
(D) crystallization
Answer:
(C) solvent extraction

8. Adsorption chromatography is a chromatographic technique based on the principle of ……………
(A) differential adsorption
(B) differential solubility
(C) differential extraction
(D) all of these
Answer:
(A) differential adsorption

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

9. The stationary phase and mobile phase in TLC are ……………. respectively.
(A) solid and liquid
(B) solid and gas
(C) liquid and solid
(D) liquid and liquid
Answer:
(A) solid and liquid

10. Which of.the following is most commonly used for the visualization of amino acids in chromatography?
(A) Ultraviolet light
(B) Spraying agent
(C) Sunlight
(D) X-rays
Answer:
(B) Spraying agent

11. The stationary phase and mobile phase in partition chromatography are ………….. respectively.
(A) solid and liquid
(B) solid and gas
(C) liquid and solid
(D) liquid and liquid
Answer:
(D) liquid and liquid

12. Paper chromatography is based on the principle of …………….
(A) adsorption
(B) partition
(C) solubility
(D) volatility
Answer:
(B) partition

13. In paper chromatography, the mobile phase rises up the chromatography paper due to ………………
(A) evaporation of volatile solvent
(B) capillary action
(C) gravitational force
(D) differential adsorption
Answer:
(B) capillary action

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

14. Which of the following is a type of partition chromatography?
(A) Column chromatography
(B) Thin layer chromatography
(C) Paper chromatography
(D) Both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(C) Paper chromatography

15. The principle of differential adsorption is applicable for which of the following chromatographic technique?
(A) Column chromatography
(B) Thin layer chromatography
(C) Paper chromatography
(D) Both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(D) Both (A) and (B)

16. Which of the following method will give clean separation of a sample of chloroform (organic liquid) and water in a short time span?
(A) TLC
(B) Distillation under reduced pressure
(C) Solvent extraction
(D) Simple distillation
Answer:
(C) Solvent extraction